United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Office of Air Quality
Planning and Standards
Research Triangle Park NC 27711
EPA-450/4-88-002a
December 1987
Air
Industrial Source
Complex (ISC)
Dispersion Model
User's Guide —
Second Edition (Revised)

Volume I.
               OF

-------
                              EPA-450/4-88-002a
        Industrial Source Complex
         (ISC) Dispersion Model
User's Guide-Second Edition (Revised)

                 Volume I.
            U S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                 Office of Air and Radiation
             Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards
            Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711

                     December 1987

-------
                                        DISCLAIMER

This report has been reviewed by the Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, EPA, and approved for
publication. Mention of trade names or commercial products is not intended to constitute endorsement or
recommendation for use.

-------
                                ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS









    The  ISC  Model  User's  Guide  was originally  written by  J.F.  Bowers, J.R.




-Bjorklund,  and C.S.  Cheney of the  H.E.  Cramer Company, Inc.,  Salt  Lake City,




Utah.   That  work  was  funded  by  the  Environmental  Protection  Agency under




Contract  No.  68-02-3323,  with  George  Schewe  as  the  Project  Officer.  This




second  edition has been, prepared by David J. Wackter  and  John A. Foster, TRC




Environmental  Consultants,  Inc.;  East Hartford, Connecticut.   It was funded by




the Environmental  Protection Agency under Contract No.  68-02-3886 with  Russell




F. Lee as Project Officer.  Technical  reviews  and comments  provided by  Richard




Daye,  Alan  Cimorelli,  James Dicke,  Jerome  Mersch  and  Joseph Tikvart  are




gratefully  acknowledged.
                                      -111-

-------

-------
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                    VOLUME I

SECTION                                                                    PAGE

  1.0             MODEL OVERVIEW	      1-1
      1.1           Introduction	      1-1
      1.2           Background and Purpose	      1-2
      1.3           General Description	      1-3
      1.4           System Description   	      1-6
          1.4.1       The ISC Short-Term (ISCST)  Model  Program  ....      1-6
          1.4.2       The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program 	      1-7
      1.5           Summary of Input Data	      1-7
          1.5.1       The ISC Short-Term (ISCST)  Model  Program  ....      1-7
          1.5.2       The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program 	     1-13

  2.0             TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 	      2-1
      2.1           General	      2-1
      2.2           Model Input Data	      2-1
          2.2.1       Meteorological Input Data	      2-1
          2.2.2       Source Input Data	     2-10
          2.2.3       Receptor Data	     2-14
      2.3           Plume Rise Formulas	-	     2-19
          2.3.1       Wind Profile	     2-19
          2.3.2       Stack Downwash	     2-19
          2.3.3       Buoyancy Flux	     2-20
          2.3.4       Unstable or Neutral — Crossover  Between Momentum
                        and Buoyancy	     2-20
          2.3.5       Unstable or Neutral — Buoyancy Rise	     2-21
          2.3.6       Unstable or Neutral — Momentum Rise	     2-22
          2.3.7       Stability Parameter 	     2-22
          2.3.8       Stable — Crossover Between Momentum and Buoyancy    2-22
          2.3.9       Stable — Buoyancy Rise	     2-23
          2.3.10      Stable — Momentum Rise	     2-23
          2.3.11      All Conditions — Distance  Less Than Distance to
                        Final Rise - (Gradual Rise)	     2-24
          2.3.12      Plume Rise  When Schulman and Hanna Building
                      Downwash is Selected  	     2-25
      2.4           The ISC Short-Term Dispersion Model Equations . .  .    2-25b
          2.4.1       Stack Emissions	    2-25b
          2.4.2       Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions  	     2-54
          2.4.3       The ISC Short-Term Dry Deposition Model	     2-60
      2.5           The ISC Long-Term Dispersion Model  Equations  . .  .     2-62
          2.5.1       Stack Emissions	     2-62
          2.5.2       Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions	     2-67
          2.5.3       The ISC Long-Term Dry Deposition  Model	     2-68
      2.6           Example Problem	     2-70
          2.6.1       Description of a Hypothetical Potash Processing
                        Plant	     2-70
          2.6.2       Example ISCST Problem	     2-70
          2.6.3       Example ISCLT Problem 	     2-77
                                      -v-                                 12/87

-------
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                    VOLUME I
                                   (CONTINUED)

SECTION                                                                    PAGE

  3.0             USER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE ISC SHORT-TERM (ISCST)
                    MODEL PROGRAM	      3-1
      3.1           Summary of Program Options,  Data Requirements and
                      Output	      3-1
          3.1.1       Summary of ISCST Program Options  	      3-1
          3.1.2       Data Input Requirements	      3-6
          3.1.3       Output Information  	     3-24

      3.2           User's Instructions for the ISCST Program 	     3-26
          3.2.1     •  Program Description	     3-26
          3.2.2       Data Deck Setup	     3-29
          3.2.3       Input Data Description	"  3-29
          3.2.4       Program Output Data Description 	     3-55
          3.2.5       Program Run Time, Page and Tape Output Estimates     3-61
          3.2.6       Program Diagnostic Messages 	     3-66
          3.2.7       Program Modification for Computers Other Than
                        UNIVAC 1100 Series Computers  	     3-67

  4.0             USER'S INSTRUCTION FOR THE ISC LONG-TERM (ISCLT)
                    MODEL PROGRAM	      4-1
      4.1           Summary of Program Options, Data Requirements and
                      Output	      4-1
          4.1.1       Summary of ISCLT Program Options  	      4-1
          4.1.2       Data Input Requirements	      4-5
          4.1.3       Output Information  	     4-29
      4.2           User's Instructions for the ISCLT Program 	     4-31
          4.2.1       Program Description 	     4-31
          4.2.2       Data Deck Setup	     4-32
          4.2.3       Input Data Description	     4-34
          4.2.4       Program Output Data Description 	     4-59
          4.2.5       Page and Tape Output Estimates	     4-61
          4.2.6       Program Diagnostic Messages 	     4-66
          4.2.7       Program Modifications for Computers Other Than
                        UNIVAC 1100 Series Computers  	     4-66

  5.0             REFERENCES	      5-1
                                      -vi-

-------
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                   VOLUME  II
APPENDICES

   A             COMPLETE FORTRAN LISTING OF THE INDUSTRIAL SOURCE COMPLEX
                 SHORT TERM MODEL (ISCST)  COMPUTER PROGRAM

   B             COMPLETE FORTRAN LISTING OF THE INDUSTRIAL SOURCE COMPLEX
                 LONG TERM MODEL (ISCLT)  COMPUTER PROGRAM

   C             EXAMPLE EXECUTIONS OF THE ISC SHORT-TERM MODEL (ISCST)
                 COMPUTER PROGRAM

   D             EXAMPLE EXECUTIONS OF THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL (ISCLT)
                 COMPUTER PROGRAM

   E             LOGIC FLOW DESCRIPTION OF THE ISC SHORT-TERM MODEL
                 (ISCST) COMPUTER PROGRAM

   F             LOGIC FLOW DESCRIPTION OF THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL (ISCLT)
                 COMPUTER PROGRAM

   G             CODING FORMS FOR CARD INPUT TO THE ISC SHORT-TERM MODEL
                 (ISCST) COMPUTER PROGRAM

   H             CODING FORMS FOR CARD INPUT TO THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL
                 (ISCLT) COMPUTER PROGRAM
                                      -vi i-

-------
                                LIST OF FIGURES
                                    VOLUME I

FIGURE  "                                     .                   ""~         PAGE

  1-1,       Schematic Diagram of the ISC Model Short-Term Computer
              Program ISCST	     1-8

  1-2       Schematic Diagram of the ISC Model Long-Term Computer
              Program ISCLT 	     1-9

  2-1       The Sixteen Standard 22.5-Degree Wind-Direction Sectors
              Used in Star Summaries	     2-9

  2-2       Example of a Polar Receptor Grid	    2-16

  2-3       Example of an Irregularly-Spaced Cartesian Receptor Grid  .    2-17

  2-3A      Linear Decay Factor, A, as a Function of Effective Plume
            Height, H	2-41b

  2-3B      Illustration of a Two Tiered Building with Different Tiers
            Dominating Different Wind Directions  	   2-41d

  2-4       The Method of Multiple Plume Images Used to Simulate Plume
              Reflection in the ISC Model	    2-43

  2-5       Schematic Illustration of (a) Urban and (b) Rural Mixing
              Height Interpolation Procedures 	    2-45

  2-6       Illustration of Plume Behavior  in Complex Terrain Assumed
              by the ISC Model	    2-48

  2-7       Illustration of Vertical Concentration Profiles for Reflec-
              tion Coefficients of 0, 0.5,  and 1.0	    2-49

  2-8       Relationship Between the Gravitational Settling Velocity Vsn
              and the Reflection Coefficient y» Suggested by Dumbauld,
              et al., (1976)	    2-52

  2-9       Representation of  an Irregularly Shaped Area Source by 11
              Square Area Sources	    2-55

  2-10      Exact and Approximate Representations of a Line Source by
              Multiple Volume  Sources  	    2-59

  2-11      Plant Layout and Side View of a Hypothetical Potash Process-
              ing Plant	    2-71

  3-1       Input Data Deck Setup for the ISCST Program	   3-30

  3-2       Four Types of Error Messages Printed by the  ISCST Program .   3-68

  4-1       Input Data Deck Setup for the ISCLT Program	   4-33
                                      -viii-                               T.2/87

-------
                                 LIST OF TABLES
                                    VOLUME I

TABLE                                                                      PAGE

  1-1       Major Features of the ISC Model	     1-5

  2-1       Hourly Meteorological Inputs Required by the ISC Short-Term
              Model Program	     2-2

  2-2       Default Values for the Wind-Profile Exponents and Vertical
              Potential Temperature Gradients 	     2-2

  2-3       Pasquill Stability Categories Used by the ISC Model to
              Select Dispersion Coefficients for the Rural and Urban
              Modes	•  2-5

  2-4       Meteorological Inputs Required by the ISC Long-Term Model
              Program	     2-7

  2-5       Possible Combinations of Wind-Speed and Pasquill Stability
              Categories and Mean Wind Speeds in Each NCDC Star Summary
              Wind-Speed Category 	     2-8

  2-6       Source Inputs Required by the ISC Model Programs  	    2-11

  2-7       Parameters Used to Calculate Pasquill-Gifford cry	    2-28

  2-8       Parameters Used to Calculate Pasquill-Gifford az	    2-29

  2-9       Briggs Formulas Used to Calculate McElroy-Pooler ay .  .  . .    2-31

  2-10      Briggs Formulas Used to Calculate McElroy-Pooler oz .  .  . .    2-31

  2-11      Coefficients Used to Calculate Lateral Virtual Distances for
              Pasquill-Gifford Dispersion Rates 	    2-34

  2-12      Summary of Suggested Procedures for Estimating Initial Lateral
              Dimensions (ayo) and Inital Vertical Dimensions (azo)  for
              Volume and Line Sources	    2-5S

  2-13      Emissions Data for a Hypothetical Potash Processing Plant .    2-72

  2-14      Particle-Size Distribution, Gravitational Settling Velocities
              and Surface Reflection Coefficients for Particulate
              Emissions from the Ore Pile and Conveyor Belt	    2-72

  2-15      Emissions Inventory in Form for Input to the ISC Dispersion
              Model	    2-75

  2-16      Particle Emission Rates for the Ore Pile	    2-76
                                      -ix-

-------
                                 LIST  OF TABLES
                                    VOLUME I
                                   (CONTINUED)

TABLE                                                                      PAGE

  2-17      Particulate Emission Rates for the Ore Pile and Conveyor
              Belt as Functions of Wind Speed and Stability '	    2-78

  2-18      Annual Particulate Emissions for  the Ore Pile and Conveyor
              Belt as Functions of Wind Speed and Stability	    2-79

  3-1       Meteorological Data Input  Options for ISCST 	     3-2

  3-2       Dispersion-Model Options for ISCST  	     3-2

  3-3       ISCST Output Options	 .  .  .     3-5

  3-4       ISCST Program Card Input Parameters, FORTRAN Edit Code
              (Format) and Description  	    3-32

  3-5       Julian Day to Month/Season or Month to Season Conversion
              Chart for Leap Years	    3-54

  3-6       Preprocessor Output File Record Description  	    3-56

  3-7       Time Period Intervals and Corresponding Hours of the Day  .    3-59

  3-8       ISCST Error Messages  	    3-68

  4-1       Meteorological Data Input Options for ISCLT  	     4-2

  4-2       Dispersion-Model Options for ISCLT   	     4-2

  4-3       ISCLT Output Options  	     4-4

  4-4       ISCST Program Card Input Parameters, Format  and Description   4-35

  4-5       Input/Output Tape Format	   4-62

  4-6       ISCLT Warning and Error Messages   	   4-68
                                       -x-                                  12/87

-------
                                   SECTION  1

                                 MODEL OVERVIEW



1.1 Introduction

    EPA is involved in updating and revising air quality dispersion  models  for

use in regulatory  applications.   The revisions are made to correct and improve

technical  features and  to  make  the  models   more  appropriate  for  specific

applications.  The Industrial  Source Complex  (ISC) Model has undergone several

revisions since first being issued (Bowers,  et al, 1979).   This  second edition

of the ISC  User's  Guide  has been prepared  to  provide  the user with a full  set

of  updated   documentation  describing   the   mathematical  formulations   and

procedures for computer applications.

    The  new  user's  guide  (an  edited  version  of  the  first  edition)   is

comprehensive  and  self-contained so that new  users  of ISC  will  not  need  to

refer back to the original user's guide.   Previous users of ISC will  find  the

following new features:


    •  a  third urban option  which  uses  the  Briggs  fit,  as  contained in
       Gifford (1976), to the McElroy-Pooler urban dispersion coefficients

    •  an option for buoyancy induced dispersion

    •  a  "regulatory  default  option"   switch  for   use   in  regulatory
       applications

    •  an optional treatment for calm winds (only ISCST)

    •  a revised plume rise algorithm

    •  receptors at elevations  below plant  grade are  treated  in the same
       manner as receptors above plant grade

    •  revised default  wind profile  exponents for each  rural and  urban
       option

    •  computations for source-receptor distances less than 100 meters

    •  terrain truncation algorithm
                                       1-1

-------
    •  an option to print  input  data  as  soon as  it  is  entered

    •  allowance for input of receptor elevations  in feet  or  meters

    »  allowance for printing of 3rd  high tables

    •  receptors heights above ground may be modeled

    •  revised  treatment   of building   wake  effects  including  the  use  of
       building dimensions as functions  of wind  direction, for  stacks  less
       than the building  height  plus one - half the lesser of the  width or the
       height of the building

    Each of these new features is described more completely in Section 2.


1.2 Background and Purpose

    Air  quality impact analyses for pollutant sources  other   than  emissions

from isolated stacks often require consideration  of  factors such as  fugitive

emissions,   aerodynamic  wake   effects,   gravitational  settling   and   dry

deposition.  The Industrial  Source Complex (ISC)  Dispersion Model consists  of

two computer programs  that are  designed to consider these and other factors so

as to meet  the  needs of  those  who must  perform  complicated dispersion  model

analyses.   The   ISC Model  computer programs  are  designed to  be  flexible,

economical  and  as  easy  to  use  as  possible   without  sacrificing  the  model

features  required  to address complicated problems.   Three  evaluation studies

of the  ISC model  have been   published  (Bowers  and Anderson,  1981;  Bowers  et

al.,  1982; Schulman and Hanna, 1986).

    Cautionary  Note  — The  ISC Model  contains a  number  of options that  are

designed to consider complicated source configurations and special atmospheric

effects.   These options  include:   site-specific  wind-profile  exponents  and

vertical  potential  temperature  gradients,  time-dependent  exponential  decay of

pollutants, stack-tip  downwash,  revised procedures  for building wake effects,

plume  rise calculated  as a function of downwind distance, buoyancy induced

dispersion,  and dry  deposition.  If  one  or  more of these options  is  not

specified by the  user, the programs  will  assign preselected default values to



                                      1-2                                12/87

-------
various parameters.  For  regulatory  applications,  the  use  of  the  "regulatory

default  option"  is  recommended.   If  the  user   believes   that  the  use  of

site-specific or source-specific parameters is appropriate,  their use should be

discussed with  the  responsible  air pollution control agency prior to the model

calculations.   Also,  because  proper application  of  many  of  the  ISC  Model

features  requires  a  fundamental  knowledge  of the  concepts  of  atmospheric

transport and dispersion, the user should seek expert advice before  using any

ISC Model  feature that  is  not fully  understood.   Finally,  because  a compre-

hensive model is required to address complicated problems, the ISC Model is not

necessarily  the model of choice for all applications.  Simpler and less expen-

sive computerized models  such as  the Single Source  (CRSTER)  Model  (EPA, 1977)

should  be  used for applications  that  do  not  require at least one  of the ISC

Model features.

    The ISC  Model  computer  programs are suitable  for application to pollutant

sources in the following types of studies:

       Stack design studies
       Combustion source permit applications
       Regulatory variance evaluation
       Monitoring network design
       Control strategy evaluation for SIP's
       Fuel  (e.g., coal) conversion studies
       Control technology evaluation
       New source review
       Prevention of significant deterioration

1.3 General  Description

    The Industrial Source Complex  (ISC) Dispersion Model  combines and enhances

various  dispersion model algorithms  into a set of  two computer programs that

can  be used to  assess the  air  quality  impact  of emissions  from  the  wide

variety  of sources associated  with an industrial source complex.   For plumes

comprised  of particulates with appreciable gravitational settling velocities,

the  ISC Model  accounts  for the  effects  on ambient  particulate concentrations

of  gravitational  settling and  dry deposition.  Alternatively,  the  ISC Model

can  be used to calculate dry deposition.  The ISC short-term model (ISCST), an
                                      1-3                                 12/87

-------
extended version of the  Single  Source (CRSTER) Model  (EPA,  1977),  is designed




to calculate concentration or deposition values for time periods of- 1, 2,  3,




4,  6,   8,  12,  and  24  hours.    If  used  with  a  year of  sequential  hourly




meteorological  data,  ISCST  can also   calculate  annual  concentration   or




deposition values.  The  ISC  long-term model (ISCLT) is a sector-averaged model




that extends  and combines basic features  of  the  Air  Quality Display  Model




(AQDM)  and the  Climatological   Dispersion  Model  (COM).   The  long-term  model




uses  statistical wind  summaries  to  calculate  seasonal   (quarterly)  and/or




annual  concentration or  deposition values.   Both ISCST and  ISCLT use either a




polar  or  a  Cartesian receptor  grid.   The ISC  Model computer  programs  are




written  in Fortran 77 and require  approximately 80,000 words  of memory.   The




major features of the ISC Model are listed in Table 1-1.




    The  ISC  Model  programs accept the following source types:   stack, area and




volume.  The volume source option is  also used to  simulate  line  sources.   The




steady-state  Gaussian plume equation  for  a  continuous   source   is used  to




calculate  concentrations  for  stack   and  volume  sources.   The  area  source




equation in  the ISCST Model programs  is based on the equation for a  continuous




and  finite  cross-wind line  source.   In  the  ISCLT  Model  program,   the  area




source  treatment uses a virtual point  source approximation.   The  generalized




Briggs   (1969,   1971,  1972,  1973,  1975)  plume-rise  formulas  are  used  to




calculate  final as  well  as gradual plume rise.  Revised procedures are used to




evaluate the effects of aerodynamic wakes  and eddies  formed by  buildings and




other  structures on plume dispersion.   Either  the  methods  of Huber  and Snyder




 (Huber and Snyder,  1976,  1982;  Huber,  1977)  or  those of Schulman  and Scire




 (1986)  are used,  depending  on  the  ratio of  the  stack height  to the building




height.   The Schulman and Scire downwash  approach  1) reduces plume rise, 2)




enhances plume  spread as  a  linear  function of the plume  height,  and 3) uses




building  heights   and   cross-sectional   widths • input   by  direction.     A




wind-profile exponent law is used to  adjust the observed mean wind  speed from




 the  measurement  height  to the emission  height  for  the   plume   rise  and




                                       1-4                                12/87

-------
                               TABLE 1-1

                         MAJOR FEATURES OF THE
                               ISC MODEL
Polar or Cartesian coordinate systems

Rural or one of three urban options

Plume rise  due  to momentum and buoyancy as a function of downwind distance
for stack emissions (Briggs, 1969, 1971, 1972, 1973, and 1975)

Building wake effects  using methods  of Huber and Snyder (Huber and Snyder,
1976, 1982; Huber, 1977)  or Schulman and Scire  (Schulman  and Hanna,  1986;
Schulman and Scire,  1986)  depending  on the stack height to building height
ratio (see  Section 2.4.1.1.d),  for evaluating building wake  effects.   The
Schulman  and Scire  approach  uses  building  dimensions   as   functions  of
direction.

Procedures suggested by Briggs (1974) for evaluating stack-tip downwash.

Separation of multiple point sources

Consideration of  the  effects of gravitational settling and  dry deposition
on ambient particulate concentrations

Capability of simulating point, line, volume and area sources

Capability to calculate dry deposition

Variation with height of wind speed (wind-profile exponent law)

Concentration estimates for 1-hour to annual average

Terrain-adjustment procedures  for elevated  terrain  including a  terrain
truncation algorithm

Consideration of time-dependent exponential decay of pollutants

The method of Pasguill (1976) to account for buoyancy-induced dispersion.

A regulatory default  option to set various model options and parameters to
EPA recommended values.

Procedure for calm-wind processing

Capability to treat height of receptor above ground ("flagpole" receptors)
                                  1-5                                 12/87

-------
concentration calculations.   Procedures utilized by the Single  Source  (CRSTER)

Model are  used to account  for  variations in terrain height over  the  receptor

grid.  Except for Urban Mode 3,  the Pasguill-Gifford curves  (Turner,  1970)  are

used  to   calculate   lateral   (ay)  and  vertical  (az)  plume   spread.    The

ISC Model  has  one rural  and three urban options.  In  the Rural Mode,  rural

mixing  heights*  and  the  oy  and  cz  values  for  the  indicated  stability

category are used  in the calculations.   In Urban  Mode  1,  the  stable  E  and F

stability  categories are redefined as neutral D  stability.  In  Urban Mode 2,

the  E and F  stability categories are  combined  and  the   oy  and  az  values

for  the  stability  category  one  step more unstable than the indicated stability

category  (except A)  are used in  the  calculations (see Section  2.2.1.1).   In

Urban  Mode  3,   the   Briggs  urban   dispersion   coefficients  derived  from

McElroy-Pooler  observations are used.   Urban mixing heights  are used  in all

three urban modes.



1.4  System Description

     1.4.1   The  ISC Short-Term (ISCST)  Model Program

     Figure 1-1  is  a  schematic diagram  of  the ISC Model  short-term computer

program   (ISCST).    As   shown   by  the  figure,   ISCST   directly  accepts   the

preprocessed  meteorological  data tape produced  by  the RAMMET   preprocessor.

This meteorological  preprocessor program is described in the User's Manual  for

Single-Source   (CRSTER)  Model  (EPA,   1977),   as   updated  by  Catalan©  (1986).

Alternatively,  hourly meteorological   data may be  input by card deck.   Program

control  parameters,  source data and  receptor data are  input by card deck.   The

program produces printouts  of calculated concentration  or deposition values.
 * The mixing  height  is  the  height  above  the surface  at which  an  elevated
   stable  layer  restricts  vertical  mixing  and confines  pollutant  emissions
   within the mixing layer.

                                      1-6                                 12/87

-------
    1.4.2  The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT) Model Program

    Figure  1-2  is  a schematic  diagram  of  the  ISC Model  long-term  computer

program  (ISCLT).    As  shown  by  the  figure,   program   control   parameters,

meteorological  data,  source  data and  receptor  data are  input  by.  card  deck.

The  program  produces printouts  of  calculated  concentration  or  deposition

values.  Additionally, all  input  data and the results  of  all  calculations may

be stored on  an optional master tape inventory  which can  be used as  input  to

update  future  runs.   The  master  tape  file  stores  the  concentration  or

deposition calculated for each source at each receptor.  Sources may be added,

deleted  or  altered in update  runs  using card input  for the affected sources.

Concentration or  deposition calculations  are then made for  those  sources only

and  the concentration  or  deposition values  calculated  for  each  source  are

resummed  to  obtain  an  updated  estimate  of the  concentration  or  deposition

produced at each receptor by all sources.



1.5 Summary of Input Data

    1.5.1 The ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Model Program

    The  input  requirements  for  the  ISC  Model  short-term computer  program

(ISCST) consist of four categories:


    •  Meteorological data
    •  Source data
    •  Receptor data
    •  Program control parameters


    a.   Meteorological  Data.   Meteorological   inputs  required  by the  ISCST

program  include hourly  estimates  of the  wind  direction,  wind  speed,  ambient

air  temperature,  Pasquill  stability  category,  mixing  height,  wind-profile

exponent  and  vertical   potential   temperature  gradient.    The  magnetic  tape
                                       1-7

-------
CJ
Crt
E


H   «H
 I     
-------
          Source data
          cards
       ISCLT program
       control and
       opcion daca
       cards
      ISCLT Long-Tera
      Computer Program
•  Seasonal and/or annual
   average  concentracion


•  Seasonal and/or annual
   total ground-level
   deposition
   Printed
Concentration
     or
  Deposition
   Tables

L

Meteorological
data cards
f
Receptor
data cards

       Optional
        output
         cape
 FIGURE I-2.
Schematic diagram of the  ISC  Model  long-term computer program
XSCLT•
                                      1-9
                                                         12/87
-------
output of the meteorological  data  preprocessor program and the program default




values for  the  wind-profile  exponent  and the  vertical potential  temperature




gradient   satisfy  all   ISCST  -hourly   meteorological   data   requirements.




Alternatively, hourly  meteorological  data  can be  input   by  means  of a  card




deck.  When this  is  done,  the use of  the calm processing  feature (described in




Section   l.S.l.d)   is   not   permitted.    The  number  of  hours   for   which




concentration or  deposition calculations  can be made  ranges  from  1  to  8,784




(i.e., up to every hour of a 366-day year).








    b. Source Data.   The  ISCST program  accepts three source  types:   stack,




area and  volume.   For  each  source, input data  requirements  include  the source




location  with respect  to  a  user-specified  origin,  the   source  elevation (if




terrain  effects  are  to  be  included  in  the  model  calculations)  and  the




pollutant emission rate.  For each stack, additional source input requirements




include the physical  stack height, the stack  inner  diameter,  the  stack exit




temperature,  and  the  stack  exit velocity.  If  aerodynamic wake effects due to




an  adjacent building are  to  be  considered,  the  length,  width,  and height of




the building are required as  well.   For  certain  stack  heights and building




dimensions,  thirty-six direction  specific  building  heights   and  widths  are




input.   The horizontal dimensions and effective emission height are required




for each area source or  volume  source.   If  the calculations  are  to consider




particulates  with appreciable gravitational  settling velocities, source  inputs




for  each source  also include  the  mass  fraction  of  particulates   in   each




gravitational settling-velocity  category  as well  as  the  surface reflection




coefficient and settling  velocity  of  each settling-velocity category.  Because




 industrial  pollutant emission rates  are  often highly variable,  emission  rates




 for each source may be held constant  or varied as follows:
                                      1-10                  .              12/87
-------
    •  By hour of the day
    •  By season or month
    •  By hour of the day and season
    •  By  stability and  wind  speed  (applies   to  fugitive  sources  of
       wind-blown particulates)


    c. Receptor Data.   The  ISCST  program  uses  either  a polar  (r, 6}  or  a

Cartesian  (X,Y)  coordinate  system.   The typical polar receptor array consists

of 36  radials  (one  for every 10 degrees of  azimuth)  and five to ten downwind

ring distances for  a  total  of 180 to 360  receptors.   However,  the  user is  not

restricted to a 10-degree angular separation of receptors.   The polar receptor

array  is  always  centered at X=0,  Y=0.  Receptor  locations in the  Cartesian

coordinate  system  may  be  given  as  Universal   Transverse   Mercator  (UTM)

coordinates or  as X  (east-west)  and Y (north-south)  coordinates with  respect

to a  user-specified origin.   Discrete  receptor  points  corresponding  to  the

locations  of  air  quality  monitors,  elevated  terrain or other  points  of

interest may also be  used with either  coordinate  system.   If  terrain  effects

are  to be included  in the  calculations,  the ground  level  elevation  of  each

receptor is required.   If receptor heights above ground  ("flagpole"  receptors)

are to be modeled, the  receptor  height above local terrain  is also required.

Both terrain elevation  and receptor  height  above  local  terrain  may be  input

for the same receptor.



    d. Program Control Parameters and Options.   The  ISCST  program  allows  the

user  to select from  a number of  model options.   The program parameters  for

these options are discussed in detail in Section 3.2.3.  The available  options

include:
    •  Concentration/Deposition  Option   —   Directs   the   program   to
       calculate average concentration or total deposition

    •  Receptor Grid  System  Option —  Selects a  Cartesian  or a  polar
       receptor grid system
                                     1-11                                12/R7
-------
•  Discrete Receptor  Option — Allows  the user to  arbitrarily place
   receptors  at  any  points  using  either  a  Cartesian  or  a  p'olar
   coordinate system

•  Receptor Terrain Elevation  Option — Allows the user to specify an
   elevation  for  each  receptor  (level  terrain is  assumed  if  this
   option is not exercised)

•  Tape/file  Output  Option —  Directs  the  program   to  output  the
   results  of  all   concentration  or  deposition  calculations   to
   tape/file

•  Print  Input  Data Option  — Directs the  program to print  program
   control  parameters,  source  data  and receptor  data;  the  user  may
   also direct  the  program to  print the hourly meteorological  data if
   this option is exercised.-  This option prints all input  data after
   all input data has been read.

•  Output  Tables Option  —  Specifies  which of  the  five  types  of
   output tables are to be printed (see Section 3.1.3)

•  Meteorological Data  Option  —  Directs  the  program  to  read  hourly
   data  from  either the meteorological preprocessor format or  a card
   image  format.    When  card  image  format  is  selected,  the  calm
   processing feature, and the regulatory default option are not used.

•  Rural/Urban  Option  —  Specifies  whether  the  concentration  or
   deposition calculations  are  made in the Rural  Mode, Urban  Mode 1,
   Urban Mode 2, or Urban Mode 3  (see Section 2.2.1.1)

•  Wind-Profile  Exponent  Option  —  Directs  the  program  to  read
   user-provided wind-profile exponents or to use the default values

•  Vertical  Potential  Temperature  Gradient  Option  —  Directs  the
   program  to   read   user-provided  vertical  potential  temperature
   gradients or to use the default values

•  Source  Combination  Option  — Allows  the  user  to  specify  the
   combinations  of   sources  for  which  concentration  or  deposition
   estimates are  reguired

•  Single Time  Period Interval Option — Directs the program  to print
   concentration  or  deposition  values  for  a specific  time  interval
   within a day (for  example, the  third 3-hour period)

•  Variable Emission  Rate  Option  —  Allows  the  user  to   specify
   scalars  which  are  multiplied  by  the  source's average  emission
   rate;  the  scalars  may  vary by  season or month,  by hour  of  the day,
   by season and  hour of  the day,  or by wind speed and stability

•  Plume  Rise as a Function of Distance  Option — Allows the  user to
   direct  the  program  to  calculate  plume  rise  as   a   function  of
   downwind distance  or to calculate final plume  rise at all downwind
   distances
                                   1-12
-------
• Stack-Tip Downwash Option —  Allows  the user to direct the program to
  use the  Briggs (1974) procedures  to account  for stack-tip  dovmwash
  for all stack sources

• Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion Option —  Allows the  user to  direct  the
  program to use  the  Pasguill  (1976)  method to parameterize  the growth
  of plumes during the plume rise phase

• Regulatory Default Option —  Allows  the user to direct the program to
  use  the   following   features  generally   recommended  by   EPA  for
  regulatory applications:

  1) Tape/file meteorological  input assumed
  2) Final plume rise at all receptor locations
  3) Stack-tip downwash
  4) Buoyancy-induced dispersion
  5) Default wind profile coefficients (urban or rural)
  6) Default vertical potential temperature gradients
  7) Calm wind processing
  8) A decay half life  of  4  hours  for  S02,  urban; otherwise  the half
     life is set to infinity
  9) Revised wake effects procedures

  In ISCST  all  other options  remain available to  the  user,  except that
  if card  image  meteorological  data input is  used,  the  calm processing
  and regulatory default option features are not used.

• Calm Processing Option — Allows  the  user  to  direct the  program to
  exclude  hours  with  persistent  calm  winds  in  the  calculation  of
  concentrations for each averaging period

• Terrain-truncation Algorithm  — Terrain is automatically truncated to
  an elevation of .005 meters below stack top  when a receptor elevation
  exceeds stack top elevation

• Input Debug Option — Directs the program to print input  data as soon
  as  it  is read.   This option is  useful  for  debugging  input  data.
  Note,  this option differs  from the  Print  Input  Data Option,  which
  prints input data after all input data has been  read

• Half-life  —  A  non-zero  value  directs   the  program  to  consider
  pollutant  decay using the input half-life in seconds

• Wake  Effects  —  Non-zero  values  for  source  building  dimensions
  automatically  exercises the  building wake effects option.  A negative
  value  of  building  height  or the  selection of the  regulatory default
  option  directs the  program  to process  the-  Schulman-Scire  downwash
  treatment  method when the physical stack height  is less  than or equal
  to  the building  height  plus half  the lesser  of the height  or the
  width  (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).

• Above  Ground ("flagpole") Receptor  Option  —  directs the program to
  read  receptor  heights above local terrain elevations  (this option is
  available  regardless of the regulatory default option  setting).
                                    1-13                               12/87
-------
    1.5.2  The ISC Long-Term (ISCLT)  Model  Program

    The  input requirements  for  the  ISC   Model   long-term  computer  program

(ISCLT) consists  of four  categories:


  • Meteorological data
  • Source data
  • Receptor data
  • Program control parameters

Each of these data categories is discussed  separately below.


    a. Meteorological Data.   Seasonal  or annual  "STAR"  summaries  (statistical

tabulations   of   the  joint  frequency  of  occurrence   of   wind-speed   and

wind-direction  categories,  classified  according to  the  Pasquill  stability

categories)*  are  the principal meteorological  inputs to  ISCLT.   The  program

accepts STAR  summaries with six Pasquill stability categories (A through F) or

five stability categories (A through E with the E and F categories combined).

ISCLT  is  not designed to  used  the Climatological Dispersion Model  (CDM)  STAR

day/night summaries  which  subdivide  the  neutral D stability  category into day

and night  D  categories.    Additional  meteorological data  requirements include

seasonal average maximum  and minimum heights and ambient air temperatures.

    b. Source Data.  The ISCLT  source  data requirements are  the  same as those

given  in  the  previous  section for  the  ISCST program  with the  exception  that

sixteen  direction specific  building dimensions,   instead  of  36,  are required

for  the building  wake  effects  for sources  with  certain stack  heights  and

building dimensions.

    c. Receptor  Data.  The  ISCLT  receptor data  requirements  are the  same as

those given in the previous section for the ISCST program.

    d. Program Control Parameters  and  Options.    The  ISCLT program  allows the

user  to  select  from a number of model and logic  options.  The pro'gram control
* STAR  summaries are  available  from  the  National  Climatic  Data Center
  (NCDC), Asheville, North Carolina.
                                      1-14                                 12/87
-------
parameters for these  options  are discussed  in detail  in  Section 4.2.3.   The

available options include:


    •  Concentration/Deposition   Option  —   Directs   the   program   to
       calculate average concentration or total deposition

    •  Receptor  Grid  System  Option —  Selects a  Cartesian or  a  polar
       receptor grid system

    •  Discrete Receptor Option  —  Allows the user to place  a receptor at
       any point using  either a Cartesian or polar  coordinate  reference
       system

    •  Receptor Terrain Elevation Option —  Allows the user  to  specify an
       elevation for  each  receptor  (level   terrain  is  assumed  by  the
       program if this option is not exercised)

    •  Tape/File Input/Output Option  —  Directs  the  program to  input
       and/or  output   results   of  all  concentration  or   deposition
       calculations, source  data and  meteorological  data  from and/or to
       magnetic tape or other data file

    •  Print Input  Option — Directs the program to  print  program control
       parameters,   source  data,  receptor data  and  meteorological  data.
       This option  prints  all input data after all  input data  has  been
       read

    •  Print  Seasonal/Annual  Results  Option  —  Directs  the program to
       print  seasonal  and/or annual concentration or deposition  values,
       where  seasons  are normally  defined  as winter,  spring,  summer and
       fall

    •  Print  Results  from  Individual/Combined Source  Option —  Directs
       the  program to  print  the concentration  or deposition  values for
       individual  and/or  combined  sources,  where  the  combined  source
       output is the sum over a select group of sources or all sources

    •  Rural/Urban  Option  —  Specifies  whether  the  concentration  or
       deposition  calculations  are  to  be made in  the Rural Mode,  Urban
       Mode 1, Urban Mode 2, or Urban Mode 3 (see Section 2.2.1.1)

    •  Plume  Rise  as  a  Function of Distance  Option  — Allows the user to
       direct  the   program to  calculate  plume  rise  as  a  function of
       downwind  distance or to calculate final plume rise at all  downwind
       distances

    •  Print  Maximum 10/All Receptor  Points  Option  —  Specifies  whether
       the  program is to print the maximum  10 concentration (deposition)
       values and  receptors or to print  the  results of the  calculations
       at all receptors without maximums or both

    •  Automatic  Determination  of  Maximum  10  Option  —  Directs  the
       program  to  calculate  the  maximum  10  values  of  concentration
       (deposition)  from the  set of  all receptors  input;  also,  directs

                                     1-15                                   12/37
-------
   the  program to  display the  10  values of each contributing  source
   at  the  locations  determined  by  the maximum  10  values  of  the
   combined  sources  or  to  display   the   maximum    10  ^values  and
   locations  of each source  individually

•  User Specified Maximum 10 Option  —  Allows  the  user the  option  of
   specifying up to 5 sets  of  10  receptor  points,  one set for each
   seasonal and  annual  calculation  or  a single . set  of  10  receptor
   points,  at  which  each source  contribution as well  as  the  total
   concentration  (deposition)  values for  the  combined  sources  are
   displayed

•  Print Unit  Option — Allows  the user  to optionally  direct  the
   print output to  any output device

•  Tape/File  Unit Option  —  Allows  the  user to optionally  select the
   logical  unit numbers  used for magnetic tape  input  and output

•  Print Output  Option  — This  option  is provided  to minimize paper
   output;  if selected,   the  program does  not  start  a new  page with
   each new table,  but continues printing

•  Lines per  Page  Option — This  option is  provided to  enable the
   user to specify the exact number of lines printed  per page

•  Size  Options  — These  are  parameters  that  allow the  user  to
   specify the  number of sources  input via  data  card, the sizes of
   the X and Y receptor  axes if used, the number of  discrete receptor
   points  if  used,  the  number  of  seasons  (or annual only)  in the
   meteorological input   data, and  the  number of wind-speed,  Pasquill
   stability   and   wind-direction    categories    in    the    input
   meteorological data

•  Combined  Sources  Option —  Allows  the  user   the   option  of
   specifying, by  source number, multiple  sets of  sources  to use in
   forming combined sources output or the option of  using  all  sources
   in forming combined sources output

•  Units Option  —  Allows the user the option of specifying the input
   emissions units and/or output concentration or deposition units

•  Variable Emissions Option — Allows the user the  option of varying
   emissions  by  season,  by  wind  speed  and  season,  by  Pasquill
   stability category and season or  by  wind speed,  Pasquill stability
   category and  season  (season is either winter, spring, summer, fall
   or annual only)

•  Stack-Tip Downwash Option — Allows the user to direct  the program
   to  use  the  Briggs   (1974)  procedures  for  evaluating  stack-tip
   downwash for all sources

•  Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion  Option  —  Allows  the  user  to  direct
   the  program to  use the Pasquill  (1976)  method  to parameterize the
   growth  of plumes during the plume rise phase
                                 1-16             '                   12/8?
-------
• Regulatory Default Option —  Allows  the user to direct  the  program to use
  the  following  features  generally  recommended  by  EPA  for   regulatory
  applications:

  1) Final plume rise at all receptor locations
  2) Stack-tip downwash
  3) Buoyancy-induced dispersion
  4) Default wind profile coefficients  (urban or rural)
  5) Default vertical potential  temperature gradients
  6) A decay  half life of 4 hours  for S02/ urban; otherwise  the  decay half
     life is set to infinity
  7) Revised wake effects procedures

  In  ISCLT,  all  other options  remain  available  to  the  user  under  the
  regulatory default option.

• Terrain-truncation Algorithm  —r  Terrain  is  automatically truncated  to an
  elevation of .005 meters below stack top when a  receptor elevation exceeds
  stack top elevation

• Input Debug Option — Directs the program to print  input  data as  soon as
  it  is  read.  This option  is  useful  for debugging input data.   Note, this
  option differs  from  the  Print Input Data Option,  which prints  input data
  after all input data has been read

• Half-life —  A non-zero  value  directs  the  program to  consider pollutant
  decay using the input half-life in seconds

• Wake   Effects  —   Non-zero   values   for   source   building   dimensions
  automatically  exercises  the  building  wake  effects  option.    A  negative
  value of building height or the selection of the  regulatory  default option
  directs  the  program  to  process the   Schulman-Scire  downwash  treatment
  method  when the  physical  stack   height  is  less  than or  equal  to  the
  building  height plus  half the  lesser  of  the  height  or  the  width  (see
  Section 2.4.1.1.d).

• Above  Ground  ("flagpole") Receptor  Option  — directs  the program to  read
  receptor heights above  local  terrain elevations (this  option  is available
  regardless of the regulatory default option setting).
                                    1-17                               12/87
-------
                                   SECTION 2




                             TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION









2.1 General




    The  Industrial   Source  Complex  (ISC)  Dispersion  Model  is  an  advanced




Gaussian  plume model.   The  technical  discussion  contained  in this  section




assumes that the  reader  is  already  familiar  with the  theory and  concepts  of




Gaussian plume models.   Readers  who  lack a fundamental  knowledge  of the basic




concepts of Gaussian plume  modeling  are  referred  to Section  2  of  the  User's




Manual for the Single Source  (CRSTER)  Model  (EPA, 1977  and Catalano, 1986)  or




to  other  references  such  as   Atmospheric  Science   and   Power   Production




(Randerson, 1984) or the Workbook of Atmospheric Dispersion Estimates (Turner,




1970).









2.2 Model Input Data




    2.2.1  Meteorological Input Data




    2.2.1.1  Meteorological Inputs for the ISC Short-Term (ISCST) Model Program




    Table 2-1  gives  the  hourly meteorological inputs required by the ISC Model




short-term computer program (ISCST).   These inputs include the mean wind speed




measured  at  height  zlf  the direction toward which the  wind is  blowing,  the




wind-profile  exponent,   the  ambient  air  temperature,  the  Pasguill  stability




category,  the  vertical  potential temperature  gradient  and the  mixing layer




height.   In  general, these  inputs  are developed  from concurrent  surface  and




upper-air  meteorological data by the  RAMMET preprocessor  program as used  by




the  Single Source  (CRSTER) Model  (EPA,   1977  and  Catalano, 1986).   If  the




preprocessed  meteorological  data  are  used,  the  user  may input,  for  each




combination  of wind-speed  and  Pasguill  stability  categories,  site-specific




values  of the  wind-profile exponent  and  the  vertical  potential  temperature






                                      2-1
-------
 Parameter
                                 TABLE  2-1

              HOURLY METEOROLOGICAL INPUTS REQUIRED BY THE ISC
                          SHORT-TERM MODEL PROGRAM
Definition
   Ui            Mean  wind  speed  in meters  per  second  (m/sec) at  height
                 zi {default value for zi is 10 meters)

  AFVR           Average  random  flow  vector  (direction  toward  which  the
                 wind is blowing)

   p             Wind-profile  exponent  (default  values  assigned  on  the
                 basis of stability; see Table 2-2)

   Ta            Ambient air temperature in degrees Kelvin (°K)

   Hm            Depth  of surface  mixing  layer  (meters),  developed  from
                 twice-daily mixing height estimates  by  the meteorological
                 preprocessor program

Stability        Pasquill stability category (1 = A, 2 = B,  etc.)

   89            Vertical potential  temperature  gradient in  degrees  Kelvin
   3z            per  meter   (default   values   assigned  on  the  basis  of
                 stability category; see Table 2-2)
                                  TABLE 2-2
         DEFAULT VALUES FOR THE WIND-PROFILE EXPONENTS AND VERTICAL
                       POTENTIAL TEMPERATURE GRADIENTS
 Pasguill  Stability
	Category	

          A

          B

          C

          D

          E

          F
Urban
Wind-Profile
Exponent p
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.30
Rural
Wind-Profile
Exponent p
0.07
0.07
0.10
0.15
0.35
0.55
Vertical
Potential
Temperature
Gradient (°K/m)
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.020
0.035
                                     2-2
-------
gradient.  If the user does not input site-specific wind-profile  exponents  and




vertical,  potential  temperature  gradients,  the  ISC  Model  uses  the  default




values  given in  Table  2-2.   The  inputs  listed  in Table 2-1  may  also  be




developed by the user  from observed hourly  meteorological  data and  input by




card deck.  In these cases, the  direction from which the wind  is blowing must




be reversed  180  degrees to conform with the average flow vector (the direction




toward which the wind is blowing) generated by  the  meteorological  preprocessor




program.




    It   should   be  noted  that   concentrations  calculated   using  Gaussian




dispersion models  are  inversely proportional  to the mean wind  speed  and thus




the  calculated  concentrations  approach  infinity  as  the  mean  wind  speed




approaches zero  (calm).   Also,  there is no basis for estimating wind direction




during  periods  of  calm   winds.   The   meteorological   preprocessor   program




arbitrarily  sets  the wind  speed equal  to  1  meter per  second  if  the  observed




wind speed  is  less than 1  meter  per second  and,  in  the  case  of calm winds,




sets  the wind  direction  equal  to  the  value  reported  for the  last  non-calm




hour.   EPA  has  developed  a  procedure  for  treating these  periods  of  calm




winds.   The  procedure  is  available in  ISCST  as a  user-defined option.   With




this option  selected,  calm processing is performed  if  the program  encounters




two  consecutive  hours  which have the same unrandomized wind direction, and the




wind speed  of  the latter hour is  equal  to  1.0 meter per second.  The program




sets   the  concentration  equal   to  0.0  at  all  receptors  when  calms  are




identified.  The  routine then  recalculates  concentrations for  each averaging




time  using the  sum  of non-calm hour  concentrations divided by  the number of




non-calm hours  in the. period.   The denominator  (number of non-calm  hours in




the  period)  is  limited to a  minimum value of  2,  3,  3,  4, 6,  9, and  18 hours




for  the  2,  3,  4,   6,  8,  1?.,  and  24  hour  averaging  periods,  respectively.




Because   unrandomized  wind directions   are  necessary  for  use  with  the  calm






                                       2-3
-------
processing routine,  the  model will  not  allow the calm processing option  when




meteorology is input with cards.




    The ISCST  program also allows  for the  use  of the calm  processing  option




when  run  in  the  deposition  mode.   In this  case, a  minimum  divisor  is  not




used.   Simply,  if an  hour is determined  as being calm,  depositions for  all




source-receptor pairs are set to 0 for this hour.




    The ISCST program  has  a  rural and three urban options.   In the Rural Mode,




rural  mixing  heights  and  the  Pasguill   Gifford  (P-G)   ay  and  oz   values




for  the indicated  stability category are  used  in  the  calculations.   Urban




mixing heights are used in the urban modes.  In Urban Mode  1, the  stable  E and




F  categories  are  redefined  as  neutral  (D)  stability,  and the  P-G  oy  and




oz values  are  used.   In Urban  Mode 2,  the E and  F  stability  categories  are




combined  and  the  P-G  ay  and  az  values  for   the  stability  category  one




step  more  unstable  than  the  indicated category are  used  in  the  calculations.




For   example,   the   P-G   cry   and  oz  values  for  C  stability  are  used  in




calculations  for  D  stability  in Urban  Mode 2.   In  Urban  Mode  3,  stability




categories are  not  combined,  but urban dispersion curves of Briggs are used.




These curves, as  reported  by  Gifford  (1976), where derived  from  the St.  Louis




Dispersion  Study  (McElroy-Pooler,  1968).   Table  2-3  gives  the  dispersion




coefficients used in each mode.




     The Rural  Mode  is usually selected for  industrial source complexes located




in rural areas.   However, the urban  options  may also  be considered in modeling




an  industrial  source complex located  in a rural  area if  the source complex is




large and contains numerous  tall   buildings  and/or large  heat  sources   (for




example,  coke ovens).   An urban mode is  appropriate for these cases in order




to  account for the enhanced  turbulence  generated during  stable meteorological




conditions by the surface roughness elements and/or he?t sources.   If an urban




mode is  appropriate.  Urban  Mode   3  is  recommended  by  EPA for  regulatory






                                       2-4
-------
                                   TABLE 2-3 '

              PASQUILL STABILITY CATEGORIES USED BY THE ISC MODEL
        TO SELECT DISPERSION COEFFICIENTS FOR THE RURAL AND URBAN MODES


Actual Pasquill
Stability Category*
A
B
C
D
E
F
Pasguill
Values

Rural Mode
A
B
C
D .
E
F
Stability
Category for the ay,
oz
Used in ISC Model Calculations

Urban Mode
A
B
C
D
D
D

1 Urban Mode 2
A
A
B
C
D
D

Urban Mode 3**
A
B
C
D
E
F
 * The ISCST program redefines  extremely  stable  G stability as  very stable  F
   stability.

** The Briggs urban dispersion  curves  combine A  and B into one  "very unstable"
   category, and E and  F into one "stable" category.
                                      2-5
-------
applications.   Modes 1 and  2  are generally not used  but  are available to  the




user for historical interest and model evaluation.









    2.2.1.2  Meteorological  Inputs for the ISC Long-Term (ISCLT)  Model Program




    Table  2-4  lists  the  meteorological  inputs   required  by  the  ISC  Model




long-term computer program  (ISCLT).   Seasonal or  annual STAR summaries are the




principal meteorological  inputs to  the  ISCLT program.   A STAR  summary  is  a




tabulation  of  the   joint  frequency   of   occurrence   of  wind-speed  and




wind-direction  categories,  classified  according  to  the  Pasguill  stability




categories.   Table  2-5  identifies the combinations of  wind-speed and Pasquill




stability categories that are  possible  following  the Turner  (1964)  procedures




of   using   airport  surface  weather  observations   to  estimate  atmospheric




stability.  The  wind-speed  categories in  Table  2-5  are  in knots  because  the




National  Weather Service  (NWS)  reports  airport   wind  speeds  to  the  nearest




knot.  The default values of the wind speeds in meters per  second,  and knots,




assigned by ISCLT  to each wind-speed category are shown at the bottom of Table




2-5.   The  sixteen  standard 22.5-degree  wind-direction  sectors  used  in STAR




summaries  are  shown  in  Figure 2-1.   ISCLT accepts  STAR  summaries  with six




stability  categories  (A  through F) or five  stability categories  (A  through E




with  the  E  and F categories  combined)     ISCLT  is not designed to  use the




Climatological  Dispersion Model (COM) STAR summaries which  divide the neutral




D  stability  category  into day and  night  D categories.   STAR  summaries are




available  for most NWS  surface weather  stations  from the  National Climatic




Data Center (NCDC).




     The  ISCLT  user  must  specify ambient  air temperatures by  stability and




season and mixing  heights  by  stability  and./or  wind-speed  and  season.  It  is




suggested  that the average seasonal  maximijm  daily temperature  be assigned  to




the  A,  B  and  C  stability  categories;  the average  seasonal  minimum daily






                                       2-6
-------
                                TABLE 2-4

                      METEOROLOGICAL INPUTS REQUIRED
                    BY THE ISC LONG-TERM MODEL PROGRAM
Parameter                             Definition
fi,j,k,4        Frequency  of occurrence  of  the  ilh  wind-speed  category
                and jth  wind-direction category  by stability  category  k
                for the ^th season (STAR summary)

  UL            Mean wind  speed  in meters  per second  (m/sec) at  height
                zi for  each  wind-speed category  (default  values based  on
                STAR wind-speed categories)

 pj;k           Wind-profile  exponent  for  each combination of  wind-speed
                and stability  categories  (default values  are  assigned  on
                the basis of stability; see  Table  2-2)

Ta;k,z          Ambient  air  temperature  for  the kth  stability  category
                and ^th season in degrees  Kelvin (°K)

 30/9z1,k       Vertical potential temperature  gradient  in degrees  Kelvin
                per meter  (°K/m)  for  each  combination  of wind-speed  and
                stability categories  (default  values are  assigned on  the
                basis of stability category;  see Table  2-2)

Hm;i/k,a        Mixing height  in meters  for  the  ith wind-speed category,
                kth stability category and ^th  season
                                   2-7
-------
                                   TABLE 2-5

     POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF WIND-SPEED AND PASQUILL STABILITY CATEGORIES*
      AND MEAN WIND SPEEDS  IN EACH NCDC STAR SUMMARY WIND-SPEED CATEGORY
                                       Wind Speed  (kt)
 Pasquill Stability
      Category          0-3
4-6
7-10
11-16
17-21
A XX
B XX
C XX
D XX
E X
F XX
ISCLT Wind Speed
(m/sec) 1.50 2.50
(knots) 2.91 4.86

X
X X X X
X X X X
X

4.30 6.80 9.50 12.50
8.35 13.21 18.45 24.28
* Based on Turner (1964)  definitions of  the Pasguill  stability categories.
                                       2-8
-------
                            •»,«=£>   360   O/Q
                              '90    !80
FIGURE 2-1.  The sixteen standard  22.5-degree wind direction sectors used
             in STAR summaries.
                                2-9
-------
temperature be assigned to  the  E and F  stability  categories;  and the  average




seasonal temperature be assigned to the D stability category.   In urban areas,




common  practice   is  to  assign  the  mean afternoon  mixing  height  given  by




Holzworth  (1972)  to  the  B  and  C  stability  categories,  1.5  times the  mean




afternoon mixing  height to  the  A stability category,  the  mean  early  morning




mixing height to  the  E and F stability categories, and the  average of the mean




early morning and afternoon mixing  heights  to the  D stability  category.   In




rural areas, the  applicability  of Holzworth early morning urban mixing heights




is questionable.   Consequently,  ISCLT in the Rural Mode  currently assumes that




there  is  no  restriction  on  vertical  mixing  during  hours   with E  and  F




stabilities.  It  is  suggested that  Holzworth mean afternoon mixing  heights be




assigned  to the   B,  C and  D  stability categories in rural areas  and that 1.5




times  the  mean   afternoon  mixing  height  be  assigned  to  the  A  stability




category.   If  sufficient  climatological  data  are  available,  wind-profile




exponents and vertical  potential temperature gradients can be  assigned by the




user  to each combination  of  wind-speed  and stability categories  in order to




make  the  long-term  model  site  specific.   In  the   absence  of  site-specific




wind-profile  exponents  and  vertical  potential  temperature  gradients,  the




default values given in Table 2-2 are automatically used by the ISCLT program.




    The   ISCLT  program  contains  a  rural  mode  and  three  urban   modes.   A




discussion  of these  modes and  guidance  on  their  use  is given  in  Section




2.2.1.1.









    2.2.2   Source Input Data




    Table   2-6  summarizes  the   source   input  data   requirements  of  the  ISC




Dispersion  Model computer  programs.   As  shown  by the  table,  there are  three




source  types:  stack,  volume  ?.nd area.  The volume  source  option is also  used




to simulate line sources.   Source elevations above  mean  sea  level and  source






                                       2-10
-------
                                 TABLE 2-6

              SOURCE  INPUTS  REQUIRED BY  THE  ISC MODEL  PROGRAMS
 Parameter
                        Definition
Stacks
   X, Y
    Yn
         BHj
    W,   BWj
Volume Source
 Line Source

    Q
Pollutant  emission rate for  concentration calculations (mass
per unit time)

Total  pollutant  emissions  during the time  period  T for which
deposition is calculated (mass)

Pollutant decay coefficient (seconds"^-)

X and Y coordinates of the stack (meters)

Elevation.of base of stack (meters above mean sea level)

Stack height (meters)

Stack exit velocity (meters per second)

Stack inner diameter (meters)

Stack exit temperature (degrees Kelvin)

Mass fraction  of  particulates in  the  nth settling-velocity
category

Gravitational settling  velocity for  particulates  in  the  nth
settling-velocity category (meters per second)

Surface reflection coefficient  for  particulates  in  the  nth
settling-velocity category

Height of  building adjacent  to the stack  (meters);  direction
specific building heights (meters)  for the  jtn  wind direction
category.   The direction specific heights are required by the
Schulman-Scire building wake effects method.

Width of building adjacent to the stack  (meters);  direction
specific building widths (meters)  for the  jth  wind direction
category.   The direction specific  heights are required by the
Schulman-Scire building wake effects method.

Length of building adjacent to the stack (meters)
Same definition as for stacks

Same definition as for stacks
               Same definition as for stacks
                                   2-11
                                                        12/87
-------
                                  TABLE  2-6
                                  (CONTINUED)

               SOURCE INPUTS REQUIRED BY THE ISC MODEL PROGRAMS
  Parameter                             Definition
Volume Source
(Line Source) (Continued)

   X, Y           X and Y coordinates  of  the center of the  volume  source or
                  of  each  volume  source  used  to  represent  a  line  source
                  (meters)

    zs            Elevation of the ground surface at the point  of the center
                  of each volume source (meters above mean sea level)

    H             Height  of  the  center  of  each  volume   source  above  the
                  ground surface (meters)

   Ovo            Initial horizontal dimension (meters)

   c:o            Initial vertical dimension (meters)

    4>r.            Same definition as for stacks

   Vsn            Same definition as for stacks

    Yn            Same definition as for stacks

Area Source

    QA            Pollutant  emission  rate  for  concentration   calculations
                  (mass per unit time per unit area)

   QAT            Total  pollutant  emissions during  the  time  period  T  for
                  which deposition is calculated  (mass per unit area)

    n            Same definition as for stacks

   V,n            Same definition as for stacks

     Yn            Same definition as for stacks
                                    ___                                  __
-------
locations  with  respect  to  a  user-specified  origin  are  required  for  all

sources.   If the Universal  Transverse  Mercator (UTM) coordinate system is used

to  define  receptor  locations,  UTM  coordinates can only  be  used  to  define

source locations if  a  Cartesian receptor array is  used.  With a polar receptor

array, the  origin  is  at  (X=0,  Y=0).   The X  and  Y coordinates  of  the  other

sources  with respect  to  this  origin  are then obtained  from a plant  layout

drawn to scale.  The x axis is positive to the east and the y  axis  is  positive

to  the north.   Note that  the origin of the polar  receptor array is  always at

X=0, Y=0.

    The  pollutant  emission  rate  is  also  required  for  each  source.   If  the

pollutant is depleted by any mechanism that can be described  by time-dependent

exponential  decay,  the user  may  enter  a  decay coefficient  <|».  • Note that if

SOz  is  modelled  in the  urban mode,  and  the  regulatory default  option  is

chosen,  a  decay  half  life  of   4  hours  is  automatically  assigned.   The

parameters      are   only   input   if   concentration   or

deposition  calculations  are  being  made  for particulates  with  appreciable

gravitational   settling   velocities    (diameters   greater   than   about   20

micrometers).   Particulate  emissions  from  each source can  be divided  by  the

user  into   a   maximum of  20  gravitational   settling-velocity  categories.

Emission rates  used  by the short-term model program ISCST may be held con-.Inn1-

or may be varied as follows:


    •  By hour of the day
    •  By season or month
    •  By hour of the day and season
    •  By  wind-speed   and   stability   categories   (applies  to  fugitive
       sources of wind-blown dust)


Emission rates used by the long-term model program ISCLT may be  annual average

rates or may be varied by season or by wind-speed and stability categories.
                                      2-13
-------
    Additional source inputs required for  stacks  include  the  physical  stack height,




the stack exit velocity, the stack  inner  diameter,  and the stack exit  temperature.




For  an  area  source  or a  volume  source,  the dimensions of  the  source  and  the




effective emission height are entered in place of  these  parameters.   If a  stack is




located on or adjacent  to  a building and the  stack  height to building height  ratio




is  less  than  2.5, the  length  (L)  and  width  (W)  of the  building  are required as




source  inputs  in  order   to   include   aerodynamic  wake  effects  in  the  model




calculations.   If the regulatory  option  is  set,  or  the building  height is  entered




as a negative number, then the revised  building wake methodology  will  be  used.   The




revised methodology uses  the Schulman-Scire method  when  the  stack  height  is  less




than or  equal to the building height plus  one-half of  the lesser of  the  building




height or building width.  Otherwise, the Huber-Snyder method is used as  in earlier




versions of the  ISC model.  When the Schulman-Scire method is used,  an  additional




array  of 36  wind direction  specific building  heights   and  projected  widths  are




required.




    2.2.3  Receptor Data




    The  ISC Dispersion  Model  computer  programs  allow the user to select  either a




Cartesian (X,  Y)  or a polar  (r, 6)  receptor grid  system.   In  the Cartesian system,




the  x-axis  is positive  to the east  of  a  user-specified origin  and  the  y-axis is




positive to the north.  In the  polar system, r is  the radial  distance  measured from



the  origin  (X=0,  Y=0) and the  angle 9 (azimuth  bearing)  is measured clockwise from




north.  If the industf'al  source  complex  is comprised of multiple sources  that are




not  located  at   the  same  point,  a  Cartesian coordinate system  is   usually  more




convenient  than   the  polar  coordinate  system.    Additionally,  if  the   Universal




Transverse  Mercator   (UTM)  coordinate system  is   used  to  define source  locations




and/or to  extract  the elevations  of  receptor points  from USGS  topographic  maps,




the  UTM  system   can  also  be  used  in  the ISC  Model  calculations.    Vertical




coordinates   of   each  receptor   are  optional  inputs   to   the   ISC  model.    If




concentrations  are  to   be  calculated  for  impacts  on  elevated  terrain,  receptor




terrain elevations (Z) must  be input.   If concentrations are  to  be   calculated for




impacts above local ground level,  receptor heights (RHT)  above local terrain must be




                                      2-14                                 12/87
-------
input.   Discrete  (arbitrarily  placed)  receptor points  corresponding to  the

locations of  air  quality monitors,  elevated terrain features,  the  property

boundaries of the industrial source  complex  or  other points of  interest  can

be used with either coordinate  system.

    In the  polar  coordinate system,  receptor points are  usually spaced  at

10-degree intervals  on concentric rings.   Thus,  there are  36  receptors  on

each ring.  The radial  distances  from the origin to  the  receptor rings  are

user selected  and are generally  set  equal  to the distances to  the  expected

maximum  concentrations  for  the  major  pollutant  sources  under  the   most

frequent   stability  and  wind-speed   combinations.    Estimates  of   these

distances  can  be  obtained  from  the  PTPLU computer  program  (Pierce  and

Turner,  1982)   or  from  preliminary  calculations  using  the ISCST  computer

program.  The  maximum number  of  receptor points  is determined by  factors

such as  the  number  of sources  and the desired output (see Equation (3-1) for

the short-term model and Equations (4-1), (4-2), and  (4-3) for  the  long-term

model).  An example of a polar  receptor array is shown in Figure 2-2.

    In  the  Cartesian  coordinate  system,  the  X  and Y coordinates  of  the

receptors  are  specified  by the  user.   The spacing of  grid  points is  not

required to be uniform so that  the density of grid points  can be greatest in

the area of the  expected maximum concentrations.  For example,  assume that

an  industrial  source complex  is  comprised  of a  number  of major  sources,

contained  within  a  1-kilometer  square,  whose  maximum   concentrations  are

expected  to occur  at  downwind distances ranging  from  500  to   1000  meters.

The Cartesian  receptor grid (X and Y = 0,  +200,  +400,   +600,  +800,  +1000,

+1200,  +1500,  +2000,  +3000)   illustrated in  Figure 2-3  provides  a  dense

spacing  of grid  points  in the areas where the  highest  concentrations  are

expected  to occur.  As  shown  by Figure  2-3,  use  of  the Cartesian  system

requires  that  some  of the receptor points be  located within the property of

the source complex.  If a receptor is located within 1 meter of  a  source, or
                                     2-15                                 12/87
-------
                                            •       •
                                             •
                                              •      •
                                  ..
                  •        •

                     •
FIGURE 2-2.   Example of a polar receptor grid.   The  stippled area shows the

             property of a hypothetical industrial source complex.
                                  O- 1 A
-------
OUVAJ
2000
1000
0
-1000
-2000
-30OO
-30






























































































































*







OO -2000 -1000









• ••
:;-


















^ ,
•?.
•::
^















.-
'.. :
•_.,•:
*'• **•















• -- .
'•\
•'-'-;
'•..V'
-=•••
. ".















,

















0












































































































1000 2000 3O
FIGURE 2-3.  Example of an irregularly-spaced Cartesian receptor grid.   The
             stippled area shows the property of a hypothetical industrial
             source complex.
                                   2-17
-------
within 3  building heights  (or  3 building  widths,  if the  width is  less




than  the  height)   of   a  source,   a  warning  message1  is  printed  and




concentrations are  not  calculated  for  the source-receptor  combination.




The  user  should be  cautioned,  however, that while the  dispersion  curves




have been  extrapolated  down from 100m to 1m, predicted  concentrations at




these very close  source-receptor distances  may be suspect.   Comparison of




Figures 2-2  and 2-3  shows  that, for  the hypothetical  industrial  source




complex described  above, the Cartesian receptor array  is  more  likely to




detect the maximum concentrations produced by the combined  emissions from




the  various   sources  within the  industrial  source  complex  than  is  the




polar receptor array.




    As noted above,  discrete (arbitrarily spaced) receptor points  may be




entered  using  either  a polar  or  a  Cartesian coordinate  system.   In




general,  discrete receptor points  are placed  at  the  locations  of  air




quality monitors,  the boundaries of the property of  an industrial  source




complex  or  at  other  points  of  interest.   However,  discrete receptor




points  can  be  used for  many  purposes.   For  example,   assume  that   a




proposed   coal-fired  power  plant  will   be  located  approximately  30




kilometers from a  National  Park that is a Class  I  (pristine air quality)




area and that  it  is desired to determine whether the 3-hour and 24-hour




Class  I  Prevention   of  Significant  Deterioration  (PSD)   Increments  for




SO2  will  be exceeded on  more than  18  days  per  year.  The  angular




dimensions of the areas  within which  the 3-hour and 24-hour Class  I PSD




Increments  of  S02 are  exceeded are  usually  less  than 10  degrees.   It




follows   that  a  polar  coordinate   system  with   a  10-degree  angular




separation of  receptors is  not adequate  to  detect all  occurrences of




3-hour  and   24-hour  S02  concentrations above   the   short-term Class   I




SO 2   Increments.   The  user   may  therefore   wish  to   place  discrete




 receptors at 1-degree  intervals  along  the  boundary  of   and  within the




Class  I  area.




                                      2-18                                 12/87
-------
    If model  calculations  are  to  be  made  for an  industrial source  complex




located in  terrain exceeding the  height of  the  lowest  stack,  the  elevation




above mean sea  level  of  each receptor must be  input.   If the elevation of any




receptor exceeds the  height  of  any stack or  the effective emission height  of




any volume  source, the  elevation  of  the receptor is automatically  reduced to




.005 meters  below  the stack height (emission  height  for  volume  source)  for




each stack.  After computation  from this source,  the elevation  is  set back to




its original  value.   However,  the  user  is  cautioned  that concentrations  at




these receptors may not be valid.




2.3 Plume Rise Formulas




    The  Briggs  plume rise  equations are  discussed below.   The  description




follows  Appendix  B  of  the  Addendum  to the  MPTER  User's Guide   (Chico  and




Catalano,  1986)  for  plumes  unaffected  by  building   wakes.   The  distance




dependent  momentum plume  rise  equations,  as  described  in  (Bowers,   et  al.,




1979)  are  used  with  building downwash  calculations.   When the  model  executes




the building  downwash methods of  Schulman  and Scire,  the reduced  plume  rise




suggestions  of Scire and  Schulman (1980) are  used.    Plume  rise  calculations




used  to determine if the plume  is  affected  by  the   wake   region are  made




assuming   no   stack-tip   downwash  for  both  the   Huber-Snyder   and   the




Schulman-Scire methods.




    2.3.1  Wind  Profile




    The  wind power law is used to  adjust the observed  wind speed  u^  from the




measurement  height z^ (default  value  of 10  meters) to  that at the  emission




height h.  The equation  is of the form:




                                 u  = ui  (h/z^P                      (2-1)




where  p  is  the  wind profile exponent.   Values may be provided by the user.




Default  values are given in  Table 2-2.




    2.3..2  Stack-tip  Downwash




    In order  to  consider  stack-tip  downwash, modification  of the  physical




stack  height is performed (as  a  user option)  following Briggs (1974,  p.  4).




                                      2-19           .                    12/87
-------
The modified physical stack height h'  is found from:


                   h'  =  h  +  2d  [(vs/u)    -  1.5]  for vs  <  1.5 u             (2-2)
                        or
                   h' = h                       for vs  > 1.5 u


where h  is physical  stack  height, vs  is  stack  gas  velocity,  m  s"1,  and  d

is inside  stack  top diameter,  m.  This  h' is  used throughout the remainder of

the plume height computation.  If  stack  downwash  is  not considered, h'  =  h in

the following equations.
    2.3.3  Buoyancy Flux

    For  most  plume rise  situations,  the  value  of  the  Briggs buoyancy  flux

parameter,  F,  in m4  s"3  is  needed.   The  following  equation is  equivalent

to equation (12),  (Briggs, 1975, p. 63):


                        F = gvs d2AT/4Ts                                  (2-3)


where  AT   =   Ts  -  Ta,  Ts   is   stack  gas  temperature   (K),  and   Ta   is

ambient  air temperature (K).
    2.3.4  Unstable or Neutral 	 Crossover Between Momentum and Buoyancy

    For cases with stack gas temperature greater  than  ambient air temperature,

whether   the   plume   rise  is  dominated  by  momentum  or  buoyancy  must  be

determined.   The crossover  temperature  difference  (AT)C  is  determined  for

 (1) F  less than 55 and  (2) F  greater than or equal to  55.   If the difference

between  stack gas temperature  and ambient  air  temperature,  AT,  exceeds  the

 (AT)C,  the  buoyant  plume  rise equation  is used;  if less  than this amount,

 the momentum  plume rise.equation is used (see below).
                                       2-20
-------
    For  F  less  than  55,  the  crossover  temperature  difference  is. found  by




setting  Equation  (5.2)  .(Briggs,  1969,  p. 59)  equal  to  the  combination  of




Equations  (6)  and   (7)  (Briggs,  1971,   p.   1031)  and  solving  for  AT.   The




result is:






                          (AT)C  =  0.0297  Ts vs  1/3/d2/3                    (2-4)







    For F equal to or greater than 55, the crossover  temperature  difference  is




found by  setting  Equation  (5.2) (Briggs, 1969, p.  59) equal  to the combination




of  Equation (6)  and  (7)  (Briggs,  1971,  p.  1031) and solving  for  AT.   The




result is:






                         
-------
    For F equal to or greater than 55:




                          H = h'  + 38.71  F3/s/u                           (2-9)









    2.3.6  Unstable or Neutral ---- Momentum Rise




    For situations where  the  stack gas  temperature  is less  than  or equal  to




the ambient  air temperature,  the assumption  is  made that  the  plume rise  is




dominated  by  momentum.   If AT  is  less  than  (AT)C   from  Equation  (2-4)  or




(2-5),  the assumption is  also  made  that  the  plume  rise  is  dominated  by




momentum.  The plume  height is calculated  from Equation  (5.2) (Briggs,  1969,




p. 59):




                                H = h'  +  3d vs/u                         (2-10)






Briggs  (1969,  p.  59) suggests  that  this  equation  is  most  applicable  when




vs/u  is  greater than  4.   Since  momentum rise occurs quite close  to  the point




of release, the distance to final rise  is set equal to zero.









    2.3.7  Stability Parameter




    For  stable situations  the  stability  parameter  s  is  calculated from the




equation  (Briggs,  1971, p.  1031):






                                 s = gOe/3z)/Ta                          (2-11)






As  a  default  approximation,  for stability class  E,  or 5,  38/3z is taken as




0.02  K  m"1,  and  for stability  class  F,  or  6,  36/3z  is  taken  as 0.035  K
    2.3.8  Stable ---- Crossover Between Momentum and Buoyancy




    For   cases  with  stack  gas   temperatures   greater   than   ambient  air




 temperature,  determining whether  the  plume rise  is dominated by  momentum or




 buoyancy  is  necessary.   The  crossover   temperature  difference  (AT)C  is




                                      2-22
-------
found by setting Equation (59)  (Briggs,  1975,  p.  96) equal to  Equation (4.28),




(Briggs, 1969, p. 59) and solving for AT.   The result is:






                           (AT)C = 0.01958 Ta  vs  slx2                    (2-12)






    If  the   difference  between   stack   gas  temperature  and   ambient   air




temperature,  AT, exceeds  (AT)C, the  plume  rise  is  assumed  to  be  buoyancy




dominated; if  less  than this amount, the plume rise  is  assumed to be momentum




dominated.









    2.3.9  Stable 	 Buoyancy Rise




    For  situations  where  AT  exceeds  (AT)C as  determined  above,  buoyancy




is  assumed  to  dominate.   The  distance  to   final  rise,  in  kilometers,  is




determined by the equivalent  of a  combination of Equations  (48)  and (59) in




Briggs, (1975), p. 96):






                          xf = 0.00207 u s~1/2                           (2-13)






    The plume height is determined by the equivalent of Equation  (59) (Briggs,




1975, p. 96):






                           H = h1 + 2.6 (F/us)l/3                         (2-14)






    2.3.10  Stable 	 Momentum Rise




    Where  the  stack gas temperature is less  than  or equal to the  ambient air




temperature,  the  assumption  is made  that  the   plume  rise  is   dominated by




momentum.    If   AT   is   less   than  (AT)C   as   determined  by   (2-12),   the




assumption  is also  made that the  plume  rise is  dominated by momentum.   The




plume height  is calculated from Equation (4.28) of Briggs ((1969), p. 59):






                      H = h1 + 1.5[v.ad2T./{4T4u)]l'J8'1"               (2-15)









                                     2-23                                 12/87
-------
    The equation  for  unstable-neutral  momentum rise (2-10)  is  also evaluated.

The lower result of these two equations is used as the  resulting plume height.
    2.3.11 All  Conditions  —  Distance  Less  Than  Distance  to  Final  Rise  -
           (Gradual Rise)

    Where  gradual  rise  is to  be  estimated for  unstable,  neutral,  or  stable

conditions, if  the distance  upwind from receptor to  source x,  in kilometers,

is  less  than  the  distance  to final  rise,  the equivalent  of  Equation  (2)

(Briggs, 1972, p. 1030) is used to determine plume height:


                           H = h'  + (160 F1/3x2x3)/u                     (2-16)


This  height  will be  used only for buoyancy dominated  conditions;  should  it

exceed  the  final   rise  for   the  appropriate  condition,  the  final  rise  is

substituted instead.

    Mote  that the  building downwash algorithm  always  requires the calculation

of a  distance dependent momentum  plume rise.   When building  downwash is being

simulated, the  following equations (Bowers, -et al, 1979) are used  to calculate

a distance dependent momentum  plume rise:


    a)  unstable    H =  h1 +  [3 Fm x / (flj2 u2)]1'3                       (2-17)
        conditions

           where  x is   the downwind distance  (meters),  with a  maximum value
           defined by xm»x as followa:
                  x»,,x  = 4d  (v« + 3 u)2 /  (v, u)  for F =  0
                    or
                    49  F  *'*                      for 0 <  F  <  55 mVs  3
                    or
                    119 F  2/s                     for F  >  55 m"/s3

    b)  stable     H =  h1  +  [3 Fn  sin (s1'2  jc  / u)/(flj2 u sl/2)]1X3      (2-18)
        conditions

           where x  is   the  downwind distance   (meters),  with a  maximum value
           defined  by xm,x  as follows:
                                      2-24                                 ]2/87
-------
      xmax = 0.5 ir u / S1/2                 for F = 0
             or
             ir u / S1/2                     for F > 0

    where    fij  = (1/3 + u/vs)
             Fm  = Ta vs2d2/{4 Ts)


    2.3.12 Plume Rise When Schulman and Scire Building Downwash is Selected

    When  the  regulatory  default   option  is  selected,   the  wind  direction

specific building dimensions  are used by the  ISC  model when the  stack  height

is  less  than the building height plus  one  half of the lesser  of  the building

height or width.  When these criteria are met, the ISCST model  estimates plume

rise during  building  downwash conditions following the suggestion of Scire and

Schulman  (1980).   The plume  rise  during  building  downwash  conditions  is

reduced due to the initial dilution of the plume with ambient air.

    The  plume  rise is  estimated  as  follows.   The initial  dimensions  of  the

downwashed plume  are  approximated  by a line source of length YL and depth 2 Ro

where:

           R0   = ^2A oz ;          x   = 3 LB                        (2-15a)

           YL   = \2Tr(0y-oz) ;      x   = 3 LB, oy>oz                 (2-15b)

           YL   =   0  ;              x   = 3 LB, oy
-------
The rise of  a  downwashed finite line source was solved in the BLP model (Scire




and Schulman, 1980).   The neutral rise (Z) is given by:




Z3 + (3L/(irB)}Z2 +• ((3R0/B)Z + 6RoL/(TrB2) + 3RO2/B2)Z =




                                    3Fx2/(2B2u3) + 3Fm x /(Bj2u2)    (2-15e)




Maximum stable rise is calculated by:




Z3 + (3L/(irB))Z2 + ((3R0/fi)Z + 6RoL/(ffB2) + 3RO2/B2)Z = 6F/(B2uS)    (2-15f)




where:




           F     =     buoyancy flux term = gvsd^(l - Ta/Ts)/4




           Fm    =     momentum flux term = (Ta/Ts) vs2d2/4




           x     =     downwind distance




           u     =     wind speed at emission height




           fl     =     entrainment parameter




           Bj    =     jet entrainment coefficient = (1/3 + u/vs)




           vs    =     stack exit velocity




           d     =     stack diameter




           Ta    =     ambient temperature




           Ts    =     stack temperature




           g     =     acceleration due to gravity




           S     =     stability parameter




If the effective plume height,  he,  is greater  than  1.2  BH (direction specific




building height), then av = 0, and  YL = 0 and  the  init-iul  dilution reverts to




an initially circular plume.  If he  >  BH + 2Lg, or  if  there  are no buildings,




the Ro  =  0 and  the  plume  rise  equations reduce  to the commonly  used Briggs




equations.
                                     2-25a                                12/37
-------
2.4 The ISC Short-Term Dispersion Model Equations

    2.4.1  Stack Emissions

    The  ISC  short-term concentration  model  for stacks  uses  the  steady-state

Gaussian plume  equation for  a  continuous elevated source.  For  each stack and

each hour, the origin of the  stack's coordinate system is placed at  the  ground

surface  at the  base  of  the stack.   The x  axis is  positive  in  the  downwind

direction, the  y axis  is crosswind  (normal)  to the  x  axis  and  the z  axis

extends  vertically.   The  fixed  receptor  locations  are  converted  to  each

stack's  coordinate  system  for  each  hourly concentration  calculation.   The

hourly concentrations  calculated  for each stack at  each receptor are summed to

obtain the total concentration  produced at each receptor  by the  combined stack

emissions.

    The  hourly  concentration at  downwind distance  x  (meters)  and  crosswind

distance y (meters)  is given by:


         X  =  KQDV (iru ay oz)"' exp [-0.5 (y/ay)2]                       (2-19)


where:

         Q  =  pollutant emission rate (mass per unit time)

         K  =  a scaling coefficient to  convert calculated  concentrations
               to  desired  units  (default  value  of  1 x  10s  for  Q  in
               g/sec and concentration in ug/m3)

         V  =  vertical term (See Equation (2-42))

         D  =  decay term (See  Equation (2-20))

    oy. Ox  =  standard deviation of lateral, vertical concentration
               distribution (m)

         u  =. mean wind speed (m/sec) at stack height
                                      2-25b                             12/87
-------
    Equation  (2-19)  includes  a Vertical  Term,  a  Decay  Term,  and  dispersion

coefficients  (ay  and  cz)  as  discussed  below.    It   should  be  noted  that

the  Vertical  Term   includes  the  effects  of  source  elevation,  plume  rise,

limited  mixing  in  the  vertical,  and  the  gravitational  settling  and  dry

deposition of  larger particulates  (particulates  with  diameters  greater  than

about 20 micrometers).

    The  Decay Term,  which is  a  simple  method  of accounting  for  pollutant

removal by physical or chemical processes, is of the form:


       D  =  exp (-v|/ x/u) for i|/ > 0.                                     (2-20)
             or
          =  0.           for Y = 0.  (i.e., decay not considered
                               when zero is input for »f).
where:
                     y = the decay coefficient (sec"1)
                     x = downwind distance (meters)
For  example,   if  Tl/2  is  the  pollutant half  life  in seconds, the  user can

obtain y from  the relationship:


                                 Y = 0.693/Ti/z          .                 (2-21)


The  default value  for  y is  zero.   That is,  decay  is  not considered  in the

model  calculations unless  y is  specified.   However, a  decay half  life of 4

hours  (Y  = 0.0000481s"1)  is  automatically  assigned  for  S02  modeled  in an

urban mode when the regulatory  default option is chosen.

     In  addition to stack  emissions,  the  ISC  short-term  concentration  model

considers  emissions from area  and volume sources.  The volume-source option is

also used  to  simulate   line  sources.    These  model  options  are  described in

Section 2.4.2.   Section 2.4.3  gives  the optional algorithms for  calculating

dry deposition for  stack, area, and volume  sources.




                                     2-26                                  12/87
-------
    2.4.1.1  The Dispersion Coefficients




    a.   Point  Source  Dispersion  Coefficients.   Equations that  approximately




fit  the  Pasguill-Gifford  curves  (Turner,  1970)  are  used  to  calculate  ay




(meters)  and  cz  (meters)  for urban  modes 1  and 2 and  the  rural mode.   The




equations  used to calculate ay are of the form:









                       cy  =  465.11628  (x)  tan(TH)                     (2-22)




where:







                       TH  =  0.017453293 (c  - d In x)                    (2-23)
In Equations  (2-22)  and  (2-23)  the downwind distance x  is  in_ kij.omet:_ers,  and




the  coefficients c  and  d  are  listed in  Table 2-7.   The  equation used  to




calculate 0Z is of the form:
                                   =  axb                                (2-24)
where  the  downwind  distance  x  is  in  kilometers  and  az   is  in  meters  in




Equation (2-24) and the coefficients a and b are given in Table 2-8.




    Tables  2-9 and  2-10  show the  equations  used  to  determine  ay  and  az




for Urban Mode 3.   These expressions were determined  by Briggs  as reported by




Gifford  (1976) and  represent  a  best fit  to  urban  vertical  diffusion  data




reported by  McElroy  and Pooler (1968).   The Briggs functions are assumed to be




valid  for downwind  distances less than 100m.  However,  the  user  is  cautioned




that concentrations at receptors less than 100m from a source may be suspect.









    b.  Downwind and Crosswind Distances.   As noted in  Section  2.2.3,  the ISC




Model  uses  either  a  polar  or  a  Cartesian  receptor grid  as specified  by the






                                      2-27
-------
                                   TABLE 2-7




               PARAMETERS USED TO CALCULATE PASQUILL-GIFFORD ay

Pasquill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
-E
F
oy (meters) = 465.
TH = 0.017453293
c
24.1670
18.3330
12.5000
8.3330
6.2500
4.1667
11628 (x) tan (TH)
(c - d In x)
d
2.5334
1.8096
1.0857
0.72382
0.54287
0.36191
*Where av is in meters  and x  is  in  kilometers
                                      2-28
-------
                                   TABLE 2-8

                PARAMETERS USED TO CALCULATE PASQUILL-GIFFORD o,
Pasquill
Stability
Category x (km)
A* <.10
0.10 - 0.15
0.16 - 0.20
0.21 - 0.25
0.26 - 0.30
0.31 - 0.40
0.41 - 0.50
0.51 - 3.11
>3.11
B* < .20
0.21 - 0.40
>0.40
C* All
D <.30
0.31 - 1.00
1.01 - 3.00
3.01 - 10.00
10.01 - 30.00
>30.00
az (meters)
a
122.800
158.080
170.220
179.520
217.410
258.890
346.750
453.850
**
90.673
98.483
109.300
61.141
34.459
32.093
32.093
33.504
36.650
44.053
= a xb
b
0.94470
1.05420 '
1.09320
1.12620
1.26440
1.40940
1.72830
2.11660
**
0.93198
0.98332
1.09710
0.91465
0.86974
0.81066
0.64403
0.60486
0.56589
0.51179
 *If the calculated value of az exceeds 5000 m,  oz is set to 5000 m.

**az is equal to 5000 m.
                                      2-29
-------
TABLE 2-8


(CONTINUED)
PARAMETERS USED TO CALCULATE
Pasquill
Stability
Category x (km)
E < . 10
0.10 - 0.30
0.31 - 1.00
1.01 - 2.00
2.01 - 4.00
4.01 - 10.00
10.01 - 20.00
20.01 - 40,00
>40.00
F <.20
0.21 - 0.70
0.71 - 1.00
1.01 - 2.00
2.01 - 3.00
3.01 - 7.00
7.01 - 15.00
15.01 - 30.00
30.01 - 60.00
>60.00
PASQUILL-GIFFORD a.
az (meters) = a
a
24.260
23.331
21.628
21.628
22.534
24.703
26.970
35.420
47.618
15.209
14.457
13.953
13.953
14.823
16.187
17.836
22.651
27.074
34.219

xb
b
0.83660
0.81956
0. "75660
0.63077
0.57154
0.50527
0.46713
0.37615
0.29592
0.81558
0.78407
0.68465
0.63227
0.54503
0.46490
0.41507
0.32681
0.27436
0.21716
2-30
-------
                                   TABLE 2-9

              BRIGGS FORMULAS USED TO CALCULATE McELROY-POOLER ay
            Pasguill
            Stability
            Category
oy (meters)*
               A

               B

               C

               D

               E

               F
0.32 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)

0.32 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)

0.22 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)

0.16 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)

0.11 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)

0.11 x (1.0 + 0.0004 x)
                -1/2
*Where x is in meters.
                                   TABLE 2-10

              BRIGGS FORMULAS USED TO CALCULATE McELROY-POOLER a:
Pasguill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F





oz (meters)*
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
0.
24 x
24 x
20 x
14 x
08 x
08 x
(1.0 + 0.
(1.0 + 0.

(1.0 + 0.
(1.0 + 0.
(1.0 +• 0 .
001 x)1
001 x)1

0003 x)
0015 x)
0015 x)
/ 2
/ 2

-1/2
-1/2
-1/2
*Where x is in meters.
                                      2-31
-------
user.   In the polar  coordinate  system,  the radial coordinate  of  the., point (r,




9)  is  measured  from  the  user-specified  origin and  angular  coordinate  6  is




measured clockwise from north.   In the  Cartesian coordinate system,  the X axis




is  positive  to  the   east  of the  user-specified  origin  and  the  Y  axis  is




positive to the  north.  For either type of receptor  grid,  the  user must define




the location  of each  source  with  respect to  the origin of the grid  using




Cartesian coordinates. • In the  polar  coordinate system,  where  the origin  is




always at X=0,  Y=0,  the  X  and  Y coordinates of a receptor at  the point  (r,




9) are given by:









                             X(R)  =  r sin 9                            (2-25)






                             Y(R)  =  r cos 9                            (2-26)









If  the X and Y coordinates of  the source  are X(S)  and  Y(S),   the  downwind




distance x to the receptor  is given by:






           x  =  - (X(R) - X(S» sin DD  -  (Y(R) - Y(S)) cos DD         (2-27)









where  DD is the direction  from  which  the wind is blowing.   If any receptor is




located  within  1  meter  of a  source,   a  warning message  is  printed and  r.o




concentrations  are   calculated  for  the   source-receptor  combination.    The




crosswind distance y  to the receptor (see Equation (2-19)) is given by:






           y  =  - (Y(R) -  Y(S)) sin DD  -  (X(R) - X(S)) cos DD         (2-28)






    c.   Lateral  and  Vertical Virtual Distances. -The equations in Tables  (2-7)




through  (2-10)  define the dispersion coefficients for  an  ideal  point source.




However,  volume sources have  initial   lateral  and vertical dimensions.  Also,




as  discussed  below,   building wake  effects can  enhance  the initial  growth of






                                      2-32
-------
stack  plumes.    In  these  cases,   lateral   (xy)   and  vertical   (xz)   virtual




distances are added by  the  ISC Model  to the  actual downwind distance x for the




oy  and  oz  calculations.    The  lateral   virtual   distance  in   kilometers




for Urban Mode  1, Urban Mode 2, and the Rural Mode  is given by:






                                 Xy =  (oyo/p)l/q                          (2-29)






where the stability-dependent  coefficients p and q are given in  Table 2-11 and




0y0  is  the  standard  deviation  in   meters  of  the   lateral   concentration




distribution at  the  source.   Similarly,  the  vertical  virtual  distance  in




kilometers for Urban Mode 1, Urban Mode 2 and the Rural mode is given by:






                                 xz =  (azo/a)'xb                          (2-30)






where  the  coefficients a and b are  obtained from  Table  2-8 and  azo is  the




standard deviation  in  meters  of the vertical concentration distribution at the




source.  It  is  important  to note that  the ISC Model programs check  to ensure




that  the  xz used  to  calculate  az   at (x  +  xz)  in Urban  Mode  1,  Urban




Mode 2,  and the Rural Mode is  the  xz  calculated using  the  coefficients  a and




b  that  correspond  to  the  distance  category specified by  the  quantity  (x  +




xz).




    To  determine  the  virtual  distances  when  Urban  Mode  3  is chosen,  the




functions displayed  in Tables 2-9 and  2-10  are solved for x.    The solutions




are  quadratic   formulas  for  the lateral virtual  distances; and  for  vertical




virtual  distances the  solutions  are  cubic  equations  for  stability  classes  A




and B, a  linear equation  for  stability class C,  and quadratic  equations for




stability classes D, E, and F.









    d.   Procedures Used  to  Account   for  the  Effects  of  Building Wakes  on




Effluent Dispersion.   The procedures  used by  the  ISC Model to  account for the






                                      2-33
-------
                       TABLE 2-11

COEFFICIENTS USED TO CALCULATE LATERAL VIRTUAL DISTANCES
          FOR  PASQUILL-GIFFORD DISPERSION RATES
Pasquill
Stability
Category
A
B
C
D
E
F
Xy = (Oyo>
p
209.14
154.46
103.26
68.26
51.06
33.92
'P>'"
g
0.890
0.902
0.917
0.919
0.921
0.919
                           2-34
-------
effects of  the aerodynamic wakes  and eddies  produced by plant  buildings  and




structures on  plume dispersion originally  followed the  suggestions -of  Huber




and  Snyder  (1976)  and Huber  (1977).   Their suggestions  are  principally based




on  the results  of wind-tunnel  experiments  using  a  model  building  with  a




crosswind  dimension double  that  of  the  building height.   The  atmospheric




turbulence simulated in  the wind-tunnel  experiments was  intermediate  between




the  turbulence  intensity  associated  with  the  slightly  unstable  Pasguill  C




category and the turbulence  intensity associated with the neutral  D  category.




Thus,  the  data  reported by  Huber and  Snyder  reflect  a specific  stability,




building  shape  and  building  orientation  with  respect  to  the   mean  wind




direction.   It  follows  that the  ISC Model  wake-effects  evaluation procedures




may not be strictly applicable  to  all situations.   The current version  of  the




ISC model provides  for a revised treatment of building wake  effects which,  for




certain sources, uses  wind direction  specific building  dimensions,  following




the  suggestions of Schulman  and  Hanna  (1986).    The   revised  treatment  is




largely  based  on  the  work  of  Scire   and  Schulman  (1980).   The  revised




procedures are  used when the  regulatory default  option  is  selected,  or when




the building height is  entered as a negative number.  When the stack  height is




less than  the  building height plus half  the lesser of the building  height or




width,  the methods  of Schulman and Scire  are followed.  Otherwise,  the  methods




of  Huber  and  Snyder  are  followed,  as  in  earlier  versions  of  ISC.   The



wake-effects evaluation procedures may be applied  by the  user to any stack on




or  adjacent  to-  a  building.    For  regulatory  application,  a  building  is




considered  sufficiently  close  to a  stack  to  cause  wake   effects  when  the




distance between the  stack and the nearest  part of the building is  less than




or equal to five times  the  lesser of  the  height  or the projected width  of  the




building.    For additional  guidance  on  determining  whether a  more  complex




building configuration  is likely to cause wake effects, the reader  is  referred
                                                                          12/87
-------
to the  Guideline  for Determination  of Good Engineering  Practice  Stack Height




(Technical  Support Document for the  Stack Height Regulations)  -  Revised (EPA,




1985).    In  the following  sections,   the Huber  and  Snyder  building  downv/ash




method,   as   used   in  all   versions   of  ISC,   are   described  followed  by  a




description  of the Schulman and Scire building  downwash method.




    Huber and Snyder Building Downwash Procedures




    The   first  step in the  wake-effects evaluation  procedures  used  by the  ISC




Model programs  is to calculate  the   plume  rise  due  to  momentum  alone at  a




distance of two building heights  using Equation (2-17) or Equation (2-18).-  If




the plume height,  given by the  sum of the stack height  (no  stack-tip downwash




adjustment)  and the momentum rise is greater than  either 2.5  building heights




(2.5 hj-)) or the sum of the  building  height  and 1.5  times the building width




(hb + 1.5 hw),  the plume  is assumed  to be unaffected  by the building wake.




Otherwise, the plume is assumed to be affected by the building wake.




    In  the  above  calculations,   the  effective  building  width,  hw^  which is




actually used by  the  program is the  diameter of a  circle of the  same area as




the horizontal cross-section of  the  building,  as determined  by HL and  HW  (in




ISCST) or BW (in ISCLT).




    Regulatory  applications  generally  require   the  use   of  the  "maximum




projected width"  (i.e.  the  largest  crosswind building  dimension).   In order




for the  model  to  actually  use the maxirrui" projected width in its calculations,




it is necessary to enter HL = HW = 0.886 times the  maximum projected width (in




ISCST).,  or BW = 0.886 times  the maximum projected width (in ISCLT).




    When  the  plume is affected by  the" building wake,  the  distance  dependent




plume rise  is  used,  even if  the  user selected  final plume rise.   The  larger




value from  the distance dependent  buoyant plume  rise  (equation  2-16) or the




distance dependent momentum  plume rise  (equation 2-17 or  2-18)  is used.
                                     2-35a                                12/87
-------
This Page Is Intentionally Left Blank
                2-35b
-------
    The  ISC Model  programs  account  for  the  effects  of building  wakes by

modifying oz  for  plumes  from  stacks  with  plume height  to  building height

ratios greater  than  1.2  (but  less than  2.5)  and  by modifying  both oy  and

az  for plumes  with  plume  height  to  building  height  ratios  less  than or

equal  to  1.2.   The  plume  height  used  in  the  plume height  to stack height

ratios is the same plume height used to  determine if  the plume is affected by

the  building  wake.   The  ISC  Model defines buildings as  squat  (hw  > hb) or

tall  (hw  <  hb).    The  building  width  hw  is  approximated  by  the  diameter

of  a  circle with  an  area equal  to the  horizontal area  of the building.   The

ISC  Model  includes  a   general   procedure  for  modifying   oz   and  ay  at

distances   greater   than   3  hb   for   squat  buildings   or  3  hw   for   tall

buildings.   The  air  flow  in  the  building  cavity   region  is   both highly

turbulent and  generally recirculating.  The ISC Model is not  appropriate for

estimating  concentrations within  such  regions.   The  ISC Model  assumption  that

this  recirculating  cavity region  extends  to a  downwind distance of  3 hb for

a  squat   building  or 3  hw  for a  tall  building  is  most  appropriate  for  a

building  whose  width  is not much greater  than  its height.   The ISC Model user

is  cautioned that, for other types of buildings,  receptors located  at downwind

distances of  3 hb  (squat  buildings) or 3  hw  (tall  buildings) may  be  within

the  recirculating  region.   Some  guidance  and techniques   for  estimating

concentrations  very  near  buildings can be found in Barry  (1964),  Halitsky

(1963) and  Vincent  (1977)  and Budney (1977).

    The modified az equation for a  squat building is given by:


                  oz' = 0.7hb + 0.067(x-3hb) for 3hb < x <10hb
                        or                                               (2-31)
                      = az {x + xz}          for x > 10hb
                                      2-36
-------
where  the  building  height  hb  is "in  meters.    For  a  tall  building,  Huber

(1977)  suggests  that  the  width  scale  hw  replace  hb  in  Equation  (2-31).

The modified az equation for a tall building is then given by:


                  QT.' = 0.7hw + 0.067(x-3hw) for 3hw < x <10hw
                        or                                               (2-32)
                      = at {x + x*}          for x > 10 hw


where  h*,   is   in  meters.   It  is  important   to  note  that  az'   is   not

permitted to be  less than the point  source  value given in Tables 2-8 or 2-10,

a condition that may occur.

    The  vertical   virtual  distance   xz  is  added  to  the  actual  downwind

distance  x  at  downwind   distances  beyond  10hb   (squat  buildings)  or  10hw

(tall  buildings) in  order  to  account  for  the  enhanced initial  plume growth

caused by the building wake.  It is calculated from solutions  to the equations

for rural or urban sigmas  provided earlier.

    As an  example for the  rural  options.  Equations  (2-24)  and  (2-31)  can be

combined  to derive  the  vertical  virtual  distance  x2  for a  squat building.

First,  it  follows  from  Equation  (2-31)  that   the  enhanced  a2  is equal  to

1.2hb   at  a   downwind   distance   of   10hb    in   meters  or  0.01   hb   in

kilometers.  Thus,  xz  for  a squat building is  obtained from  Equation (2-24)

as follows:


                  az {0.01 hb} =   1.2hb   =   a (0.01hb  + xx)b           (2-33)



                            x, = (1.2hb/a)l/b-  O.Olhb                    (2-34)


where the  stability-dependent constants  a and  b  are given in  Table  2-8.

Similarly,  the vertical virtual distance for tall buildings is given by:


                            xt = (1.2hw/a)l/b - O.Olhw                    (2-35)



                                     2-37                                 12/87
-------
When  Urban  Mode  3  is  selected  xz   is  calculated  from  solutions  £o  the

equations  in Table  2-10  for  az  =  1.2  hb  or  az   =  1.2  hw  for  tall   or

squat buildings, respectively.

    For  a  squat  building with  a  building  width to building  height  ratio

hw/hb less than or equal  to 5, the modified ay equation is given by:


                   ay'  = 0.35hw +  0.067  (x  -  3hb) for 3hb  10hb


at  a  downwind  distance  of  10hb.   The  lateral virtual  distance  is  then

calculated for this value of oy.

    For  building width  to building height  ratios hw/hb  greater than  5,  the

presently  available  data  are  insufficient  to provide  general   equations  for

0y.   For a  building  that is  much  wider than  it  is  tall and a  stack located

toward  the  center  of  the  building (i.e.,  away  from either  end),  only  the

height  scale  is  considered   to  be  significant.   The  modified ay  equation

for a very squat building is then given by:


                   oy'  = 0.35hb +  0.067  (x - 3hb)  for  3hb   10hb


For   hw/hb   greater  than  5   and  a  stack   located   laterally   within  about

2.5 hb  of the  end of  the  building,  lateral  plume spread is affected  by the

flow  around  the  end of  the building.  With end  effects,  the enhancement  in the

initial  lateral spread is assumed not  to  exceed  that given by Equation (2-36)

with  hw  replaced by 5hb.  The  modified  ay  equation is given by:
                     ,' = 1.75hb + 0.067 (x - 3hb) for 3hb 10hb
                                      2-38
-------
The upper and lower bounds of the concentrations that can be expected  to  occur

near  a  building  are  determined  respectively,  using  Eguations  (2-37)  and

(2-38).  The user  must  specify whether Equation  (2-37)  or  Equation (2-38)  is

to be  used in  the model calculations.   In the absence of  user  instructions,

the ISC Model uses Equation (2-37)  if  the building  width  to building  height

ratio hw/hb exceeds 5.

    Although Equation (2-37) provides  the highest concentration  estimates  for

squat  buildings   with   building  width   to  building  height   ratios   hw/hb

greater than 5,  the equation is applicable only  to a  stack located  near  the

center of  the  building  when the wind  direction  is perpendicular to  the long

side of the building (i.e., when the air flow over the portion of  the  building

containing the  source is two dimensional).  Thus, Equation  (2-38) generally is

more appropriate than Equation (2-37).   It is  believed that Equations  (2-37)

and (2-38) provide reasonable  limits on the extent  of  the  lateral enhancement

of dispersion and  that  these equations are adequate until additional  data  are

available to evaluate the flow near very wide buildings.

    The modified oy equation for a tall building is given by:


                    oy = 0.35hw + 0.067(x  - 3hw) for  3hw 10hw


    The  ISC  Model  programs print  a  warning  message   and  do  not  calculate

concentrations  for any   source-receptor   combination  where the  source-receptor

separation is  less than 1  meter or  3hb   for a  squat  building  or  3hw   for  a

tall building.   It should be noted that,  for certain combinations of stability

and building height and/or width, the vertical and/or  lateral plume  dimensions

indicated  for  a point  source  by the dispersion curves  at a downwind  distance

of ten building heights  or widths can  exceed the  values  given by  Equation

02-31) or  (2-32) and by Equation (2-36),  (2-37).  Consequently,  the ISC Model


                                      2-39
-------
programs  do  not  permit  the  virtual  distances  xy  and xz  to  be  less ' than




zero.




    It is important  to  note that the use of  a single effective building width




hw  for  all  wind  directions is a  simplification that  is  required  to  enable




the  ISC  Model computer  programs  to operate within the  constraints  imposed on




the  programs  without   sacrificing  other  desired  ISC  Model  features.   The




effective  building  width   hw  affects  oz  for  tall  buildings  (hw  <  hb)




and  ay  for  squat  buildings  (hw  ^  hb)   with  plume  height   to  building




height  ratios  less  than   or  equal  to  1.2.   Tall  buildings typically  have




lengths  and widths  that are equivalent  so  that  the. use  of  one  value of  h,v.




for  all  wind  directions does  not  significantly affect  the accuracy  of  the




calculations.  However,  the use  of one  value of hw  for squat buildings  with




plume height  to building height  ratios  less  than or equal  to 1.2 affects  the




accuracy of  the  calculations near the source  if  the  building length  is large




in  comparison with  the  building width.  For example,  if  the building height




and  width are approximately the  same  and the building length  is  equal to five




building  widths,  the ISC  Model  at a downwind  distance  of  10hb underestimates




the  centerline concentration  or  deposition  by  about  40   percent  for  winds




parallel  to   the  building's  long  side  and  overestimates  the  centerline




concentration  (or deposition) by  about  60 percent  for -finds  normal  to  the




building's  long  side.   Thus, the user  should exercise  caution in interpreting




the   results   of  concentration   (or  deposition)  calculations  for   receptors




located  near  a squat building if  the stack height  to building height  ratio is




less than or  equal to 1.2.




     The   recommended procedure  for  calculating  accurate  concentration  (or




deposition)  values  for  receptors located near  squat  buildings consists of two




phases.   First,  the  appropriate  ISC  Model  program  is  executed  using  the




effective  building  width   hw  derived  from  the  building  length and  width.






                                      2-40
-------
Second, the  ISC  Model  calculations are  repeated for the  receptors near  the




source with  highest  calculated  concentration  (or  deposition)  values  using




receptor-specific values of hw.   For  example, assume that the ISCST program is




used  with a  year  of  sequential  hourly data  to  calculate maximum  24-hour




average concentrations and that the highest calculated concentrations occur at




Receptor  A on  Julian  Day  18  and at  Receptor  B on  Julian  Day 352.   The




cross-wind building width hw  associated  with the  wind  directions  required to




transport emissions to Receptors A and B  may be obtained from  a  scale  drawing




of  the  building.   The  ISCST  program is  then  executed for Receptor A  only on




Day  18  only  using  the  appropriate hw value for  Receptor  A.  Similarly,  the




ISCST  program  is  executed for  Receptor  B  only  on Day  352  only using  the




appropriate h^, value for Receptor B.









    Schulman and Scire Refined Building Downwash Procedures




    The revised procedures  for treating  building wake effects  include  the use




of  the  Schulman and  Scire  downwash method.  The revised  procedures  are used




when either the regulatory  default  option is selected, or  a  negative  value is




input  for building height.   The revised procedures only use the Schulman and




Scire method when the physical stack height is less than hj-, +  0.5 Lg,  where hj-,




is  the building  height  and LJJ is  the  lesser of the building  height or width.




In  regulatory applications, the maximum projected width is  used.   The  features




of  the  Schulman and Scire  method are:   (1)  reduced plume  rise due to initial




plume  dilution,   (2)  enhanced  plume  spread  as  a  linear  function  of  the




effective  plume  height,  and  (3)  specification  of building dimensions  as  a




function  of wind  direction.  The reduced  plume rise equations were previously




described  in Section 2.3.12.
                                      2-41                                12/87
-------
    When  the  Schulman and  Scire method  is  used,  the  ISC dispersion models




specify a linear decay function,  to  be included in the  az's  calculated using




equations 2-31 and  2-32,  as  follows:








    o"z = A c'z                                                        (2-39a)




where  a'2 is  from either  equation  2-31  or 2-32  and  A is  the linear decay




function described  below.




    When this option is chosen,




    A = 1                         if  he <  hb




    A = (hb - he)/2LB +1         if  hb <  he < hb  +  2LB




    A = 0                         if  he >  hb + 2LB




    The effect of the linear decay factor  is illustrated in  Figure  2-3A.




    When  the  Schulman and  Scire  building downwash method  is used  the ISCST




model  requires  direction specific building heights and projected widths  for




the downwash calculations.  The  user inputs the building height and  projected




widths  of the  building  tier  associated  with the  greatest height  of  wake




effects for each ten degrees of  wind direction.    These building heights  and




projected widths are  the  same as are used  for  good engineering  practice  (GEP)




stack  height  calculations.   The user  is  referred   to  the  Guideline   for




Determination   of   Good   Engineering  Practice   Stack   Height    (Technical




Support   Document   for  the   Stack  Heights  Regulations)   (EPA-450/4-80-023,




July  1981)   for  calculating  the appropriate  building  heights  and  projected




widths for  each direction.    Figure  2-3B  shows and example  of a two  tiered




building  with  different  tiers controlling  the  height  that  is  appropriate




for use  for  different wind  directions.   For an  east  or west wind the  lower




tier  defines  the  appropriate height  and  width,  while for  a north  or  south




wind  the upper  tier defines  the appropriate  values  for  height  and  width.








                                     2-41a                               12/87
-------
                                     CD
                                    Z
                                    n
                                                c
                                                >
o -c
o  c,
>-  £
^-  —
K  v.
    V,
u_  —
C
    x.
C "•!

•rt  K
•U  C.
O •"
c -c
 3 —
tL. --
                                                 tr.  LJ
                                                 re  c
                                                  - c
                                                 <  K
                                                 o  a,
                                                 re nr
                                                 fc
                                                  re ^r
                                                  o  a..  >.
                                                  (L —  *-•
                                                 Q  4, .„
                                                    I  C
                                                  lw    -^
                                                  1C ^ —
                                                  &  u  c
                                                  c  re  £

                                                 ^J tr.  en
                                                  2.
2-41b
                                                              l?/37
-------
                   100
    50



10
H«60
Building Tier 41
70
«2 H > 80





                  Height  of wake  effects  is  Hw  =  H  f  I . 5 Lg
                    where Lg is  the  lesser of the height  of  the
                    width.
                  East  and  west wind:

                 «	  Hwi  = 60  -h 1.5(50) =  135
                       HW2  = 80  + l.5( 10) =  95
                  Therefore, the  lower  building tier  //I width  and
                    height
                  (H =  60,  W = 50)  are  used
                      t
      North and South wind:
      HTT, = 60 + 1.5(60) = 150
       W I
      HW2 = 80 + 1.5(70) = 185
      Therefore, the upper building tier #2
        width and height
      (H - 80, W = 70) are used
/
J
X]

4
            tier 2 dominates
                                     tier  1  dominates
N-S wind
                                           E-W wind
     Figure 2-3B
Illustration of a Two Ti«r«d Building with  Different
Tiers Dominating Different Wind Directions
                                       2-41c
-------
    e) Procedures Used to Account for Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion




    The method of Pasguill (1976) is  a  user option to account  for  the initial




dispersion  of  plumes  caused by  turbulent  motion of  the  plume and  turbulent




entrainment  of  ambient  air.    With  this  method  the   effective   vertical




dispersion (oze)  is calculated as follows:
                           Jze
                               = [a,2 + (AH/3.5)2]1/2                   (2-40)
where az is  the  vertical  dispersion due to  ambient turbulence  and AH  is  the




plume  rise  due  to momentum  and/or buoyancy.   The  lateral  plume  spread  is




parameterized using a similar expression:






                          oye = [ay2 + (AH/3.5)2]1/2                   (2-41)






where ay the  lateral  dispersion due to ambient turbulence.   It should be noted




that AH  is  the  transitional  plume height  if  the  receptor is  located between




the  source  and  the distance  to  final  rise,   and  final  plume  rise  if  the




receptor is  located  beyond the  distance  to  final rise.  Thus,  if  the  user




elects to use final plume  rise at all receptors the transitional plume  rise is




used  in  the  calculation  of  buoyancy-induced  dispersion and the  final  plume




rise is used in the concentration equations.
                                     2-41d                               12/87
-------
    2.4.1.2   The  Vertical  Term

    a.   The  Vertical  Term for Gases  and Small Particulates.  In  general,  the

effects on ambient  concentrations of gravitational settling  and  dry deposition

can be neglected for  gaseous  pollutants and small particulates (diameters less

than about 20 micrometers).   The  Vertical Term is  then given by:

                               CO
    V = 0.5[exp[-0.5(H/oz)2]  + J  {exp[-0.5(Hi/o,)2] + exp[-0.5(H2/or)2]}

                             + exp[-0.5(H3/ax)2]  + exp[-0.5(H4/a,:)2}}    (2-42)


where:

    H  = h + Ah

    Hi  = 2iH^- - H - RHT

    H2 = 2iHm + H - RHT

    H3 = 2iHm - H + RHT

    H4 = 2iHm + H + RHT

    RHT = receptor height above ground

    Hm = mixing height

The  infinite  series  term in Equation  (2-42)  accounts  for  the  effects  of the

restriction  on vertical  plume growth at the top of the mixing layer.  As shown

by  Figure  2-4,  the  method  of image  sources  is  used to account  for multiple

reflections  of the plume from the ground surface and at the top of the surface

mixing layer.   It should be noted  that,  if  the  effective  stack height   H

exceeds  the  mixing  height  Hm,  the  plume  is assumed to  remain  elevated and

the ground-level concentration is set equal to zero.

     Equation (2-42)  assumes  that the mixing height in  rural and urban areas  is

known  for all stability  categories.   As explained below,  the meteorological



                                     2-42                                  12/87
-------
         <  A

      x  /\


     «V  \  A     N
     X     x  \     \
—^  V  \  \    \
2Hm+H  \/\    \  \     \

     /\  \    \ \     \
        IMAGE \   \      \   \      \
        PLUME \  \     Nx   \      \
             \   \      \   \   MIXING HEIGHT (Hm)
                               •%
 Ei
    m  /\     /  /      /   /
     '"  \ /   /      /   /
      \x /      /  /
 2Hm+H   Xv)\  //
FIGURE 2-4. The method of multiple plume images used to simulate plume

           in the ISC " ' *
                   2-43
-------
preprocessor  program  uses  mixing  heights  derived  from  twice-dai.ly  mixing




heights  calculated  using  the  Holzworth  (1972)   procedures.    These  mixing




heights are believed  to  be representative, at least on  the  average, of mixing




heights in urban  areas under all  stabilities  and of  mixing heights  in rural




areas  during  periods of  unstable  or neutral stability.  However,  because the




Holzworth minimum mixing  heights  are  intended  to  include  the  heat  island




effect  for  urban areas,   their applicability to rural areas  during  periods of




stable  meteorological   conditions  (E  or   F  stability)   is   questionable.




Consequently, the ISC Model  in the  Rural Mode currently deletes  the infinite




series term in Equation (2-42) for the E and F stability categories.




    The  Vertical  Term  defined  by  Equation  (2-42)  changes  the  form  of  the




vertical  concentration  distribution from Gaussian  to  rectangular  (uniform




concentration within the  surface  mixing  layer)   at  long downwind  distances.




Consequently,  in  order  to  reduce  computational  time  without  a  loss  of




accuracy. Equation (2-19) is changed to the form:






                    X = KQD(2TT)-lX2(uayHm)*1  exp[-0.5(y/ay) 2 ]             (2-43)
at  downwind  distances  where  the  az/Hm  ratio  is  greater than  or  equal  to




1.6.  K is defined in Equation (2-19), and D is defined in Equation  (2-20).




    The   meteorological   preprocessor   program,   RAMMET,   used   by  the  ISC




short-term model  uses  an interpolation scheme to  assign hourly rural or urban




mixing heights  on the basis of  the  early morning and afternoon mixing heights




calculated  using  the  Holzworth  (1972)  procedures.   The   procedures used  to




interpolate  hourly mixing heights in urban and  rural areas are illustrated in




Figure 2-5,  where:









          Hm{max}   = maximum mixing height on a given  day




          Hm{min}   = minimum mixing height on a given  day






                                      2- 44
-------



K-
LJJ
X
o
X
2


DAY,.,
(Neutral)^-
^ I
^" 1
1
(Stable)
/
/
_ 	 J
HJ{mln}
1 . ,
\ ~~-»~.
\
(Stable)
\
t
\
, \
moxj \
\
\
\
\
\


(Neutral) DAY|
"""** ""^ .«»
(
1
/Hm
(Stable)
i
T""
Hj,{min}
1 , ,
_^^^_^
i \ **"^»
\
(Stable)
\
{max} \
\


1 i

DAY,*,

-^.(Neutral)
•^^ (Neutral)
/
_ 	 s Hm
(Stable)

1 1 1
MH»r^
(Stable)
maxf
, j

i
       MN   SR     1400 SS   MN   SR   I4OO  SS   MN   SR     1400 SS   MN
                                      TIME (LST)
                              (a) Urban Mixing Heights

HEIGHT
o
X
3

M
•
/
/
/
/
/ H
/
(Stable)
/
/
— -i_i
I 	 ,

maxj



. j
•i
— *^_^ (Neutral)
/
/
j
(Stable)
/
/ i
vw-* • •
f~^^^
^*x
maxj




i
•*"• 1*1
^"^^.^.(Neutral)
/
j
(Stable)
/ Hm
/ i
-^-"^



maxj
i (







N SR 1400 SS MN SR 1400 SS MN SR I40O SS MN
TIME (LST)
(b) Rural Mixing Heights
FIGURE 2-5.  Schematic illustration of (a) urban and  (b) rural mixing height
            interpolation procedures.
                                     2-45
-------
              MN  = midnight

              SR  = sunrise

              SS  = sunset


The interpolation procedures are  functions  of the  stability  category for  the

hour  before   sunrise.   If  the  hour  before  sunrise  is neutral,  the  mixing

heights  that  apply  are  indicated  by  the  dashed  lines  labeled  neutral  in

Figure 2-5.    If  the  hour  before  sunset is  stable,   the  mixing heights  that

apply are indicated by the dashed lines  labeled stable.  It should  be pointed

out that there  is  a discontinuity in  the rural  mixing height  at sunrise if the

preceding hour  is  stable.   As  explained above,  because of the  uncertainties

about  the  applicability of  Holzworth  mixing  heights  to  rural  areas  during

periods  of  E  and  F stability, the ISC  Model  in the Rural  Mode ignores  the

interpolated  mixing  heights  for  E and  F stabilities and effectively sets the

mixing height  equal to a very high value.



    b.   The   Vertical  Term  in  Elevated  Terrain.  The ISC  Model  makes  the

following assumption about  plume behavior in elevated terrain:


    •  The  plume axis  remains at the   plume stabilization  height  above
       mean sea level as it passes over  elevated or depressed terrain.

    •  The mixing height is terrain following.

    •  The wind speed is  a function of height above  the surface  (see
       Equation  (2-1)).


Thus,  a modified  plume  stabilization  height  H'  is  substituted  for  the

effective stack height H in the  Vertical term  given  by Equation (2-42).   For

example, the  effective plume stabilization height at the point (X, Y) is given

by:


                     H1  =  H + z, -  z - RHT                             (2-44)


                                      2-46                                  12/87
-------
where:




    zs  = height above mean sea level of the base of the stack




     z  = height above mean sea level of terrain at the receptor




    RHT = height of the receptor above local terrain height (z)






It  should  also be  noted  that,  as recommended  by  EPA,  the  ISC model  now




"truncates" terrain at  stack  height  as  follows:   if  the  terrain height  (z  -




zt) exceeds  stack  height,  h,  for a  stack  or emission height, H, for  a volume




source  (see  Section 2.4.2),  the elevation  of  the  receptor is  automatically




reduced  to  .005  meters below  the  stack  height  (emission height  for volume




source).  The user  is  cautioned that concentrations  at these  complex terrain




receptors are subject  to  considerable uncertainty.  Figure 2-6 illustrates the




terrain-adjustment procedures used by the ISC Model.








    c.   The  Vertical  Term   for  Large  Particulates.    The   dispersion  of




particulates  or droplets  with  significant  gravitational  settling velocities




differs  from that of  gaseous pollutants  and  small particulates  in  that  the




larger  particulates  are brought  to  the surface  by the  combined processes of




atmospheric  turbulence  and  gravitational  settling.   Additionally,  gaseous




pollutants and  small  particulates tend to be reflected from the surface, while




larger particulates that come in contact with the  surface  may be completely or



partially  retained at  the surface.   The  ISC  Model  Vertical  Term  for large




particulates  includes  the effects  of  both gravitational settling   and  dry




deposition.   Gravitational settling  is assumed to  result in a tilted plume




with  the plume axis  inclined to  the horizontal  at  an angle  give by arctan




(Vg/u)  where  V,   is  the  gravitational settling  velocity.  A user-specified




fraction  y of  the  material that  reaches  the ground  surface  by the  combined




processes  of gravitational settling  and atmospheric  turbulence  is assumed to




be  reflected  from  the   surface.   Figure  2-7   illustrates   the  vertical




                                      2-47              .                   12/87
-------
                                                            OJ
                                                            -o
                                                            o
                                                            0)
                                                            OJ
                                                            E

                                                            1/1
                                                            c/i
                                                            to

                                                            c

                                                            03



                                                            OJ
                                                            X
                                                            ai

                                                            "a.

                                                            o
                                                            o
                                                             (O
                                                            J=
                                                             ai
                                                             QJ
                                                             CL


                                                            >4-

                                                             O



                                                             O
                                                             I
                                                            CM

                                                             cu
                                                             s_
                                                             3
                                                             cn

                                                            u.
2-48
-------
                               o
                            o
                            a:
                            t-
                            z
                            UJ
UJ

\L
o
cc
a.
UJ
o

o
o
                                            cc
                                            UJ
o


§

UJ
CC
o

 •*

o


u-i

O


en
4-1
C
0)
                        OJ
                        o
                        u

                        c
                        o
                                                                   CJ

                                                                   0)
1H9I3H
                                            CO
                        o
                        t-i
                        ex
                                                                   c
                                                                   o
                                                                   c
                                                                   ai
                                                                   u
                                                                   c
                                                                   o
                                                                   u
                                                                   1-4


                                                                   0)
                                                                   C
                                                                   O
                                                                   w  o
                                                                   J-l   •
                                                                   tn  —
                                                                   3
                                                                   i-l  TD
                                                                   ^  C
                                                                   M  CO
                                                                   I
                                                                   CN
                                                                   w
                                                                   Bd
                                                                   3
                                                                   a
                    2-49
-------
concentration profiles  for  complete reflection  from the  surface  (y  equal  to

unity),  50-percent reflection from  the  surface (y equal  to  0.5) and  complete

retention at the surface (y  equal  to zero).

    For  a  given  particulate  source,   the  user  must  subdivide   the  total

particulate emissions  into  N settling-velocity  categories (the maximum value

of N  is 20).   The  ground-level  concentration of  particulates with  settling

velocity  Vsn  is given  by Equation  (2-19)  with the  Vertical  Term  defined  as

(Dumbauld and Bjorklund, 1975):
                      V =0.5  4>n  [I  (A, + A2)  +  I  ]               (2-45)
                                i=0           i=l
where:
    <|)n     = mass  fraction of  particulates  in  the  nth   settling  -  velocity
             category

    A,     = Yi exp [-0.5 <(H, + Hv)/oz)2]

    A2     = Yn+1 exp [-0.5 «H2 - Hv)/oz)2]

    A3     = yn exp [-0.5«H4 - Hv)/az)2]

    A4     = Yn~l exp [-0.5{(H3 + H
    yn     = reflection  coefficient for  particulates  in the  nth  settling -
             velocity category (Set equal to unity for complete reflection)

    Hv     = Vsn x/u

    Vin    = settling  velocity   of  particulates   in  the  nth   settling
             velocity category


 HI  through  H4  were  defined  previously  for  equation  (2-42).   The  total

 concentration  is  computed  by  the program  by  summing  over  the   N settling-

 velocity  categories.   The optional algorithm  used  to calculate dry deposition

 is  discussed in Section 2.4.3.

    Use  of Equation  (2-45)  requires a knowledge of both the particulate  size

 •distribution and  the  density of the particulates emitted by each  source.   The

                                     2-50                                 12/87
-------
total particulate emissions  for  each source are subdivided by  the  user into a




maximum of 20 categories and the gravitational settling velocity  is calculated




for the mass-mean diameter  of each category.  The mass-mean  diameter is given




by:






    d = [0.25 (d23 + di2d2 + dtdz2 + di3)]1/3                            (2-46)






where  di   and  dz  are  the  lower  and  upper  bounds  of  the  particle-size




category.    McDonald   (1960)  gives   simple  techniques  for  calculating  the




gravitational  settling   velocity  for   all   sizes   of   particulates.    For




particulates with  a density  on  the order  of 1 gram per  cubic centimeter and




diameters less than about 80 micrometers, the settling velocity is given by:
                                  V5  =  2pgr2/9p                           (2-47)
where:
    Vs    =  settling velocity (cm • sec ')




    p     =  particle density (gm • cm"3)




    g     =  acceleration due to gravity (980 cm • sec"2)




    r     =  particle radius (cm)




    u     =  absolute viscosity of air (u ~ 1.83 x 10~4 gm • cm"1 • sec"1)






It should be noted that the settling velocity calculated using  Equation (2-47)




must be  converted  by the user from centimeters per second to meters per second




for use  in the model calculations.




    The  reflection  coefficient   jn  can be  estimated  for  each  particle-size




category using  Figure   2-8  and  the ' settling  velocity  calculated  for  the




mass-mean diameter.   If  it  is desired to  include  the  effects of gravitational




settling in  calculating  ambient  particulate concentrations  while at  the same




time  excluding  the  effects  of  deposition, y^ should  be  set  equal  to unity




for all  settling velocities.  On the other hand, if it  is 'desired to calculate
                                      2-51
-------
   0.30
           i.i  i   i   i   i   i   II   i	
                   0.2         0.4        0.6
                       REFLECTION COEFFICIENT
FIGURE 2-8.  Relationship between- the gravitational settling velocity V
            and the reflection  coefficient Yn suggested  by Dumbauld,
            et al. ( 1976).
                              2-52
-------
maximum  possible  deposition,  y^   should  be  set  equal  to  zero  for  all




settling velocities.   The effects  of dry deposition for gaseous  pollutants  may




be  estimated  by setting  the  settling velocity  Vsn equal  to  zero and  the




reflection  coefficient  y^  equal  to  the  amount  of  material  assumed  to  be




reflected from the surface.   For  example,  if 20 percent  of a gaseous pollutant




that  reaches  the  surface  is  assumed  to  be  retained  at  the  surface   by




vegetation uptake or other mechanisms, Yn is equal to 0.8.




    The  derivation of Equation  (2-45)  assumes  that the  terrain  is flat  or




gently  rolling.   Consequently,  the  gravitational  settling and  dry deposition




options  cannot ' be  used  for  sources  located  in  complex  terrain  without




violating  mass  continuity.   However,  the effects  of  gravitational  settling




alone  can be  estimated for  sources  located in  complex  terrain  by  setting




Yn  equal  to  unity  for  each  settling  velocity category.   This  procedure




will  tend to overestimate  concentrations, especially at  the longer  downwind




distances, because it neglects the effects of dry deposition.




    It   should   be   noted  that   Equation   (2-45)   assumes   that  az   is  a




continuous  function   of downwind  distance.   Also,  Equation  (2-45)  does  not




simplify  for  af/Hm   greater  than  1.6  as  does  Equation (2-42).   As  shown




by  Table  2-8,  oz  for the  very  unstable  A  stability  category attains  a




maximum  value  of 5,000  meters  at  3.11 kilometers.   Because Equation  (2-45)




requires  that  oz  be a continuous  function of  distance," the  coefficients  a




and b given  in Table 2-8 for A stability and  the  0.51- to  3.11-kilometer range




are   used  by   the   ISC  Model   in  calculations  beyond   3.11  kilometers.




Consequently, this introduces uncertainties in the  results of the calculations




beyond 3.11  kilometers for A stability.
                                     2-53                                  12/87
-------
    2.4.2  Area, Volume and Line Source Emissions




    2.4.2.1  General




    The area and  volume  sources options of the  ISC  Model  are used to simulate




the  effects  of  emissions  from  a  wide  variety of  industrial  sources.   In




general, the ISC  area  source model is used to simulate the effects of fugitive




emissions from  sources  such  as storage piles and slag  dumps.   The  ISC  volume




source model is used  to simulate the effects of emissions  from sources such as




building roof monitors and line  sources (for example, conveyor belts  and rail




lines).









    2.4.2.2  The Short-Term Area Source Model




    The ISC area source model  is  based or. the equation for  a  finite crosswind




line  source.    Individual   area  sources  are  required  to   have   the  same




north-south  and east-west  dimensions.   However, as  shown by Figure  2-9.  the




effects of an  area source  with an irregular shape can be simulated by dividing




the  area  source  into  multiple squares  that  approximate  the  geometry  of  the




area  source.   Note that the size of  the  individual  area sources in Figure 2-9




varies;  the  only  requirement  is that  each area source must  be  square.   The




ground-level concentration at downwind distance x  (measured from the downwind




edge  of the area  source) and crosswind distance  / is given by:






                         X = KQAx0DVE (2TT)-1/2  (uo,)-1                    (2-48)




where:




    V   =  vertical term




    D   =  decay term




    E   =   erf [(0.5 x'o  +  y>(2'1/2  o^1)]  + erf [(0.5x'0  -  y) 2'1/2 a^1]




    QA.   =  area  source emission rate (mass per  unit  area  per unit time)




     x0   =   length of the  side of the area  source (m)
                                      2-54
-------
                              • 9
                                                          •10
                                                          • II
FIGURE 2-9.  Representation of an irregularly shaped area source by  11
             square area sources.
                                      2-55
-------
    x'o  =  effective crosswind width = 2x0(tr)~1/2  (m)




    K    =  units scaling coefficient (Equation (2-19))






and the Vertical Term  is given by Equation  (2-42)  or  Equation (2-45)  with the




effective emission height H assigned by the user.   In general, H should  be set




equal  to  the  physical  height  of  the  source  of  fugitive  emissions.   For




example, the  emission  height  H of a slag  dump is  the  physical  height  of the




slag dump.   A vertical  virtual  distance,  given  by x0  in kilometers,  is added




to  the actual downwind  distance x  for  the  ox  calculations.   If a  receptor




is  located within  x'0/2 plus  1  meter  of  the  center of  an area source,  a




warning  message  is printed  and  no  concentrations are  calculated  for  the




source-receptor combination.  However, program execution is not terminated.




    It  is  recommended that,  if the  separation  between an  area  source  and  a




receptor  is  less  than  the  side  of the  area source  x0,  the area  source be




subdivided  into smaller area  sources.   If  the  source-receptor separation is




less   than  x0,  the   ISC  Model   tends   to  overpredict   the   area   source




concentration.   The degree  of overproduction  is a  function of  stability, the




orientation  of  the  receptor with  respect  to the area source and the mean  wind




direction.   However,  the degree of overprediction near the  area  source  rarely



exceeds 30  percent.








    2.4.2.3   The Short-Term Volume Source  Model




    Equation (2-19)  is  also  used  to  calculate   concentrations  produced by




volume-source emissions.  If  the  volume  source is  elevated,  the  user  assigns




the emission  height H.   The  user  also  assigns  initial  lateral   (oyo) and




vertical   (CTIO)   dimensions   for   the   volume   source.    Lateral   (xy)  and




vertical  (xz) virtual distances  are added  to the actual downwind  distance  x




.for  the   cy  and   oz   calculations.   The  virtual  distances  are  calculated




from solutions to  the  sigma equations  as  is  done for point sources.




                                      2-56                                  12/87
-------
    The volume source model  is  used to simulate the  effects  of emissions from




sources such as building roof monitors and line sources  (for  example,  conveyor




belts  and  rail lines).   As  with  the  area source  model,  the  north-south  and




east-west dimensions  of  each  volume  source  used  in  the  model  must  be  the




same.  Table  2-12 summarizes the  general procedures  suggested for estimating




initial  lateral  (ayo)   and  vertical  (azo)   dimensions  for   single   volume




sources and  for multiple volume sources  used to represent a line  source.   In




the case of a  long and  narrow- line source such as  a  rail  line, it may  not be




practical to  divide  the source  into N volume  sources,  where  N  is  given by the




length  of  the  line  source  divided  by  its  width.   The  user   can obtain  an




approximate  representation  of the  line  source by placing a  smaller  number of




volume  sources  at equal  intervals along  the  line  source.   In general,  the




spacing between individual volume  sources should not  be greater than twice the




width of the line source.  However, a  larger  spacing  can be used  if  the ratio




of  the  minimum source-receptor  separation and the spacing between individual




volume sources is greater than about 3.  In these cases, concentrations  at  the




nearest  receptors may   be  underestimated  by  10   to   15  percent.   At  longer




downwind  distances,   concentrations  calculated  using  fewer  than  N  volume




sources to  represent  the line source converge to the  concentrations calculated




using  N volume sources  to  represent  the  line  source  as  long as  sufficient




volume sources are used to preserve the horizontal geometry of the  line source.




    Figure  2-10  illustrates  representations  of  a   curved  line  source  by




multiple volume sources.  Emissions from a line source or narrow volume source




represented   by   multiple volume   sources  are  divided  equally  among  the




individual  sources  unless  there  is  a known  spatial  variation in emissions.




Setting   the   initial   lateral   dimension   ayo    equal   to   W/2.15   in




Figure 2-10(a)  or 2W/2.15  in Figure  2-10(b)  results  in  overlapping  Gaussian




distributions for the individual sources.   If the wind direction  is  normal to






                                      2-57
-------
                                 TABLE 2-12

               SUMMARY OF SUGGESTED PROCEDURES FOR ESTIMATING
                    INITIAL LATERAL DIMENSIONS (ayo)  AND
        INITIAL VERTICAL  DIMENSIONS  (,O20> FOR  VOLUME AND LINE SOURCES
                                            Procedure for Obtaining
          Type of Source                       Initial Dimension


                    (a)  Initial Lateral Dimensions  (ayo)


Single Volume Source                   ayo     = length of  side divided  by
                                                 4.3

Line Source Represented by Adjacent    oyo     = length  of  side divided  by
  Volume Sources (see Figure 2-10(a))             2.15

Line Source Represented by Separated   ayo     = center  to  center  distance
  Volume Sources (see Figure 2-10(b))             divided oy 2.15
                  (b)  Initial Vertical Dimensions (azo)
Surface-Based Source (H~0)             ozo     = vertical    dimension    of
                                                 source divided by 2.15

Elevated Source (H>0) on or Adjacent   0ZO     = building height  divided, by
  to a Building                                  2.15

Elevated Source (H>0) not on or        azo     = vertical    dimension    of
  Adjacent to a Building                         source divided by 4.3
                                    2-58
-------
                              2.15
                   f
                  w
                                                   10
                                                  •9
                                                  •8
                                                  •7
                      (a)  EXACT REPRESENTATION
                   t
                  w
                           2W
                       1
                                                  •5
                                                  •4
                    —W—



                      (b)  APPROXIMATE REPRESENTATION
FIGURE 2-10.  Exact and approximate representations of a line source by

            multiple volume  sources.
                               2-59
-------
a straight  line source  that  is represented  by multiple  volume  sources,  the




initial crosswind concentration distribution  is uniform except at the edges of




the  line   source.   The  doubling  of  ayo  by  the  user  in  the  approximate




line-source  representation  in Figure  2-10(b)  is offset  by the  fact  that  the




emission rates for the individual  volume sources are also doubled by the user.




    There  are  two types of volume sources:  surface-based  sources,  which  may




also  be  modeled  as   area  sources,  and elevated  sources.   An   example  of  a




surface-based'source  is  a  surface  rail line.   The  effective emission height H




for a  surface-based  source is  usually set  equal  to zero.  An  example  of an




elevated source  is  an elevated rail  line with an  effective emission height H




set equal to the height of the rail line.









    2.4.3  The ISC Short-Term Dr^ Degpsition Model




    2.4.3.1  General




    The Industrial Source  Complex  short- term dry deposition model  is based on




the  Dumbauld,  et  al.   (1976)  deposition  model.   This  model,  which  is  an




advanced version of the Cramer, et al.  (1972) deposition  model,  assumes that a




user-specified  fraction  y^.  of  the  material  that  comes  into  contact  with




the  ground surface by  the combined  processes   of  atmospheric  turbulence  and




gravitational  settling  is  reflected from the surface (see Section 2.4.1.2.C).




The  reflection  coefficient  ^n,   which  is  a  function  of settling   velocity




and  the  ground surface for particulates  and  of the ground surface for gaseous




pollutants,  is  analogous in purpose to the  deposition  velocity  used in other




deposition models.    The Cramer,  et al.  (1972) deposition model  has closely




matched  ground-level deposition  patterns  for   droplets  with  diameters  above




about  30  micrometers,  whilia  the more  generalized Dumbauld,  et  al.  (1976)




deposition model has  closaly matched  observed  deposition patterns  for  both




 large  and  small  droplets.






                                       2-60
-------
    Section 2. 4.1. 2. c  discusses  the selection  of  the  reflection  coefficient




Yn  as  well  as   the   computation  of  the  gravitational  settling  velocity




Vsn.  The ISC dry  deposition model  should  not  be  applied to sources  located




in  elevated  terrain or for  receptors  above local terrain.  Also,  as  noted in




Section 2.4.1.2.C,  uncertainties  in the deposition calculations are likely for




the  A  stability  category  if  deposition  calculations  are  made  at  downwind




distances greater than  3.11  kilometers.   Deposition and ambient  concentration




calculations cannot  be made  in  a  single program execution.   In  an individual




computer  run,  the   ISC  Model  calculates  either  concentration (including  the




effects of gravitational settling and dry deposition) or dry deposition.









    2.4.3.2  Stack and Volume Source Emissions




    Deposition  for  particulates  in  the  nth  settling-velocity  category  or  a




gaseous   pollutant   with  zero   settling  velocity  Vsn   and   a   reflection




coefficient YH is given by:






    DEP = K QT VdD (1-Yn)  4>n  (ZtroyC.xr1 exp [-0.5(y/ay ) 2 ]                (2-49)




where the Vertical Term is defined as follows:
                                                       00
    Vd  = [bH + (1 - b) Hv] exp [-0.5((H - HvJ/a*)2] + I (BiB2 + B3B4)
                    - (1-b) Hv]




    B2  = exp [-0.5((H, + Hv)/oz)2]




    83  = Y1 [b H2 + (1-b) Hv]




    B«  = exp [-0.5 ((H2 - Hv)/o,)2]






K,  D, Hv/  Hi,  and  H2  were  defined  previously  (Equations  (2-19),  (2-20),




(2-40),  and  (2-43)).    The  parameter  QT  is  the  total  amount  of  material




emitted  during  the  time  period  T  for which  the  deposition  calculation  is




made.   For  example,   QT   is  the  total amount  of  material  emitted  during a






                                     2-61                                 12/87
-------
1-hour period if an hourly  deposition is calculated.  For  time  periods longer




than an  hour,  the program  sums  the  deposition calculated  for  each hour  to




obtain the  total  deposition.   The  coefficient  b  is  the average value  of the




exponent b  for the interval  between the  source  and  the  downwind  distance  x




(see  Tables  2-7 to 2-10).   Values of  b exist for  both the  Pasguill-Gifford




dispersion coefficients  and Briggs-McElroy-Pooler curves.   In the  case  of  a




volume source,  the  user must specify the  effective  emission height  H  and the




initial source dimensions ayo  and aI0.









    2.4.3.3  Area Source Emissions




    For area source emissions  Eguation (2-49) is changed to the form:






                  DEPn = KQA-  VdDE :-:0 (1-Y<-.) 4>n(2-rr)"lxI (a: :•:)"''         (2-50)
K,  D,  and  Vd are  defined  in  eguations 2-19,  2-20,  and  2-49,  respectively.




The  parameter QA«-  is the  total  mass  per  unit area  emitted  over  the  time




period  T  for which  deposition  is calculated  and E  is  the  error function




terms defined in eguation (2-48).








2.5 The ISC Long-Term Dispersion Model Equations




    2.5.1  Stack Emissions




    The  ISC  long-term concentration model makes  the  same  basic  assumption as




the  short-term  model.   In  the  long-term  model,  the  area  surrounding   a




continuous source of pollutants is divided into  sectors of  equal angular width




corresponding  to  the   sectors   of   the   seasonal   and  annual   frequency




distributions of  wind direction, wind speed,  and stability  (see  Figure 2-1).




Seasonal or  annual  emissions from the source are partitioned among  the  sectors




according  to the  frequencies  of  wind  blowing  toward  the  sectors.   The




concentration fields  calculated for  each  source  are  translated  to a common






                                     2-62                                 12/87
-------
coordinate system  (either polar  or Cartesian  as  specified by  the user)  and

summed to obtain the  total due  to  all  sources.

    For a single  stack,  the  mean  seasonal concentration at  a  point (r >  1  m,

G) with respect to the stack  is given  by:
              X* = 2K (2ir)-1/2 (rAGT1   J  QfSVDdio,)'1            (2-51)
where

               Q =   pollutant  emission  rate  (mass  per  unit  time),  for  the
                          wind-:
                         season
                     ith  wind-speed  category,  kth  stability   category  and
               f =   frequency of  occurrence of  the  ith wind-speed  category,
                     j'h   wind-direction    category    and    klh    stability
                     category for the ^th season

             A6 '  =   the sector width in radians

               S =   a  smoothing  function  similar  to  that  of  the  AQDM  (see
                     Section 2.5.1.3)

               u =   mean wind speed  (m/sec)  at  stack height  for  the  ith
                     wind-speed category and klh stability category

              az =   standard   deviation   of   the   vertical   concentration
                     distribution (m) for the kth stability category

               V =   the  Vertical  Term  for  the  ith   wind-speed  category,
                     kth stability category and ^th season

               D =   the  Decay  Term  for  the  ith wind speed  category  and
                     kth stability category

               y =   the decay coefficient (sec"1)

               K =   units scaling coefficient


The  mean annual  concentration at  the  point  (r,6)   is  calculated  from  the

seasonal concentrations using the expression:


                                           4
                                 Xa = 0.25 I Xi                          (2-52)
                                          /=!
                                     2-63                                 12/87
-------
    The  terms  in  Equation  (2-51)   correspond  to  the  terms  discussed  in




Section 2.4.1 for the  short-term  model  except that the  parameters  are  defined




for discrete  categories  of wind-speed,  wind-direction,  stability  and  season.




The various  terms  are briefly  discussed  in the  following subsections.   In




addition to  stack emissions, the  ISC long-term  concentration  model  considers




emissions from area and volume  sources.   These model options are  discussed in




Section  2.5.2.   The  optional  algorithms  for  calculating dry  deposition are




discussed in Section 2.5.3.









    2.5.1.1  The Dispersion Coefficients




    a.   Point Source  Dispersion Coefficients.   See Section  2.4.1.1.a  for  a




discussion of the  procedures  used to calculate the  standard deviation  of the




vertical  concentration distribution oz  for  point  sources (sources  without




initial dimensions).









    b.   Downwind  and  Crosswind  Distances.   See  the  discussion  given  in




Section 2.4.1.1.b.








    c.   Vertical  Virtual   Distances.   See Section  2.4.1.1.C for a discussion




of  the procedures used to calculate  vertical virtual distances.   The  lateral




virtual distance  is given  by:









                           xy   =   r0 cot (Ae'/2)                         (2-53)






where r0 is  the  effective  source   radius.   For  volume sources  (see  Section




2.5.2),   the  program  sets   r0  equal   to  2.15   cryo,   where  oyo  is  the




initial  lateral  dimension.  For area sources  (see Section 2.5.2), the program




sets   r0  equal  to  x0/ir   where  x0  is  the  length  of  the side   of the  area




source.   For plumes  affected  by building  wakes   (see Section  2.4.1.1.d), the




                                      2-64
-------
program  sets   r0   equal   to   2.15  ay'   where   ay'   is   given  for   squat




buildings by Equation  (2-36),  (2-37),  or (2-38) for downwind distances between




3 and   10  building  heights  and for  tall  buildings by  Equation (2-39)  for




downwind distances  between 3  and  10 building  widths.   At  downwind  distances




greater  than 10  building  heights  for  Equation   (2-36),   (2-37),  or  (2-38),




ay'   is  held   constant   at  the  value  of  ay'   calculated  at  a  downwind




distance of 10 building  heights.    Similarly,  at  downwind  distances  greater




than  10 building  widths  for  Equation  (2-39),  ay'  is held constant  at  the




value of oy' calculated at a downwind distance of 10 building widths.









    d.   Procedures Used  to Account  for	the  Jlffect.s_ of  Building  Wakes  on




Effluent Dispersion.   With the  exception  of the  equations  used  to  calculate




the lateral virtual  distance,  the procedures used  to account for  the effects




of building wake  effects on effluent dispersion are  the same as those outlined




in  Section 2.4.1.1.d  for the short-term  model.    The  calculation of lateral




virtual  distances by  the  long-term model  is  discussed  in Section  2.5.1.1.C




above.








    e.   Procedures  Used  to _Account  for Buoyancy-Induced  Dispersion.   See  the




discussion given in Section 2.4.1.I.e.








    2.5.1.2 The Vertical  Term




    a.   The Vertical   Term  for Gases and  Small Particulates.   Except for  the




use  of  seasons  and  discrete  categories  of  wind-speed  and  stability,  the




Vertical  Term  for gases  and small  particulates  corresponds  to  the  short term




version discussed in  Section 2.4.1.2.  The  user  may assign a  separate  mixing




height  Hm  to each  combination of  wind-speed and  stability  category for each




 season.






                                      2-65
-------
    As with the short-term model,  the Vertical  Term is  changed to the .form:
                                        2
                             V =  (2TT)1XZ az/(2 Hm)                       (2-54)


at  downwind  distances  where  the  az/Hm  ratio  is greater  than  or  equal  to

1.6.  Additionally, the ground-level concentration is  set equal to zero  if  the

effective  stack height  H  exceeds  the mixing   height  Hm.    As  explained  in

Section  2.2.1.2,  ISCLT in  the  Rural  Mode currently  sets  the  mixing  height

equal to'a very large value for the E and F stability  categories.



    b.  The Vertical Term in Elevated Terrain.   See Section 2.4.1.2.b.



    c.   The Vertical  Term  for  Large Particulates.  Section 2.4.1.2.c  discusses

the differences in  the  dispersion of large particulates and the  dispersion of

gases and  small particulates and provides guidance on  the  use of this option.

The Vertical Term for large particulates is given by Equation (2-45).



    2.5.1.3  The Smoothing Function

    As  shown by  Equation  (2-51),  the rectangular concentration  distribution

within  a given  angular sector  is modified by  the function S{9} which smooths

discontinuities  in  the  concentration at  the  boundaries of adjacent  sectors.

The  centerline  concentration  in each  sector  is unaffected  by  contributions

from  adjacent  sectors.   At points off the sector centerline, the concentration

is  a  weighted function  of  the  concentration  at  the  centerline  and  the

concentration   at   the  centerline  of  the  nearest  adjoining  sector.   The

smoothing  function  is given by:


                     S = (Ae'-|9'j  - 6'  |)/A9' for  |6'j  - 9'| < A9'
                         or                              -                (2-55)
                       =0                     for  |9'j  - 6'|  > A9'


where
                                       2-66
-------
    6'    = the  angle  measured  in  radians  from north  to  the  centerline  of
     J      the jlh  wind-direction sector

    6'    = the  angle  measured  in radians  from north  to  the  receptor  point
           (r,6)
    2.5.2  Area,  Volume and Line Source Emissions

    2.5.2.1  General

    As explained in Section 2.4.2.1,  the ISC Model area and volume  sources are

used  to  simulate the  effects  of emissions  from a wide variety  of industrial

sources.   Section  2.4.2.2  provides  guidance on  the  use  of  the  area  source

model and  Section  2.4.2.3  provides  guidance on  the use of  the  volume source

model.  The volume  source  model is  also  used to  simulate  line  sources.   The

following subsections  give the  area and volume  source equations  used by the

long-term model.




    2.5.2.2  The Long-Term Area Source Model

    The  seasonal average  concentration at  the  point (r,6)  with  respect  to

the center of an area source is given by the expression:


    Xi   = 2K x02(2ir)-1/2 (RAO1)-1   J  QAfSVD (uoz)''                    (2-56)
where
    R    =  radial  distance  from the  lateral  virtual  point  source  to  the
            receptor
                           2"2
         =  [
-------
    y    =  lateral distance from the cloud axis to the receptor




    xy   =  lateral virtual distance (see Equation (2-53))




    K    =  units scaling coefficient (see Equation (2-19))




    S    =  smoothing term (see Equation (2-55))






The vertical terms  V for  gaseous  pollutants and  small  particulates,  and  for




cases with settling  and  dry deposition, are given  in  Section 2.4.1.2 with the




emission height H defined by the user.









    2.5.2.3  The Long-Term Volume Source Model




    Equation  (2-51)  is  also used  to  calculate seasonal average  ground-level




concentrations  for  volume   sources.   The  user  must  assign   initial  lateral




(ayo)   and    vertical    (ozo)    dimensions   and   the   effective   emission




height H.  A discussion of the application of the volume source model is given




in Section 2.4.2.3.









    2.5.3  The ISC Long-Term Dry Deposition Model




    2.5.3.1  General




    The  concepts upon which the ISC long-term dry deposition  model are based




are discussed  in Sections 2.4.1.2.c and 2.4.3.1.








    2.5.3.2  Stack and Volume Source Emissions




    The  seasonal deposition at  the point (r,9) with  respect to the base of  a




stack or  the  center   of   a  volume   source   for   particulates  in  the  nth




settling-velocity  category or a gaseous  pollutant  with zero settling velocity




Vsn and a  reflection coefficient yn  is  given by:






    DEP4,n = K (1  -  Yn)  n(2ir)-1/2  (r2  AS')'1 J  (QTfSVaC(oz)'l            (2-57)
                                       2-68
-------
where the vertical  term for  deposition,  Vd,  was  defined in Section  2.4.3.2.

K  and  D are  described in  Equations  (2-19) and  (2-20),  respectively.  QT  is

the  product  of  the  total  time  during  the  ^th  season,   of  the  seasonal

emission  rate Q  for  the  ith  wind-speed  category,  kth stability  category.

For example, if the emission rate is in grams  per second and there are  92  days

in  the  summer  season  (June,  July,  and August),  QT,n=3 is given  by  7.95  x

10s  Qi = 3.   It  should be  noted  that the  user  need  not  vary  the  emission

rate by season or  by wind speed  and  stability.   If an annual average emission

rate  is  assumed,  QT  is  equal  to  3.15  xlO7  Q  for  a 365-day  year.   For  a

plume  comprised  of   N  settling  velocity  categories,   the  total  seasonal

deposition is obtained by summing Equation  (2-57)  over  the N  settling-velocity

categories.    The  program also  sums the  seasonal  deposition  values  to obtain

the annual deposition.



    2.5.3.3  Area Source Emissions

    With  slight  modifications,   Equation  (2-57)  is  applied  to area  source

emissions.   The  user  assigns  the  effective   emiss-ion heigl  .  H and  Equation

(2-57) is changed to:


    DEPz.n = K (1-Yn) 4>n x2 (2irr1/2  (R2 A9T1  I  (Q^ fSVdD/az)      (2-58)
where
                 w =   the  product  of  the  total  time  during  the  £th  season
                       and  the  emission  rate  per  unit  area  for  the  ith
                       wind-speed category and kth stability category

                 K =   units scaling coefficient (Equation (2-19))

                 D =   decay coefficient (Equation (2-20))
                                      2-69
-------
2.6 Example Problem




    2.6.1  Description of a Hypothetical Potash Processing Plant




    Figure 2-11 shows the plant  layout  and side view of  a  hypothetical  potash




processing plant.  Sylvinite ore  is  brought to the surface from an underground




mine by  a hoist  and dumped on  the  ore  storage  pile.    The  ore then  travels




along an  inclined conveyor belt  to  the ore processing building where  the ore




is  crushed and screened.   Fugitive  particulate emissions  resulting from the




crushing  and  screening  processes  are  discharged  horizontally  at  ambient




temperature  from  a  roof  monitor  extending the  length  of  the  ore  processing




building.  The ore  is then refined by  froth  flotation  and sent to the dryers.




Particulate  emissions produced by the  drying  process  are  discharged from  a




50-meter  stack,  located adjacent  to the ore processing  building,  which  has  a




height of 25 meters.









    2.6.2  Example ISCST Problem




    Table  2-13 gives the emissions data for the hypothetical potash processing




plant  shown in  Figure  2-11.   The  sylvihite  mine  and  hoist  are  assumed  to




operate  during the  period  0800  to 1600 LST.  Fugitive emissions  from the ore




pile during  the period 0800 to 1600 LST are higher than during the  period 1600




to  0800  LST because the hoist is continuously dumping sylvinite  ore onto the




ore pile.  A significant fraction of the fugitive emissions  from  the ore pile




and  the  conveyor  belt   consists  of  large  particulates.    The particla-size




distribution,  gravitational   settling   velocities   and   surface    reflection




coefficients for  particulate  emissions from the ore pile and  conveyor belt are




given  in Table 2-14.  The  settling  velocities  were  calculated using Eguations




 (2-46) and (2-47) with  the particulate  density assumed to be  1 gram per  cubic




 centimeter;  the   reflection coefficients were obtained  from Figure  2-8.   The




 remainder of the particulate emissions  from the hypothetical  plant  are assumed






                                      2-70
-------
 6
~8"
o

w
•
      ce
      o
      u.

      8
      QC
  u
  OD


  I
  UJ
                         I-

                         O
<

a.
                                                           u.
                                                           o


                                                           UJ
                                                                   UJ
                                                                   o
                                                                   CO
                                                                o   -
                                                                          CO

                                                                          o.

                                                                          oo
                                                                          c
                                                                         .rH
                                                                          tn
                                                                          en
                                                                          01
                                                                          0
                                                                          o
                                                                          u
                                                                          o.
                                                                          03
                                                                          CO
                                                                          O
                                                                          ex
                                                                                  nj
                                                                                  o
                                                                                                   01
                                                                                                  4=
                                                                                                   O
                                                                                                   CX
                                                                                                   3
                                                                                                   01
                                                                                                   01
                                                                                                  •a
                                                                                                  T3
                                                                                                   c
                                                                                                   03
                                                                                                   3
                                                                                                   O
                                                                                                   C
                                                                                                   CO
                                                                                                   I
                                                                                                  csi
                                                                                                  o
                                                                                                  M
                                                                                                  tu
                                            2-7  !
-------
                                   TABLE  2-13

                       EMISSIONS DATA FOR A HYPOTHETICAL
                            POTASH PROCESSING PLANT
Source
Particulate emission rate (g/sec)
Emission height (m)
Exit velocity (m/sec)
Diameter (m)
Exit temperature (°K)
Source
Ore Conveyor Roof Main
Pile Belt Monitor Stack
353.4* 1.3 10.5 5
50
8
1.0
340
*Emission rate  during  the period 0800  to  1600 LST.   The emission  rate  during
the period 1600 to 0800 LST is 70.7  grams per second.
                                   TABLE 2-14

          PARTICLE-SIZE  DISTRIBUTION, GRAVITATIONAL SETTLING VELOCITIES
              AND  SURFACE REFLECTION COEFFICIENTS FOR  PARTICULATE
                 EMISSIONS  FROM THE ORE  PILE AND CONVEYOR  BELT
Particle
Mass Mean
Size Category Diameter
(H) (u)
0
10
20
30
40
50
- 10
- 20
- 30
- 40
- 50
- 65
6.30
15.54
25.33
35.24
45.18
17.82
Mass Fraction
4>n
0.10
0.40
0.28
0.12
0.06
0.04
Settling
Velocity
Vsn (m/sec)
0.001
0.007
0.019
0.037
0.061
0.099
Reflection
Coefficient
Yn
1.00
0.82
0.72
0.65
0.59
0.50
                                      2-72
-------
to be submicron particulates so that the effects of gravitational  settling and

dry deposition need  not  be included in the model calculations.   The purpose of

this example problem is  to use ISCST to calculate 24-hour  average particulate

concentrations  produced  by  emissions  from  the  hypothetical  potash  plant.

Additionally, estimates  of  the dry deposition of  fugitive  emissions  from the

ore pile and the conveyor belt are required for each  24-hour period.

    The ore  pile  is  modeled as an area  source with  the  effective side  x0  of

the circular storage pile given by:


                             x0 = 0.5 ir1/2  D                             (2-59)


where D is  the  diameter of the base  of  the storage  pile.  The  emission height

H  is set  equal  to the height  of  the  ore pile (10 meters).  The  emission rate

in  grams  per  second  is divided by  the horizontal  area  of the  storage  pile

{706.9  square  meters)  to  obtain  the area  source  emission  rate  in grams  per

second per square meter.

    The conveyor belt is 10 meters wide and 100 meters long and  is inclined at

an  angle  of 10  degrees.  Thus,  the  conveyor belt is modeled as  ten 10-meter

square  volume  sources.    The   initial  lateral  dimension  of  each source  is

obtained  by dividing  the  width  (10  meters)  by  2.15.   The initial  vertical

dimension  azo  is arbitrarily set  equal   to  1  meter  to  account  fo;.  the

effects of  local  plant  roughness  elements.   The emission  height H,  for the

i   source is given by:



                           Hi  =  L! sin 6                               (2-60)


where

    Hi   =   the effective emission height for the ith volume source

    LI   =   the  length,  measured  from the  beginning  of  the conveyor  belt,  to
             the center of the  ilh volume source
                                      2-73
-------
    6    =  the angle of inclination (10 degrees)






    The volume  source model  is  also used  to  model the  90-meter by  20-meter




roof monitor.  The  roof  monitor  is approximated by four 20-meter square volume




sources  with  the   centers   of   the  volume  sources  spaced   at   23.3-meter




intervals.   The   initial  lateral  dimension ayo  of each  of the four  volume




sources is obtained  by  dividing  23.3 meters by 2.15.   Because  the  opening  of




the roof  monitors  extends  from 20 to 25 meters above plant grade, the emission




height H is set equal to 22.5 meters.   In  order to account for  the  effects  of




the aerodynamic  wake of the  processing building on the initial  dispersion  of




emissions  from  the  roof  monitor,  the  initial  vertical  dimension  a^o  is




obtained by dividing the building height (25 meters) by 2.15.




    In  summary,  the  effects  of  emissions  from  the   hypothetical   potash




processing  plant shown  in Figure  2-11 can be  simulated by  16 sources.   A




single area  source  represents the  ore  pile,  ten  volume  sources simulate the




inclined  conveyor belt, four  volume sources  represent  the roof monitor, and




there  is  one  stack.   It should  be  noted   that  the stack  height to  building




height ratio  is  less than 2.5 so  that  the ISC Model procedures for evaluating




wake  effects  are applied to the  stack  emissions.   The emissions data  for the




hypothetical  plant  given in Table 2-13 are  converted  to  the  form required for




input  to  ISCST in Tables 2-15 and  2-16.   The  information given  in  Table  2-1-1




is  also  required for the ore pile and the conveyor belt.   Because the plant is




located  in open  terrain, all source elevations are  set equal  to zero.  The  X




and Y coordinates  assume  that the origin of  the  coordinate system  is located




at  the center of the ore pile.   Source combinations  that  are  of  interest  in




analyzing the  results of the calculations are as follows:
                                      2-74
-------
to i-

go

to
to
                   CNJ

                "~  (U

                -x-
                O I-

                 01  I
                 a.
                 u  u
                 a)  •
S '   E
              ~-    x
                  o
              >  O
                 N
                 x g
                 (U «
                 
                                                                                                                   a»
                                                                                                                            (U

                                                                                                                            U
                                                                                                             o
                                                                                                             1/1    yi

                                                                                                             •o
                                                                                                             c    n
                                                                                                             a    j->
                                                                                                                   en
                                                                                                                            o


                                                                                                                            ii
                                                                                                                            0)
                                                                                                                            a.
                                                                                                                            x
                                                                                                                   O)
                                                                                                                   c
                                                                                                                                  c
                                                                                                                                  
-------
                                  TABLE 2-16
                            PARTICLE EMISSION RATES
                               FOR THE ORE PILE
    Hour  (LST)
Emission Rate
Q (g/sec'm2)
 A
Total Hourly
  Emission
 Q (g/m2)
  AT*
      0100
      0200
      0300
      0400

      0500
      0600
      0700
      0800

      0900
      1000
      1100
      1200
      0.1
      0.1
      0.1
      0.1

      0.1
      0.1
      0.1
      0.5

      0.5
      0.5
      0.5
      0.5
      360
      360
      360
      360

      360
      360
      360
    1,800
      800
      800
      800
      800
       1300
       1400
       1500
       1600

       1700
       1800
       1900
       2000

       2100
       2200
       2300
       2400
      0.5
      0.5
      0.5
      0.1
      0.
      0.
      0.
      0.1
      0.
      0.
       0.1
       0.1
      ,800
      ,800
      ,800
      360

      360
      360
      360
      360

      360
      360
      360
      360
*The  amount  of  material  emitted  during  each  hour  is  required  for  the
deposition calculations.
                                      2-76
-------
    •  Source 1 - Ore Pile
    •  Sources 2-11 - Conveyor Belt
    •  Sources 12-15 - Roof Monitor
    •  Source 16 - Stack
    •  Sources 1-16 - Plant as a Whole
Example ISCST runs  that  use  the inputs given  in  Tables  2-13 through 2-16  and

the  receptor  grid  shown  in  Figure  2-3  to  calculate  concentrations  and

deposition are given in  Appendix C.   The hypothetical potash plant  is  assumed

to be  located  in  a rural area.   Also, the plant does not contain large  surface

roughness elements  or heat  sources.   Consequently,  the Rural Mode  is  used  in

the ISCST calculations.



    2.6.3  Example ISCLT Problem

    The purpose of this  example problem  is  to  use ISCLT to  calculate,  for  the

receptor  grid shown  in Figure  2-3,   annual  average  ground-level  particulate

concentrations produced  by  emissions   from  the hypothetical potash  processing

plant  shown  in   Figure  2-11  as  well  as  the annual  deposition produced  by

fugitive  emissions  from  the  ore pile  and conveyor belt.   Annual concentration

and  deposition estimates  are  also  required  for  an  air quality  monitoring

station located 2,108 meters  from  the center  of  the  ore pile  at a  bearing  of

014  degrees.  With the  exception of emissions  from  the  ore  pile  and  the

conveyor belt, the emissions data for  the plant are  assumed to  be  identical  to

the  data  given in Tables 2-15  and  2-16.   Fugitive  emission rates for  the  ore

pile and conveyor belt are given in Table 2-17 as functions of the  wind-speed

and  Pasquill  stability  categories.    The  corresponding  annual  particulate

emissions  required  for  the  annual   deposition  calculations   are  given  in

Table 2-18.   Example  ISCLT  runs  that  calculate annual  average concentration

and  total  annual  deposition  values  for  this  problem   are  presented   in

Appendix D.
                                      2-77
-------
                       TABLE 2-17

PARTICULATE EMISSION RATES FOR THE ORE PILE AND CONVEYOR
            BELT AS  FUNCTIONS  OF  WIND SPEED
                     AND  STABILITY
Pasguill
Stability
Category
Emission Rate for
0-1.5
1.6-3.1
3.2-5.
(a) Ore Pile
A
B
C
D
E
F
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
—
0.05
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.25
0.20
0.10
(b) Individual volume Sources
Conveyor Belt
A
B
C
D
E
F
0.13
0.10
0.08
0.04
—
0.02
0.16
0.13
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.05
—
0.50
0.40
0.50
0.25
—
Qi , k
—
0.16
0.14
0.13
0.10
	
Wind Speeds (m/sec) of
1 5.2-8.2 8.3-10.8 >10.8
QA , i , k(g/(sec.m2 ) )
—
—
0.50 0.70 1.00
0.50 0.70 1.00
—
—
(g/sec) Used to Represent the
—
—
0.16 0.19 0.22
0.16 0.19 0.22
—
	 	 	
                          2-78
-------















l/l
^

1-

LU
m

cc
o

Ul
>
z
0 >•
<_) 1-
M
a _i
Z M
< CO

Ul 1-
1 —1 (/)
1 1-1
a a
z
LU <
Of
ao o a
•— LU
1 Ul Ul
CM x a.
h- to
Ul
-i oe a
CD O Z
< U. I-H
I- 3

z u.
00
 a>
VI (0 *J
« 4J to
a-  O



























1C

^

^
..
t
^
o-

—

t 1 X X 1 I
II 11
00 00
in ui
• i
»— »•-







r- r- r*. to
O O O O
^- f— r— i—

1 X X X X 1
1 1

*O CM CM *f
— — — (^







r- r* to  r- in oo
CM ^ ro ^- m
^ 


c
cu
I/I
cu

a.
cu
cc

o

T3
CU
VI


^»»
Ol


-^
.,r
. V
^
y
*
o*
VI
cu

^
C
K*


r>
"—



O O
— —
1 1 X X 1 1

^ ^
a\ o-i
CJ3 vo

CO CO
o o
^- r~.
1
I 1 X X t i
1 1 l
o> o^
o^ ^

m ui








co to
0 O
i— i—

I I X X I I
II II
m in
o o
• *
m LO







CO 04 (O CO
0 O O O


I X X X X I
1 . 1
m CM o m

ui ^ «r co







to to to to to to
o o o o o o

X X X X X X

m o oo m CM oo
o — f-* »— m in
LO ^ CO CO CM »—





CO CO tO (O IA
o o o o o
f— .— f— — ,—
X X X X 1 X
1
o m CM \o •—
f- »— m CM co
^ en 04 ^ vo










< ' CO O O UJ u_









^
0
r—

X

^D
CO
m
»—

n

II

—- s
t_

•^
>^
(0
T3

in
^D
CO
^f

X

,—*
>^
m
•o

^
^

^-
CM


X

^**
£ •—
^^ U
u ai
a) on
VI V.
C71
0 —
C2

ro
*~* tO1
X

*—s O
— > ^
(*4
E X

U vfl
QJ PO
c/i m
^^ ^~
•x^, *
Ol CO
II
^

0)

0
H

oT^ 0-
£
ai >s

u
(Q

•t— -r-
e J
< VI
^D* *
2-79
-------
-------
                                   SECTION  3

                   USER'S  INSTRUCTION FOR THE  ISC  SHORT-TERM
                              (ISCST) MODEL  PROGRAM
3.1 Summary of Program Options, Data Requirements and Output

    3.1.1  Summary of ISCST Program Options

    The  program  options  of  the  ISC  Dispersion  Model  short-term  computer

p-rogram (ISCST) consist of three general categories:


    •  Meteorological data input options

    •  Dispersion model options

    •  Output options


E^ch category is discussed separately below.



    a.  Meteorological Data Input Options.  Table 3-1  lists  the meteorological

data  input options  for the ISCST computer program.   Hourly meteorological data

may be input by card  deck  or by means of  the  preprocessed meteorological data

tape.   Be  aware,  however,   that  the  calm  wind processing   feature  is  not

available when meteorological data are input by card deck.   In  fact,  the  model

will  automatically assume  meteorology  is to  be input  via tape/file if  the

regulatory default option is selected.  Under these conditions,  the  model will

expect  an  external  meteorology  file  (which  doesn't  exist),  and  terminate

abnormally.   It  is up  to  the  us'er  to insure  tape/file input  of  meteorology

when the regulatory default option is selected.

    If available,  site-specific wind-profile  exponents and  vertical  potential

temperature  gradients may  be  input  for each  stability category or  for each

combination  of wind-speed and stability  categories.   The  Rural Mode,  Urban

Mode  1, Urban Mode 2 or Urban  Mode  3 (see Section 2.2.1.1) may be selected by

the user.  Also, the user may  direct  the program to calculate  plume  rise as a
                                       3-1
-------
                               TABLE 3-1

              METEOROLOGICAL DATA INPUT OPTIONS FOR ISCST
Input of hourly data by preprocessed data tape or card deck

Site-specific wind-profile exponents

Site-specific vertical potential temperature gradients

Rural Mode or Urban Mode 1, 2,  or 3

Final or distance dependent plume rise

Wind system measurement height  if other than 10 meters




                                TABLE 3-2

                   DISPERSION-MODEL OPTIONS FOR ISCST


Concentration or dry deposition calculations

Inclusion  of effects  of gravitational  settling  and/or dry  deposition in
concentration calculations

Inclusion of terrain effects (concentration calculations only)

Grid or Discrete receptors (Cartesian or polar  system),  with capability to
model receptor heights above ground.

Stack, volume and area sources

Pollutant  emission rates  held  constant or  varied by hour  of  the day, by
season  or month,  by  hour of  the day  and season,  or by  wind  speed and
stability

Time-dependent exponential decay of pollutants

Inclusion  of  building wake  and  stack-tip  downwash  and  buoyancy-induced
dispersion effects

Time  periods for which concentration or deposition  calculations are to be
made  (1,  2,  3, 4,  6,  8,  12,  and 24 hours and N days are possible, where N
is  the total number of days considered)

Specific days  and/or  time periods within a  day for  which concentration or
deposition calculations are to  be made

Procedure  for  calm  winds processing  (not  available  when meteorological
data  are  input as  card  images).


                                   3-2                                12/87
-------
function of  downwind  distance or to  assume  that the final plume  rise  applies

at all downwind distances.   If the wind system measurement height  differs  from

10 meters,  the actual  measurement height should be entered.



    b.   Dispersion Model   Options.    Table   3-2  lists  the  dispersion  model

options for  the ISCST computer  program.   The  user  may elect  to make  either

concentration  or  dry deposition calculations.   In  the  case of  concentration

calculations, the effects of  gravitational  settling  and/or dry deposition  may

be  included  in the calculations for areas  of open  terrain.   Terrain  effects

may be included in  the model  calculations.   A  terrain truncation  algorithm is

applied when  the  elevation  of a receptor exceeds  the source  height (elevation

plus  physical height  of  source').  In general,  the gravitational  settling  and

dry deposition  options  should not  be  used  in elevated terrain  (see  Sections

2.4.1.2.c  and 2.4.3).   The user  may  select  either  a  Cartesian  or  a  polar

receptor system and may  input discrete receptor points with either system.   If

receptors above ground are  to  be modeled,  the  receptor height  above  the local

terrain is also  required.   ISCST calculates concentration or deposition values

for stack, volume and area source emissions.   The volume source option  is also

used  to simulate  line sources (see Section 2.4.2.3).  Pollutant emission rates

may be held constant or varied by hour of the day, by season or month,  by hour

of  the  day  and  season,  or  by wind  speed  and stability.   The effects  of

time-dependent  exponential  decay of  a  pollutant  as  a surrogate  for  chemical

transformation  or other  removal  processes  may  also  be  included  in  the model

calculations  (see  Section  2.4.1).   If a stack is located  on or adjacent  to a

building,  the user must input  the  building  dimensions  (length, width,  and

height)  in order for the  program to consider  the  effects  of the  building's

aerodynamic  wake  on  plume  dispersion.   The user must select  the time periods

over  which concentration is to be averaged or deposition is to  be summed.  The

user  must  also select the  specific  days  and/or  time periods  within specific
                                      3-3                                 12/87
-------
days for  which  concentration or deposition  calculations  are to be made.   For

example,  the user may wish  to  calculate  3-hour average concentrations  for  the

third  3-hour  period  on  Day  118.   When  the calm winds  processing option  is

selected by the  user  (or by  selection  of  the regulatory default option),  calm

winds are treated as described in EPA (1984).



    c.   Output Options.  Table  3-3  lists  the ISCST program  output  options.   A

more detailed discussion of  the ISCST  output information  is given in  Section

3.1.3.

    The results of  all  ISCST calculations may be  stored  on  a disc file.   The

user may also elect to print one or more  the following tables:


    •  The program control  parameters,  source data, and receptor data.

    •  Hourly meteorological inputs for each specified day.

    •  The  "N"-day  average  concentration  or   "N"-day  total  deposition
       calculated  at  each  receptor  for  any  desired  combinations  of
       sources.

    •  The  concentration or deposition values calculated  for any desired
       combinations of sources  at  all  receptors for  any  specified  day or
       time period within a day.

    •  The  highest,  second-highest and   third-highest  concentration  or
       deposition  values  calculated  for  any  desired  combinations  of
       sources  at   each   receptor  for   each  specified  averaging  time
       (concentration) or  summation time  (deposition) during  an  "N"-day
       period.

    •  The  maximum 50 concentration or  deposition values calculated for
       any  desired  combinations of  sources  for each specified averaging
       time (concentration) or  summation time (deposition).


 It  should be  noted that a  given problem  run may generate a  large print output

 (see   Section  3.2.5.b).    Consequently,   it  may  be  more convenient   to  make

 multiple  program  runs  for a   given  problem.   Note, also,  that all output

 options  remain  available with  the calm wind processing and regulatory default

 options.


                                       3~4                                 12/87
-------
                               TABLE  3-3

                          ISCST OUTPUT OPTIONS
Results of the calculations stored on a disc file

Printout of program control parameters, source data and receptor data

Printout of tables of hourly meteorological data for each specified day

Printout of  "N"-day average concentration or total  deposition calculated
at each receptor for any desired combinations of sources

Printout of  the  concentration or  deposition values  calculated  for  any
desired combinations of  sources  at  all receptors for  any  specified day or
time period within the day

Printout   of   tables   of   highest,   second-highest   and   third-highest
concentration  or  deposition values  calculated at  each receptor  for  each
specified  time   period  during  an   "N"-day  period   for   any   desired
combinations of sources

Printout of  tables of  the  maximum 50  concentration or deposition values
calculated for any desired combinations of sources for  each  specified  time
period
                                   3-5
-------
    3.1.2  Data Input Requirements

    This section provides a  description of all input data  parameters  required

by the ISCST program.  The user should note that some input parameters  are  not

read  or  are  ignored  by  the  program,  depending  on  what  values   control

parameters have been assigned by the user.  Except  where  noted,  all data  are

read from card images.
    a.  Program  Control Parameter Data.   These data  contain  parameters which

provide user-control of all program options.
    Parameter
      Name

      ISW(l)
      ISW(2)
      ISW(3)
      ISW(4)
Concentration/Deposition  Option  —  Directs  the  program  to
calculate either average concentration or  total  deposition.   A
value  of   "1"   indicates   average  concentration  and  a  "2"
indicates total deposition.  The default value equals "1".

Receptor  Grid System  Option  —  Specifies  whether  a  right-
handed  rectangular  Cartesian  coordinate system or  a  polar
coordinate  system  is used  to  reference  the  receptor  grid.   A
value  of "1"  indicates the  Cartesian coordinate system,  and
"2"  indicates  the  polar coordinate  system.   Additionally,  a
"3"  value will  automatically generate a grid  system  using the
Cartesian coordinate system and a  "4"  value  will automatically
generate    the   polar    coordinate  direction   radials   with
user-defined  starting   locations  and  spacing  distances.   The
default value equals "1".

Discrete  Receptor Option  —  Specifies whether  a right-handed
rectangular Cartesian coordinate  system  or a  polar  coordinate
system is used  to reference discrete receptor points.  A value
of  "1"  indicates  the  Cartesian  coordinate  system  and  a  "2"
indicates   the  polar  coordinate  system.   The   default  value
equals "1".

Receptor Terrain  Elevation Option — Allows the  user  to input
terrain  elevations for all receptor  points.   A value  of "I"
directs  the program to read user-provided terrain  elevations
in  feet.  A value of "0" assumes  level  terrain and no terrain
elevations  are  read by the program.  The  default value equals
"0".   If equal to "-1", the  program  assumes  input  elevations
are  in meters rather than feet.
                                       3-6
-------
           Parameter
            Name
      ISW(5)
      ISW(6)
      ISW(7)-
     ISW(14)
     ISW(15>*
     ISW(IS)*
     ISW(17)*
Output   File   Option   -  Allows   all   calculated   average
concentration or total  deposition  values  to be written  onto  a
disc  file.   A  value of  "1"  writes  calculated  values  to  an
output  file.   Refer   to  Section  3.2.4.b  for   a   complete
description  of  the  output  produced  from  the  use  of  this
option.  A  "0" value does  not  write  any  calculations  to  an
output file.  The default value equals "0".

Print Input  Data Option —  Allows the user  to  print  all input
data parameters.  A  value of  "0"  indicates  no  input  data  are
listed.  A  "1" indicates that  all program  control parameters
and model  constants, receptor  site  data and  source   data  are
printed.  A "2"  value  is  -the  same as  the "1"  option  except
that all hourly meteorological  data  used in the calculations
are also printed.  The default value equals "0".

Time Period  Options  —  These  options allow the user to compute
average concentration or total deposition based on  up  to eight
time periods.   Parameters  ISW(7)  through ISW(14) respectively
correspond to  1-,  2-,   3-,  4-,  6,- 8-,  12-, and 24-hour  time
periods.  The   user  may  choose  any number  of  the eight  time
periods.  A value  of  "1"  for  any  of   the  eight  parameters
directs the  program to compute  average concentration  or total
deposition  values  for  the  corresponding  time  period.  A  "0"
value  for any  of the eight time-period parameters  directs  the
program not  to make  calculations  for  the  corresponding  time
period.  The default values equals "0".

Output  "N"-day  Table  Option  —  Allows  the  user   to  print
average concentration or total deposition for the total  number
of  days of  meteorological  data processed  by the  problem  run
for source  group  combinations chosen by the  user.  A  value of
"1"  employs this  option;  "N"-day tables  are  not printed if
ISW(15) has a "0" value.  The default value equals "0".

Output Daily Tables Option  — Allows the  user to  print average
concentration  or  total  deposition values for all time periods
and  source  groups   specified by  the  user  for  each day  of
meteorological  data processed.   A  value of  "1"  directs  the
program to print these tables; these tables  are not printed if
                ISW(16)   has  a
                  '0'
value  or  if  parameters  ISW(7)  through
ISW(14) equal "0".  The default value equals "0".

Output Highest, Second-Highest  and  Third-Highest Tables Option
—  Allows  the  user  to print  the  highest  and second-highest
average  concentration or total  deposition calculated  at  each
receptor.   A set of  the highest and  second-highest tables is
*The four parameters ISW(15)  through  ISW(18)  pertain to output table  options.
 Refer  to Section 3.1.3  for a more  complete  summary of the contents of  each
 type of output table.
                                      3-7
-------
 Parameter
   Name

    ISW(17>*
     (Cont.)
    ISW(18)*
    ISW(19)
     ISW(20)
     ISW(21)
printed  for  each  time  period and  source  group  combination
chosen  by the  user.   A  value  of "1"  directs  the  program  to
print  these  tables;  these  tables  are not  printed  if  ISW(17)
has a  "0"  value or if parameters ISW(7> through  ISW{14)  equal
"0".  A  value  of "2"  will cause the program  to print  a  third
highest  table   in  addition  to the highest  and second  highest
tables.  Default value equals "0".

Output  Maximum 50 Tables Option  —  Specifies  whether  or  not
tables  of  the   50  highest calculated average  concentration  or
total deposition  values  are printed  for  each time  period  and
source group specified by the user.   A "1" value  employs this
option;  these   tables  are  not  printed if  ISW(18)  has  a  "0"
value  or if  parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14)  equal "0".  The
default value equals "0".

Meteorological  Data Option  — A "1"  value  directs  the  program
to  read hourly meteorological  data  from FORTRAN  logical unit
IMET  in  a  format  compatible  with  that  generated  by  the
pre-processor  program.    A  "2" value  directs  the  program  to
read hourly meteorological  data  in a  card image  format.  The
default  value  equals  "1".  The user  should recall  that if  the
regulatory  default  option   (ISW  (28))  selected,  the  model
automatically  assumes pre-processed meteorological  data are to
be used  (ISW (19) = 1).

Rural/Urban Option — Specifies  which of  the  rural or  three
urban modes is to be used.  A value of "0" directs the program
to  read rural  mixing heights.  A "1" value causes the  program
to  read urban  mixing heights with Urban Mode  1 adjustments  to
the  input  stability  categories (see Table  2-3).   A "2"  value
causes  the program  to  read urban mixing  heights  with  Urban
Mode  2  adjustments  to  the  input stability  categories.   The
Pasquill-Gifford  dispersion curves are used for the Rural Mode
and  Urban Modes 1 and 2.   A value of "3"  directs  the  program
to   read  urban  mixing   heights  and  use  the  Briggs  urban
dispersion  curve? (Urban Mode  3).   The  default  value  equals
"0".   It  should be noted  that  if Meteorological  Data  Option
(ISW(19))  has  a  value  of  "2",  the  program  automatically
                assigns
                 value  to  ISW(20),  unless  Urban  Mode  3  is
 selected,  and  ignores  any  conflicting value  entered by  the
 user.   It  should be noted that  the  use of Urban Modes 1 and 2
 are not  recommended for regulatory purposes. .

 Wind Profile Exponent Option — This option  allows  the user to
 enter  wind  profile  exponent values or allows  the  program to
 provide  default wind profile exponent  values.   If  a  value of
 "1"  is  entered,  the program  provides  default  values.   See
"'•The four parameters ISW(15)  through  ISW(18)  pertain to output table  options.
 Refer  to Section 3.1.3  for a more  complete  summary  of the contents of  each
 type of output table.
                                      3-8
-------
Parameter
  Name

   ISW(21)
  (Cont'd.)
   ISW{22)
   ISW(23)
Table 2-2  for the  default  values used  by the  program.   If a
value of "2"  is  entered,  the program  reads user-provided  wind
profile  exponents  in  input  parameter  PDEF.   These  values
remain constant throughout the problem run.  If  a  value  of "3"
is  entered,  the  program  reads  user-provided  wind  profile
exponent  values  in  input  parameter  P  for   each   hour  of
meteorological data  processed by  the  program.  Mote  that the
ISW(21) equals  "3"  option  assumes  the hourly  meteorological
data are in a card image format  (ISW(19)  =  "2").   The default
value of  ISW(21)  equals  "1".   The  regulatory  default  option
(ISW(28)>  also sets ISW{21) to "1".

Vertical Potential  Temperature Gradient Option  — This  option
allows  the  user  to   enter   vertical  potential   temperature
gradient  values  or  allows  the  program  to  provide  default
vertical potential temperature gradient values.  If a  value of
"1"  is entered,   the   program  provides  default  values.   See
Table 2-2  for the default  values used by the  program.   If a
value  of .  "2"  is  entered,  the  program  reads  user-provided
vertical  potential  temperature   gradient  values   in   input
parameter DTHDEF.   These  values  remain constant throughout the
problem run.  If  a  value  of "3"  is  entered,  the program reads
user-provided  vertical  potential  temperature gradient  values
in  input parameter  DTHDZ  for each hour of meteorological  data
processed  by the  program.   Note  that the ISW(22) equals "3"
option assumes hourly meteorological data  are in  a card image
format  (ISW(19)   equals "2").   The  default  value of  ISW(22)
equals "1".  The regulatory default  option (ISW(28»  also sets
ISW(22) to  "1".

Variable  Source  Emission  Rate  Option — Allows  the user to
specify scalars  which  are  multiplied  by  the  sources'  average
emission rates.   This   parameter  is  employed  by the  user when
it  is desired  to  vary the  average  emission  rates  for  all
sources.   It is also possible to vary the  emission  rates for
individual  sources  with the  QFLG  parameter  option.   These
scalars may vary as a  function of  season, month,  hour  of the
day, hour  of the day and season,  or wind speed and  stability
category.    A  value of  "1"  allows  the  user  to enter  four
seasonal  scalars;  a "2"   allows  the  user  to  enter  twelve
monthly scalars;  a  "3" allows  the  user  to  enter twenty-four
scalars for each hour of  the day; a "4" value allows  the user
to  enter  thirty-six scalars for  six wind  speed categories for
each of the six stability categories;  a  "5"  value allows the
user  to  enter ninty-six  scalars  for twenty-four hourly values
for each of the four seasons.  A  "0" value directs the program
not to vary average emission rates  for all sources, and allows
the  use  of  the  QFLG  parameter  option  for   the  individual
sources.  The default value of this  parameter equals "0".
                                     3-9
-------
Parameter
  Name
       ISW(24)      Plume  Rise  Option —  Allows  the program  to consider  only
                   the final plume rise at  all  downwind receptor locations  if
                   a value  of  "1" is entered.  If  a  value of "2" is  entered,
                   the program  computes  plume  rise   as   a   function   of   the
                   downwind distance of  each receptor.  The  default  value  of
                   ISW{24)   equals   "1".    The   regulatory   default    option
                   (ISW(28» also  sets  ISW(24)  to  "1".

       ISW(25)      Stack-Tip Downwash Option — Allows  the program to use  the
                   physical stack  height entered by the user  or to modify the
                   physical stack  height of all  stack-type sources entered  in
                   order  to account for  stack-tip downwash  effects  (Briggs,
                   1973).    If a value  of  "1"  is entered,  all physical stack
                   heights  entered by the user  are  used throughout the problem
                   run;  if  a  value  of  "2"  is  entered,  all  physical stack
                   heights   entered  are   modified  to   account  for  stack-tip
                   downwash.  The   default  value of  ISW(25)   equals  "I".   The
                   regulatory  default option (ISW{28»  sets ISW(25) to  "2".

       ISW(26)      Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion Option  — Allows the program to
                   modify    the    dispersion  coefficients   to   account   for
                   buoyancy-induced dispersion.   A  value  of   "1"  directs  the
                   program   to    modify   the   dispersion   coefficients   for
                   stack-type  sources  while  a  "2"  directs   the  program  to
                   bypass   the  modifications.   The  regulatory default  option
                   (ISW(28)) sets  ISW(26)  to "1".

       ISW(27)      Calm Processing Option —  Allows the program to use  a  calm
                   processing   routine,   developed  by  EPA,   to   calculate
                   concentration  or  deposition during  calm  periods.   A value
                   of "1"  directs  the  program to use  this feature  and a "2"
                   directs  the program  to ignore this  feature.

       ISW(28)      Regulatory  Default  Option — If chosen,  the  program  will
                   internally   re-define   some   user   input   to  produce   a
                   simulation  consistent  with EPA  regulatory recommendations.
                   The following  features are  incorporated when this  option is
                   selected (ISW(28)=1):

                   1.  Tape/file meteorological input  is assumed.
                   2.  Final  plume  rise  is  used  at  all  downwind  receptor
                       locations.
                   3.  Stack-tip downwash effects are  included.
                   4.  Buoyancy-induced dispersion effects  are parameterized.
                   5.  Default wind  profile  coefficients  are  assigned   (.07,
                       .07, .10,  .15,  .35,  .55  for the rural mode;  and  .15,
                       .15, .20,   .25, .30, .30 for the urban modes).
                   6.  Default vertical  potential  termperature gradients are
                       assigned (A:0.0,  B:0.0,  C:0.0,  D:0.0, E:0.02,  F:0.035
                       K/m)
                   7.  A   calm   processing  routine   is   used   to   handle
                       concentrations during caln periods.
                   8.  A decay  half life  of 4  hours  is  assigned  if  S02  is
                       modeled  in  an  urban  mode;  otherwise,  no  decay  is
                       assigned.
                   9.  Revised building  wake  effects   procedure  is  selected,
                       which  uses either  the method  of Huber and Snyder,  or
                       that of  Schulman  and  Scire,   depending on  the  stack
                       height and building  dimensions  (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).
                                     3-10                                12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name

   ISW(28)
    (Cont.)
   ISW(29)
   ISW(30)
   ISW(31)
   NSOURC
   NXPNTS
   NYPNTS
   NXWYPT
   NGROUP
Note,  if  this  option  is  chosen,  ISW  (19)  is  set  to  "1",
indicating  input  of pre-processed  meteorological  data.   Note
that  the model  also selects  the  appropriate  urban  or  rural
mixing   height,   and   that  either   the  original   ISC   or
Schulman-Hanna   building    downwash   is  ' calculated    when
appropriate.
This option is not selected if ISW(28)=2.

Pollutant  Indicator  Switch —  If  S02 is modelled  the  user
should set this option equal to "1".  If a pollutant other than
SOz is modelled the user should set this option equal to "2".

Input  Debug Switch - If  the user wants input data  printed as
soon as  it is read set this option to  "1".  Otherwise  set this
option   to   "2".    Note,   this   option  will   print  the  same
information as that  with  ISW(6),  but  immediately  after  it is
read,  providing  the user with assistance  in  determining where
in the runstream input errors are located.

Above Ground ("flagpole")  Receptor Option - Allows  the user to
model  receptor  heights above  local terrain.   A value  of "1"
directs  the program  to  read  user-provided  receptor  heights
above  local  terrain.   The default value  of  "0"  assumes no
heights  are  provided.   This option is  available regardless of
the regulatory defaults option setting.

Number of  Sources  — This parameter specifies the total number
of sources to be processed by the problem run.

X-Axis/Range  Receptor  Grid  Size  —  This  parameter specifies
the  number  of  east-west  receptor  grid  locations  for  the
Cartesian  coordinate  system X-axis,  or the number  of  receptor
grid  ranges (rings) in the  polar coordinate  system (depending
on  which  receptor  grid  system  is  chosen by  the  user  with
parameter  ISW(2)).   A  "0"  value causes the program to assume
that no  regular (non-discrete) receptor grid is used.

Y-Axis/Radial Receptor  Grid Size  — This  parameter specifies
the  number  of   north-south receptor  grid  locations  for the
Cartesian  coordinate  system Y-axis,  or the number  of  receptor
grid  direction  radials  in the polar grid  system (depending on
which  receptor  grid  system  is  chosen   by   the  user  with
parameter  ISW(2)).   A  "0"  value causes the program to assume
that no  regular (non-discrete) receptor grid is used.

Number of  Discrete Receptors — This  parameter indicates the
total  number  of  discrete  receptors  to  be  processed by the
problem  run.  A "0" value causes the program to  assume that no
discrete receptors are used.

Number of  Source  Groups — This parameter specifies the number
of  source  groups  desired.  Each  source group consists  of any
desired  combination of sources.  A "0" value defines one source
group which consists of all  sources.   The  default  value equals
"0".  A  maximum of 150 source groups are allowed.
                      3-11                                 12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name

    IPERD
   NHOURS
    MDAYS
   NSOGRP
    IDSOR
Single Time  Period  Interval  Option  — This  parameter  allows
the  user  to  specify  one  time  period  interval  out  of  all
possible time period  intervals  within a day.  The use  of this
option directs  the  program  to  print  only  one  time  period
interval  specified  for   daily  output  tables  (see  Section
S.l.S.b).  For example,  if the  user desires to  print  only the
fifth  3-hour  time  period,  IPERD  requires  a  value  of  "5".
Also,  parameter  ISW(9)  must  equal  "1"  in order  to  compute
average  concentration or  total  deposition based on  a  3-hour
time period.  A  "0"  value directs the  program to  consider all
intervals of a given time period.

Number of Hours  Per  Day of Hourly Meteorological  Data  — This
parameter  is  used  only  when  hourly  meteorological  data  are
read  from card  images  (parameter  ISW(19)   equals "2").   This
parameter   specifies   the   number   of  hours   per   day   of
meteorological data.   For example,  one need not enter 24 hours
of meteorological data in order to calculate  a  3-hour  average
concentration from only 3 hours of meteorological data.

Number  of Days  of  Meteorological  Data  — This  parameter is
used only  when  hourly meteorological  data  are  read  from card
images   (parameter    ISW(19)   equals   "2").    This   parameter
specifies the total  number of  days  of  meteorological  data to
be  processed  by  the   program.   The  default value assumes one
day  (a value equal to  "1") of meteorological data.

Number of  Sources Defining Source Groups — This  parameter is
not  read  if  the  parameter  NGROUP  has  a  "0" value.   This
parameter  is  an  array of  NGROUP values  which  indicates how
many  source identification numbers are  read by the  program in
order  to define  each  source group.   The source identification
numbers  themselves  are  read  in parameter  IDSOR.    Refer to
parameter  IDSOR for  an  example of  the  use of  the  parameter
NSOGRP  in association with parameter  IDSOR.   A maximum of 150
source croups may be used.

Source  Identification Numbers  Defining Source  Groups  — This
parameter  is  not  read  if parameter  NGROUP has a  "0" value.
This   parameter   is   an   array  which   contains   the  source
identification  numbers  and/or  the  lower and  upper  bounds of
source identification  number to be  summed over,  which are used
to  define  a  source group.    This  parameter  is  used  in
association   with  parameter   NSOGRP   discussed  above.   The
following  should illustrate  the interactive use of parameters
NGROUP,  NSOGRP  and IDSOR.   Let us  assume  that we  have  50
sources  who identification numbers are  10,  20,  30,  .  .  .,  490,
500.    First,   if  one   desires   only  to   see  the   average
concentration or total deposition calculated  from all  sources,
the  parameter NGROUP  should equal  "0".   The parameters  NSOGRP
and  IDSOR are not required by  the program  and are not  input by
the  user.  Next,  let us  assume  that  one  desires  to  see the
                                     3-12
-------
Parameter
  Name
  IDSOR     average   concentration   or   total   deposition   contribution
(Cont'd.)   individually  of  sources with identification  number  10,  100,
            200, 300, 400, and  500  as  well  as  the combined  contributions
            of  sources  with  number 10  through 100,  50  through  260,  100
            through 200 plus  400  through 500,  and of  all  sources  combined
            (10 through  500).   Hence,  the  average concentration  or total
            deposition  contributions  from  six   individual   sources   are
            desired  plus   the  contributions  from  each  of   four  sets  of
            combined  sources  for  a  total  of ten  source  groups.  Thus,  a
            value  of  "10"  must  be  entered  for  parameter  MGRCUF.   for
            parameter MSOGRP,  one  enters  the ten valaes:  1, 1,  1,  1,  1   L,
            2,  2,  4,  and  2.   For  parameter  IDSOR,  one  enters  tne  -'">^:e
            identification numbers:   10,  100,   200,   300,  400,  500,  1; ,
            -100,  50,  -260,  100,' -200,  400, -500,  10,  -500.   Now  let us
            examine  the  relationship   between  those  values  entered  1:1
            parameters  WSOGRP  and  IDSOR.   The first  six entries of  botn
            NOSGRP and  IDSOR  are  in a one-to-one  correspondence; the  "1"
            value  entered  in  parameter NSOGRP  implies that only one source
            identification number   is  read  by  the program   in  the  IDSOR
            array  in  order to  define a complete source group.  The seventh
            entry  in  parameter NSOGRP (a  "2")  indicates  that   the  source
            identification numbers   10  and  -100   (the  seventh   and  eighth
            entries  in IDSOR)  define  a  source   group.   The  minus  sign
            preceding  source  identification number "100"  indicates  to  the
            program   to   inclusively   sum   over    all    sources    with
            identification numbers  ranging from "10"  to  "100".   The  user
            need not  be  concerned by  the  fact that  no source  number  of,
            say,  "43" exists.  The program only sums  over those  source
            numbers defined (in this case,   10, 20,  30,  .  .  .,  90,  100).
            The  eighth  entry in  parameter  NSOGRP  (a  "2")   specifies  a
            source group including source numbers  "50"  through  "260" which
            are the next  set  of values in parameter IDSOR.  If one desires
            to  see source contributions  from  consecutive source  numbers,
            and  also  desires  to  exclude  some  source  numbers,  the  next
            entry  in  parameter NSOGRP  (a "4")  illustrates this procedure.
            The value  "4"  implies  that four source numbers are read by the
            program  in order  to  define  a source  group.   The  four  source
            identification numbers  read  by  the  program in parameter IDSOR,
            which are the source numbers  following the  last  source numbers
            used to  define the preceding source group, are 100, -200,  400,
            -500.  This  arrangement implies that  inclusive  summing  over
            all sources from  "100"  to  "200" and "400" to "500" is desired,
            excluding source numbers "210" to "390".   Finally,  it  is still
            possible  to obtain the  combined contribution  from  all sources
            as shown  in the last  source  group.   In summary,  we have:   (1)
            Parameter  NGROUP  is  a  value  which represents  the  number of
            source groups desired;  (2)   The values   in  parameter  NSOGRP
            indicate  the  number of  source  identification numbers  read by
            the  program  in   parameter  IDSOR;  and,   (3)  parameter  IDSOR
            contains  the  source  identification numbers  used to  define  a
            source group,  where a  minus  sign  preceding  a   source  number
            implies   inclusive  summing  from  the  previous  source  number
            entered to  the source  number with the minus  sign.   The  number
            of  source  identification  numbers  cannot  exceed  two  hundred
            values for parameter IDSOR.
                                  3- 13
-------
    b.   Meteorological-Related  Constants.   These  data  consist  of  parameters

related  to  the  meteorological  conditions,  of  the   problem  run.   They  are

constants which are initialized at the beginning of the problem run  and remain

constant throughout  the  problem  run  (as opposed to the  hourly  meteorological

data which change throughout the problem run).
    Parameter
      Name

       PDEF
     DTHDEF
      UCATS
         ZR
      DECAY*
Wind Profile  Exponents  —  These  data are read by  the  program
only  if  option  ISW(21)  has  a  value  egual   to  "2"  and  the
regulatory  default  option  is  not chosen  (ISW(28)  = 2.   This
parameter  is  an array containing wind  profile  exponents  for
six  stability   categories,  where   each   stability  category
contains  six  values  for the  six wind  speed  categories.   A
total of  thirty-six  wind profile exponents are entered  by the
user.  See Table 2-2 for default values.

Vertical  Potential  Temperature  Gradients   —  These  data  are
read by  the program  only  if option  ISW{22) has a  value equal
to  "2"  and  the  regulatory  default  option  is   not  chosen
(ISW(28)  = 2.   This parameter is an  array containing vertical
potential temperature gradients  (degrees Kelvin/meter)  for six
stability  categories,  where  each stability category contains
six  values for  the  six  wind  speed  categories.    A total  of
thirty-six   vertical  potential   temperature   gradients   are
entered by the user.  See Table 2-2 for default values.

Wind Speed Categories — This  parameter  contains  five  values
which  specify the upperbound  of the first  through fifth wind
speed  categories  (meters/second).   The  program  assumes  no
upper  limit  on  the  sixth  wind  speed category.   The  default
values  egual  1.54,   3.09,  5.14,  8.23,   and  10.8  meters  per
second for the first through fifth categories,  respectively.

Wind  Speed Reference  Height  — This parameter specifies the
height  (meters)  at  which   the  wind  speed was measured.   The
default value equals  10.0 meters.
 Decay  Coefficient — This  parameter is  the decay coefficient
 (seconds'1)  used  to describe  decay  of  a  pollutant   due  to
 chemical  depletion.   If  SOz  is modelled  in an Urban Mode and
 the  regulatory default option is chosen,  the program assigns a
 decay  coefficient coresponding to a half  life of four hours.
 Otherwise, pollutant decay  is not  considered.
 *This  parameter is read b}  the  program only if the hourly-meteorological data
  are in a preprocessed format  (parameter ISW(19) equals  "1").
                                       3-14
-------
    Parameter
      Name

       IDAY*
Meteorological Julian Day Indicator — This  parameter consists
of an array  of  366 entries, where each entry indicates whether
or  not   a  meteorological  day  of  data   is  processed  by  the
program.   The entry  number of  the array  corresponds  to  the
Julian  Day of  meteorological  data.   For example,  the  140th
entry IDAY(140)  corresponds  to Julian Day 140.  An  entry with
a "1" value  directs  the program  to process the  corresponding
day of  meteorological data.   A  "0" value directs  the  program
to  ignore  that  corresponding  day.   The default  assumes  "0"
values for all 366 entries.
        USS*    Surface  Station Number -- This  parameter  specifies  the  surface
                station  number  of the  meteorological  data  being  used.    The
                surface  station number usually  corresponds to  the WBAN  station
                identification number  for  a  given observation  station.    The
                number is  usually  a five-digit  integer.

        ISY*    Year of Surface  Station Data  —  This parameter specifies  the
                year of  the  surface  station  meteorological  data.    Only  the
                last two digits of the  year are entered.

        IUS*    Upper Air  Station Number —  This  parameter specifies  the  upper
                air station number of  the meteorological data being used.   The
                upper air  station   number   usually  corresponds  to  the  WBAN
                station    identification  number   for   a  given   observation
                station.   The number  is  usually a  five-digit  integer.

        IUY*    Year of  Upper Air Station Data — This  parameter specifies  the
                year of  upper air station meteorological  data.   Only the last
                two digits of the  year  are entered.
    c.    Identification Labels  and  Model  Constants.   These data  consist  of

parameters  pertaining  to  heading  and  identification  labels  and   program

constants.
    Parameter
      Name

      TITLE
Heading Label — This parameter allows the user to  enter  up to
60  characters  in  order  to  identify  a  problem  run.    The
information  entered  in this  parameter appears at  the top  of
each page of print output.
*This parameter is read by the  program  only if the hourly meteorological  data
 are in a preprocessed format (parameter ISW(19)  equals  "1").
                                      3-15
-------
ICHIUN
    TK
   Parameter
     Name

      IQUN     Source Emission Rate  Label  — This parameter provides the user
               with  up  to 12  characters  in  order to  identify the  emission
               rate  units  of all  sources.   The  default  label  is  (GRAMS/SEC)
               when  calculating   average   concentration  and   (GRAMS)   when
               calculating  total  deposition.   All  area source  emission rate
               labels automatically include units of per square meter.

               Output Units  Label  — This parameter provides the  user  with a
               28-character  label  in order  to identify  the  units of average
               concentration  or  total  deposition.   The  default  value  is
               (MICROGRAMS/CUBIC  METER)   for  average  concentration  calcu-
               lations   and   (GRAMS/SQUARE   METER)   for   total   deposition
               calculations.

               Source  Emission  Rate  Conversion  Factor  —  This  parameter
               allows  the user  to  scale  the  source  emission  rate for all
               sources  in order  to  convert the  emission rate  units.   This
               parameter  is  used  in  conjunction  with label parameters IQUN
               and  ICHIUN.   The  default  value equals  1.0 x 106  for average
               concentration   calculations   and  1.0   for   total   deposition
               calculations.

               FORTRAN  Logical Unit Number  for Hourly Meteorological Data —
               This  parameter  specifies the FORTRAN  logical  unit  number  of
               the   device   from  which  the  hourly  meteorological   data are
               read.  The  default  value equals  "9"  for hourly meteorological
               data  which  are in a  preprocessed format.  The  default  value
               for  card image  meteorological data  is  the  same  as the logical
               unit  number for all card input data.

               FORTRAN  Logical  Unit  Number  of  Output  Disc  File — This
               parameter  is ignored by  the  program   if  no  output file  is
               generated  by  the  problem  nan  (ISW(5)  equals   "0").   This
               parameter  specifies  the  FORTRAN  logical unit  number of the
               output device.  The default value  equals "3".

    d.   Receptor  Data.   These  data  consist  of  the  (X, Y) or  (range,   theta)

locations  of  all receptor  points.   Also  included  are the  receptor terrain

elevations  and/or receptor  heights  above ground.   The minimum  distance in

meters between source and receptor  for which  calculations are  made  is  given by:

    Stack Sources:
  IMET
  ITAP
                         1
                         or
                                          ;  no wake effects
    minimum distance =   MAX(1,3*HB)  ; wake effects, squat building
                         or
                         MAX(1,3*HW)  ; wake effects, tall building
                                 3-16
                                                                          12/87
-------
Volume Sources:
           minimum distance
                     1  + 2.15*SIGYO
Area Sources:
           minimum distance
                     1 + 0.5*BW
           Where:         HB = height of building (regular or direction specific)
                         HW = width of building (regular or direction specific)
                      SIGYO =  standard   deviation   of   the   lateral   source
                               dimension of building
                         BW =  width of area source
    Parameter
      Name

      GRIDX
      GRIDY
Receptor Grid X-Axis or  Range  Data —  This  parameter  is  read
by the program  only  if input parameters NXPNTS and  NYPNTS are
both greater than  zero.   This  parameter is an array which has
different  functions  depending  on  the  value of  ISW(2).   If
ISW(2) equals  "1", this  parameter  contains  NXPNTS   values  of
the  X-axis receptor grid points  (meters).   If ISW{2)  equals
"2"  or   "4",  this  parameter  contains   NXPNTS  values  of  the
receptor grid ranges (rings)  in meters.  If ISW(2) equals "3",
the  first  entry  of  this  parameter  contains   the  starting
location  (meters)  of the  X-axis  receptor grid and  the second
entry contains  the incremental value  (meters)  with  which the
remaining NXPNTS values of the X-axis are generated.

Receptor   Grid   Y-Axis  or  Direction   Radial  Data  —  This
parameter  is  read  by  the  program  only  if  input  parameters
NXPNTS and NYPNTS  are  both greater  than zero.  This parameter
is an array which has  different  functions  depending on the
value  of   ISW(2).   If   ISW(2)  equals  "1",  this  parameter
contains  NYPNTS values  of  the Y-axis  receptor  grid  points
(meters).   If  ISW(2)   equals  "2",  this  parameter  contains
NYPNTS  values  of  the  direction  radials  (degrees)  for  the
receptor  grid.   The  program requires that these values not be
fractional  values  but  integer  values within the range  of  1 to
360  degrees.    The  default  value  equals  "360"   degrees.   If
ISW(2) equals "3",  the first entry of  this parameter contains
the  starting  location  (meters)  of  the Y-axis receptor grid and
the  second entry contains the incremental value  (meters)  with
which the  remaining NYPNTS values of the Y-axis are generated.
If the  ISW(2)  equals  "4", the first  entry of this parameter
contains  the  starting direction  radial  location  (degrees)  of
the   receptor   grid  and  the  second  entry  contains   the
incremental value  (degrees)  with  which the  remaining NYPNTS
direction  radial values  of  the receptor  grid are  generated.
All  values generated must be integers within the range of 1 to
360  degrees.  The default value equals  "360" degrees.
                                      3-17
                                                          12/87
-------
      GRIDZ     Grid  Receptor  Terrain Elevation Data — This parameter is  read
(non-discrete)  only  if parameter ISW(<1)  equals "1"  (feet)  or  "-1"   (meters)
               and   NXPNTS  and  NYPNTS  are  both  greater  than  zero.    This
               parameter  is  an array which contains all  the receptor terrain
               elevations  for  the  receptor  grid.    Receptor  elevation  Z:j
               corresponds  to  the  ith  X   coordinate   (range)  and  jth  Y
               coordinate  (direction  radial).   Begin  with  "L\\   and enters
               NXPNTS  values   (Z
-------
Parameter
  Name

    NSO
  ITYPE
    NVS
Source  Identification Number  — This  parameter  is  a  number
which uniquely identifies  each  source.   The program uses  this
identification number for  any output  tables that are  generated
requiring individual  source  identification.   This number  must
be a positive number.

Source Type  Indicator — This parameter specifies the  type  of
source.   If  a  value of  "0"  is  entered,  this  is  a  stack-type
source.    Similarly,  a   "1"   is   entered  for  a  volume-type
source.   A  "2" is  entered for  an  area-type source.   Consult
Sections 2.4.1  and 2.4.2  for  a technical  discussion  of these
source types.

Number of Gravitational  Settling Categories —  This  parameter
specifies  the  number of  gravitational  settling  categories  to
be  considered.   This  parameter  is  used  for  sources  with
particulates   or •  droplets   with   significant   gravitational
settling velocities.   A maximum of 20  categories is  allowed
for each source.
   QFLG     Variable  Source  Emission  Rate  Option  —  This  parameter  is
            ignored by  the  program  if  ISW(23) has a non-zero  value.   This
            parameter  allows  the   user   to  specify   scalars  which  are
            multiplied by this individual  source's  average emission  rate.
            These scalars may  vary  as  a function of season, month,  hour of
            the day, season and hour of the day, or  stability  category and
            wind  speed.   The  implementation of this parameter  is the same
            as  that  of parameter  ISW(23).   Refer  to  the  description  of
            parameter  ISW(23)  for  an  explanation  of  what   values  are
            associated with each variational function.

      Q     Emission Rate — This parameter  specifies  the  average  emission
            rate  of  the source.    If average concentration is calculated,
            the units  for  stack  and volume sources are  mass  per time and
            for area  sources  are  mass  per square meter per time.  If total
            deposition  is  calculated,  the  units  for  stack   and   volume
            sources  are mass  and  for  area  sources  are  mass  per  square
            meter.
     XS     X Location — This parameter specifies the  relative  X location
            (meters) of  the  center of a stack or  volume  source  and of the
            southwest corner of an area source.

     YS     Y Location — This parameter specifies the  relative  Y location
            (meters) of  the  center of a stack or  volume  source  and of the
            southwest corner of an area source.

     ZS     Source  Elevation —  This  parameter   specifies  the  elevation
            (meters above mean sea level) of the source at the source base.
                                  3-19
-------
Stack-Source
 Parameter
           WAKE
           HS
           TS
           VS
           HB*
Supersquat  Building  Wake  Effects  Equation  Option  —  This
option  is  used  to  control  the   equations  used  in  the
calculation  of  the  lateral  virtual  distance  (Equations
(2-37)  and (2-38))  when the  effective  building  width  to
height  ratio  (BW/HB)  is greater than 5.   If this  parameter
is not  punched  or has  a value  of  "0"  and  the  width  to
height  ratio  is  greater  than 5,   the  program  will  use
Equation  (2-37)  to calculate  the  lateral virtual  distance
producing   the  upper   bound  of   the   concentration  or
deposition of the source.  If this  parameter has a  value of
"1",  the  program uses  Equation (2-38)  producing  the lower
bound of  the  concentration deposition for the  source.   The
appropriate  value  for  this parameter  depends  on  building
shape and stack placement with  respect  to the  building (see
Section 2.4.1.1.d).

Stack Height  —  This parameter specifies the  height of the
stack above the ground (meters).

Stack  Exit  Temperature  —  This  parameter  specifies  the
stack exit  temperature  in degrees  Kelvin.  If this value is
less than the ambient air temperature for a  given  hour, the
program  sets  this  parameter  equal  to  the  ambient  air
temperature.

Stack Exit Velocity —  This parameter  specifies  the stack
exit velocity  in meters per second.

Stack Diameter — This  parameter  specifies  the inner stack
diameter  in meters.

Building  Height  — This parameter specifies the height of .a
building  adjacent  to this  stack (meters).  A negative value
of  HB  (or  the selection of  the  regulatory default  option)
instructs  the program   to  use  the  revised  building  wake
effects procedures,  which uses either  the methods of Huber
and Snyder or  those  of Schulman and  Hanna, depending on the
stack  height   to  building  height   ratio  (see   Section
           HL*     Building  Length  — This parameter specifies the length of a
                   building  adjacent  to this stack (meters).

           HW*     Building  Width —  This  parameter specifies  the  width of a
                   building  adjacent  to  this  stack (meters).   The  effective
                   width  used by the program  is  the diameter  of  a circle of
                   equal  area to the  rectangle  given by  HL and HW.   Regulatory
                   applications  generally  require  the  use  of the  "maximum
                   projected width".   In order for  the  model  to actually use
                   the  maximum projected  width (MPW) in  its calculations, it
                   is  necessary to  enter  HL = HW  = 0.886  *MPW  (see  Section
                   2.4.1.1.d).   The parameters  HB,  HL,  and  HW are  used in the
                   Huber-Snyder wake  effects calculations.
 * If non-zero values are  entered  for parameters HB,  HL, and  HW,  the program
 automatically uses  the  building wake  effects  option (see Section 2.4.1.1.6).
 However, if HB,  HL,  and  HW are not punched, or  are  equal to "0", wake effects
 for the respective source  are  not  considered.
                                      3-20                                12/87
-------
Volume-Source
  Parameters

           H
       SIGZO
       SIGYO
Center Height —  This  parameter specifies the height of the
center of the volume source above the ground (meters).

Initial Vertical  Dimension — This  parameter  specifies the
                   initial  vertical  dimension  o
                   (meters).
                                zo
                                    of  the   volume   source
Initial  Horizontal  Dimension —  This parameter  specifies
the initial  horizontal  dimension  ovo  of  the  volume  source
(meters).
Area-Source
 Parameters
           H
          XO
Gravitational
   Settling
  Category
  Parameters

         PHI
         VSN
       GAMMA
Effective  Emission Height  —This parameter  specifies the
effective emission height of the area source (meters).

Area  Source  Width — This parameter  specifies  the width xo
of the square area source (meters).
Mass Fraction — This parameter is  an array which specifies
the  mass  fraction  of   particulates  for  each  settling
velocity  category.   A maximum of  20  values per  source may
be entered.

Settling  Velocity  —  This   parameter is  an  array  which
specifies     the     gravitational     settling    velocity
(meters/second)  for  each settling  velocity  category.   A
maximum of 20 values per source may be entered.

Surface  Reflection  Coefficient  —  This  parameter  is  an
array  which  contains the surface reflection coefficient for
each  settling velocity  category.   A  maximum  of  20  values
per source may be entered.
 Direction Specific
 Building Dimensions

          BH*
          BW*
 Direction  Specific  Building Height — This  parameter  is an
 array  of  36  direction  specific building  heights starting
 with a  10  degree flow vector  and incrementing by 10 degrees
 clockwise  to  360  degrees.   A  negative  value  for  a given
 direction  is  used  to  denote  the  lower bound  wake  effects
 calculations.    This  parameter   is   only  used  when  the
 Schulman-Scire wake  effects method is used.

 Direction  Specific  Building  Width  — This  parameter  is an
 array  of  36  direction  specific  building  widths  starting
 with a  10 degree flow vector and incrementing by 10 degrees
 clockwise  to  360 degrees.  This  parameter  is only used when
 the Schulman-Scire wake  effects  method is used.
 *These  parameters are read only  if HB  is negative or if the regulatory default
 mode  has  been  selected.
                                      3-21                                12/87
-------
Source Emission
Rate Scalars

         QTK     Source  Emission Rate  Scalars  — This  parameter is  applicable
                only to   sources  whose   emission   rates  are  multiplied   by
                variational  scalar  values.   If  parameter ISW(23)  is greater
                than zero,  this  parameter applies  to   all   sources  in   the
                problem run.   If parameter ISW(23) equals zero, this parameter
                is  read by the  program for each  source  for which the parameter
                QFLG is  greater than zero.   If  both parameters  ISW(23)  and
                QFLG equal zero for  all sources, this parameter is  not read  by
                the program.   This  parameter is  an array which  contains  the
                source  emission  rate   scalars  used  to  multiply  the  average
                emission  rate  of  a  (all)  source(s).   The format  in which  the
                scalar  values  are  entered depends  on   the  value  of  either
                parameter   QFLG    or   ISW(23)    (whichever   parameter    is
                applicable).   If this value  equals  "1", enter  four  seasonal
                scalars in the order  of  Winter,  Spring,  Summer, and Fall.   If
                the QFLG  (or ISW(23))  parameter has  a  value of  "2",  enter  12
                monthly scalar  values beginning with  January  and ending with
                December.  If  the  value equals "3",  enter 24 scalar  values  for
                each hour of the day  beginning  with the   first  hour  and  ending
                with the twenty-fourth hour.  If  the  value  equals  "4",  enter
                six sets  of  scalar  values for  the six  wind  speed  categories
                for a  total  of 36  scalar values.    Each of  the   six  sets  of
                scalar  values  represents a Pasquill  stability beginning with
                category A and ending  with category F.  Each set is  started on
                a  new  card  image.    If   the  value equals  "5", four  sets  of
                scalar  values  are  entered where  each  set contains  24  hourly
                values  (analogous to  a value  equal to "3" option) for a total
                of 96 scalar values.  The four sets of scalar  values represent
                the four  seasons  in  the  order  of Winter, Spring, Summer,  and
                Fall.   Each  set is started on  a  new card  image.


    f.  Hourly  Meteorological  Data.   These data may be  entered in one  of  two

formats  (governed  by the value entered  in parameter  ISW(19)).  One  format is

that  generated by  the preprocessor program.   This  format  usually  resides  on

magnetic tape  where the  tape  device  is externally associated  with the logical

unit  specified by parameter IMET. All hourly data required by the program  are

contained  on the  tape.   The  other  format  is card image.  Tha following data

are required for each  hour  only when the card  image  format  is chosen  by  the

user.   Recall  that with the  card  image method,  the  calm  winds  processing

routine and  regulatory default options cannot be used.

     Parameter Name

       JDAY      Julian Day  —  This  parameter specifies  the Julian Day of this
                 day of meteorological data.   This  parameter   is  read  by  the
                 program  for only the first  hour  of  data for each  day.  This
                 parameter is  ignored  for the second  and successive  hours  of
                                       3-22                                12/87
-------
 JDAY     each day of  data.   This parameter  is  used by  the program  to
 Cont.     determine the  month or season  if  required  by other  program
          options.   The default value  equals  "1"  (Julian Day  1):

  AFV     Wind Flow  Vector  —  This  parameter  'specifies  the  direction
          (degrees) toward which  the wind is  blowing.

  AWS     Wind Speed  —  This  parameter  specifies  the mean wind  speed
          (meters/second)  measured at the  reference  height specified  in
          parameter ZR.

  HLH     Mixing  Height  —  This  parameter specifies the  height of  the
          top of  the surface mixing layer (meters).

 TEMP     Ambient  Air  Temperature  —  This  parameter   specifies   the
          ambient air temperature (degrees Kelvin).

DTHDZ     Vertical  Potential Temperature Gradient  (Optional)  —  This
          parameter   specifies    the   vertical   potential   temperature
          gradient  (degrees  Kelvin/meter)  for a  given  hour.   The  value
          for this  parameter is   used  by the program  only  if  parameter
          ISW(22) equals "3".

  1ST     Pasquill  Stability Category  — This  parameter specifies  the
          Pasquill stability category.   A value  of  "1"  equals  category
          A, "2"  equals B, "3"  equals  C,  etc.

    P     Wind Profile Exponent   (Optional)  —  This parameter  specifies
          the wind  profile exponent  for a given hour.   The value  for
          this  parameter  is  used  by  the   program  only  if  parameter
          ISW(21) equals "3".

DECAY     Decay  Coefficient  —   This   parameter  specifies   the  decay
          coefficient   (seconds"1)   for  chemical  or  other   removal
          processes  for a  given  hour.    This  parameter  overrides  any
          value   entered   in  parameter  DECAY   described   earlier   in
          Section 3.1.2.b.   If the regulatory default  option is  chosen
          (ISW(28)  =  1}   and  S02  is  modeled  in an  Urban  mode,  the
          program  assigns  a decay coefficient  corresponding  to a  half
          life  of  four   hours.    Otherwise,  pollutant   decay  is  not
          considered.
                                3-23                                 12/87
-------
    3.1.3  Output Information




    The  ISCST  program  generates  six  categories  of  program  output.    Each




category is optional  to  the  user.   That is,  the  user controls what output the




program generates for a given  problem run.  In the following  paragraphs,  each




category of output  is related  to the input  parameter that controls the  output




category.  All program output are printed except for the output to disc file.









    a.   Input  Parameter  Output.   The  user  may  desire  to  see  all   input




parameters  used by  the  program.   If input  parameter  ISW(6)  equals  "1",  the




program  will  print  all  program  control  input  parameters,   meteorological-




related   and   information   constants,    receptor   data   and   source   data,




additionally, if parameter ISW(6)  equals "2", the program will  also print all




hourly meteorological data processed by the program for a given problem run.









    b.   Daily  Concentration  (Deposition)  Output.   This  category  of  output




prints calculated values of average concentration or  total  deposition for each




day  of meteorological data  processed by the program for  a  given problem run.




For  each day, tables consisting of  average  concentration or  total deposition




values  at  each receptor  point are printed for all combinations of user-defined




time  periods  and source  groups.   For example,  suppose  combinations of 1-,  3-,




and   24-hour  time  periods   and  five  source  groups   (NGROUP  equals  "5")   are




specified  and input parameter IPERD  equals  "0".   Thirty-three tables would be




generated  by all  time  period  intervals  (twenty-four  1-hour  tables,  eight




3-hour  tables,  and  one 24-hour table) for  a total of  165  tables for all source




groups  for each  day of meteorological  data.   Input  parameters ISW(7) through




ISW(14)  and   IPERD  specify the   time   periods   and  time  period   interval,




respectively, for  which average concentration or  total  deposition values  are




printed.   The  source group  combinations are  specified  by  input  parameters
                                       3-24
-------
NGROUP, NSOGRP, and IDSOR.   Input  parameter ISW(16)  controls the employment of




this output category.








    c.   "N"-Day Concentration  (Deposition)  Output.   This  category  prints  the




average concentration  or  total deposition  calculated over the  number  of days




("N")  of   meteorological  data  processed  by  a  given  problem  run.    Tables




consisting  of  average  concentration  or  total  deposition  values  at  each




receptor point are  printed  for all  source group  combinations defined -by  the




user with  input parameters  NGROUP,  NSOGRP,  and IDSOR.  Input parameter ISW(15)




specifies  the use  of this  output category.









    d.   Highest,  Second-Highest and  Third-Highest Concentration  (Deposition)




Output.   This  category  prints  tables  of the  highest,  second-highest  and




third-highest average  concentration  or total  deposition values calculated at




each receptor point.   Tables are  produced for  all user-defined combinations of




time periods  and  source  groups.   For example,  suppose  3-  and  8-hour  time




periods   and   ten   source   groups   {NGROUP   equals  "10")   are   specified.




Thirty-three tables would be produced by all time periods (tables  of  highest




values and tables  of  second-highest  values and tables of third-highest values)




for a  total of  330 tables for  all source groups for the  example problem run.




Input parameters ISW(7) through ISW(14),  and NGROUP, NOSGRP, and IDSOR provide




user control of the desired time periods and source  groups,  respectively.  The




employment of this output  category is controlled by input parameter ISW(17).









    e.   Maximum 50 Concentration (Deposition Output).   This  category  produces




tables  of the  maximum 50  average  concentration or  total  deposition  values




calculated  for the  problem run.    Each  table  prints  the  maximum 50  values




including  when and at  which receptor each value  occurred.   Tables  are printed
                                      3-25
-------
for all user-defined combinations of  time  periods and source groups  which are




specified by input parameters  ISW(7)  through ISW(14),  and NGROUP, NOSGRP,  and




IDSOR, respectively.   Input parameter  ISW(18)  controls  the use of this  output




category.








    f.  Concentration (Deposition) Output  to Disc File.   This category  writes




the  results  of  average  concentration  or  total  deposition  calculations  to  a




file whose device  is  linked to the program  through  input  parameter  ITAP.   If




ISW(5) equals  "1", the program writes records of the average  concentration or




total deposition values  for all user-defined combinations of time  periods and




source groups  for each  day of meteorological  data  processed by the program.




Each  record  includes  the   average  concentration or total  deposition  values




calculated  at  each   receptor  point.    Also,  all  concentration   or  deposition




values  generated by  the  "N"-day  output  option (see  category   c  above)  are




written to  disc only  _if the  "N"-day  output option (ISW(15)) is exercised by




the user.




    An  illustration  of  each of the  above  print output  categories  is shown in




Section  3.2.4.   Also  discussed is  the order  in which the  tables  and file




records are generated for each output category.








3.2 User's Instructions  for the ISCST Program




    3.2.1  Program Description




    The   ISC   short-term   (ISCST)   program   is   designed   to   use  hourly




meteorological  data  to  calculate  concentration or  deposition  values produced




by emissions  from multiple stack, volume, and  area  sources.   The receptors at




which concentration  or  deposition values  are calculated  may be defined on  a




 (X,  Y)  right-handed  Cartesian coordinate  system  grid  or an  (r,  6)  polar




coordinate   system   grid.    The   polar    coordinate   system   defines   360






                                       3-26                                12/87
-------
degrees as north (positive Y-axis),  90  degrees  as east  (positive X-axis),  180

degrees as  south  and  270  degrees  as  west.    Discrete  or arbitrarily  placed

receptors  may  also be defined  by the  user using  either  type  of  coordinate

system.  When  a  polar coordinate  system  is used it should be  remembered that

an origin  at (X=0,  Y=0)  is assumed.  This program also has the user  option of

assigning  elevations above mean  sea  level to each source  and  receptor as well

as receptor height above  local  terrain  elevations.   The stack, volume  or area

sources may  be individually located anywhere,  but must be referenced  using a

Cartesian  coordinate system  relative to the origin of the  receptor coordinate

system.

    Average concentration or total deposition values may be calculated  for 1-,

2-,  3-,  4-,  6-,   8-,   12-,   or   24-hour  time  periods.    "N"-day  average

concentration  or  total  deposition  values  for   the  total  number   of  days  of

meteorological data  processed  by the  program  may also  be computed  for each

receptor.   Average concentration or total deposition values may be  printed for

source groups, where a  source  group consists  of any  user-defined  combination

of sources.

    The ISCST  program accepts  hourly  meteorological  input  data  in  either of

two options.   One  option reads  hourly  meteorological  data  from  a  disc file,

magnetic  tape  unit  or other similar  external   input  device.   These  data are

read in a  format  compatible with  the meteorological data format generated by

the preprocessor  program.  The  other  option reads  hourly meteorological data

from cards  in  a  card image  format.   Note,  the regulatory default  option and

the calm processing  option  are  not available when meteorological  data is input

with cards.

    The  ISCST program  produces  several categories of  output of calculated

concentration  or deposition  values.  All categories of output  are  optional to

the user.   Average  concentration or total deposition values may be  printed for

all receptors for all combinations of time intervals and  source groups  for any
                                      3-27                                12/87
-------
number of  days  of meteorological  data.   The  average concentration, or  total




deposition values  calculated  over an "N"-day  period may be  printed for  all




source groups  defined  by the  user.   Also,  the  highest,  second-highest  and




third-highest average  concentration or total  deposition values  calculated at




each receptor for  all  combinations of time  periods and  source  groups may be




printed.   The maximum  50  calculated average concentration or  total  deposition




values may  also be  printed  for all  combinations  of time  periods and  source




groups defined by  the  user.   The program may also generate an output tape file




consisting of  all  calculated  concentration  or  deposition  values  for  each




receptor  for  each user-defined  combination  of time periods and  source  groups




for each  day of  meteorological data  processed  by the program.   Additionally,




all  average  concentration  or  total  deposition  values calculated  over  an




"N"-day period  may be  written to  the  output tape  file  for all  user-defined




source groups.




    The ISCST  program  is  written in FORTRAN  77.    Its  design assumes that  4




Hollerith  characters  can  be  stored  in  a  computer word.  The  basic program




requires  about 26,500  UNIVAC 1100 Series 36-bit  words.   Another  43,500  words




of  data storage  are currently allocated for  a  total of   70,000 computer words.




With this current allotment of executable storage, the program may be run with




up  to approximately 400  receptors and 100  sources.  The card  reader or input




device to this program is  referenced  as FORTRAN logical unit 5  and the printer




or  output device as logical  unit  6.   The ISCST program  is  composed of  a main




program  (ISCST),  eighteen subroutines  (INCHK,  MODEL,   DYOUT,  MAXOT,  MAX50,




VERT,  SIGMAZ,  ERFX, URBNYZ,  XVY, XVZ,  URBBAR,  AVCALM,   NMCALM,  MPR1, VRTRHT,




BLP, and  CUBIC)  and  a  BLOCK DATA subprogram (BLOCK).  The source  codes for all




of  these  routines are  listed  in  Appendix A.   Appendix E contains a logic  flow




description of the ISCST  program.











                                      3-28                                 12/87
-------
    3.2.2  Data Deck Setup

    The card input  data  required by the ISCST  program depends on  the  program

options  desired by  the  user.   The  card  input data  may be  partitioned  into

seven  major  groups  of card  input.   Figure  3-1  illustrates the  input  deck

setup.  The seven card input deck groups are itemized below:


    (1)  Title Card (1 card)

    (2)  Program Control  Cards (2 cards)

    (3)  Receptor Cards

    (4)  Source Group Data Cards (optional, required only if NGROUP > 0)

    (5)  Meteorological-Related and Model Constants Cards

    (6)  Source Data Cards

    (7)  Hourly  Meteorological  Data  Cards  (optional,  required only  if
         ISW(19) = 2)


Example  input  data  for  the  ISCST  program  are presented in  Appendix C.   A

description of  the  input  format and contents of each of the seven card groups

is provided below in Section 3.2.3.a.



    3.2.3  Input Data Description

    Section   3.1.2   provides   a  summary  description  of   all   input   data

requirements of  the ISCST  program.   This  section  provides  the user with the

format  and order  in  which the  program requires  the input data.   The  input

parameter  names used  in  this  section  correspond to those  used  in  Section

3.1.2.   Two  forms  of  input data  are  read by  the program.    One  form  is  card

image  input data (80 characters per record) in which all required  input  data

may  be  entered.   The other  form  is  magnetic  tape  which contains  hourly

meteorological  data  in a  format generated by  the   preprocessor  program.   Both

forms  are discussed below.
                                      3-29
-------
                              (7)   Hourly Met.
                                   Data Cards
                        (6)   Source Data
                             Cards
            I
         f

'(5) Met. -Related
and Model
Constants Cards
(4) Source Group
Data Cards
Receptor Cards


s
iMBMBH

J
    1
(2)Program Control
     Cards
(I)Title Card
                                                 optional,
                                                 required
                                                 only if
                                                 ISW(19) - 2
                                       optional,
                                       required
                                       only if
                                       NGROUP > 0
FIGURE 3-1.   Input data deck setup  for  the  ISCST program.
                               3-30
-------
    a.   Card Input Requirements.   The  ISCST program reads all card image input




data in a fixed-field format  with the use of  FORTRAN "A",  "I",  "F", AND  "E"




editing codes.   The  card  input  data  are partitioned  into  seven card  groups




which are discussed  in Section  3.2.2.b  and shown  in Figure  3-1.   The  input




parameters  contained  in  Card  Groups  (2)  and  (4)  correspond  with  those




described in category "a" of Section 3.1.2.   Moreover, Card Groups  (1)  and  (5)




correspond with categories  "b"  and "c.",  Group  (3)  with category "d",  Group  (6)




with category "e"  and Group (7) with category "f".   Table 3-4 is a list  of  all




card  image   input data  which  may  be  entered.    For  each  input  parameter,




Table 3-4 provides the Card Group  (and the  card number within  the  Card Group,




if possible), parameter  name,  card columns  within which the  value of the input




parameter must  reside,  FORTRAN  editing  code   and  a  brief   description  which




includes  default  values  or maximum values  allowed,  if  applicable.   The order




in which  the  input  parameters are  listed in Table  3-4  is the order  in which




the ISCST program  reads  the input parameters.   The user should note that many




card input parameters  and  even entire Card Groups  are  ignored or not  read by




the program, depending on the options chosen by the user.




    Card Groups (!) and (2) consist of a  total  of three  cards.  Card  Group  (1)




consists  of  one   card and contains  the  parameter   TITLE.    Card  Group  (2)




consists  of  the "ISW" array which  contains  most of  the program's control or




specification  parameters.   Also  contained   in  Card  Group   (2) are  parameters




which specify  the  number of sources  (NSOURC),  the size  of   the  receptor grid




(NXPNTS and  NYPNTS),  the number of discrete receptors  (NXWYPT) and the number




of  source group  combinations  (NGROUP).   The  maximum number  of sources  and




receptors is not  limited  to individual   parameters  but  is  a function of four




parameters.   This function can be described as:






              LIMIT > NPNTS • (NAVG • NGROUP +  2)  + NXPNTS +  NYPNTS




                   + 2 •  NXWYPT + 287 • NSOURC  + A + B + C +  D+E         (3-1)




  "k                                     3-31                                12/87
-------





















w
Q
O
O

H
M

2
J
a. H
S
9 P
OH fa
8
a
cu

H
I/I
U
M


























































0)
52 *O
2 O
W O
S^
O -H
Pn -O
U


•a

(0
o

u
a)
ii
+J
0)
E
(0

m
cu

Cu
3
O
o
•a
u
CJ


















o
rl
4->
Cu
H
Jj
O
03
0)
Q















-U
1
O
fo
01
C

3
rH
O
u


0)
E
(Q.



U
0)

e
2
T3
U
5




















rH
0)
(0
rH

rjj
C
•0
(0
CU
x:

ti
0)
-p
u
(0
u
(0

o
1
o




in
r— 4


O
V0
1
rH





W
lj
EH
M
EH





rH




















C
O

!p C
(0 O
tl -H
1 1 1 J
C -H
CU 01
o O
c cu
O 
a



H




c\J
1
i-H




^
rH
«•*
j5
5/3
M




rH
rg






•0

S "2
0) O\
4J

^HI £• 4J
CQ 0) fO
-P C
•a 01 -H
•H >, TD
U 01 LJ
• o> o
T3 O
i-l -H U
cu (3
CU lj -H

(0 O
•H u e
01 io
(V U U
-P (0 O>
(0 O U
U Cu Cu

It It II
rH (N CO




(N
M




^4
1
co




^
fSj
*^
EC
on
M




I"H
rg


'O
.,-1
u
0i



cu
-p
(0
£3
T3
tj
8
CJ

(0
rH
&


01
cu
-P 01
(0 rH
J_l (fl
Q) -H
C T3
tp ^
01
C 0)
o e
e -H 3
(0 jj 01
u u 01
cr> cu m
CU'O rH
3
II (0
MH
^< CO
Q





























C Vi
(0 «J
•H rH
03 O
0) Cu

(_4
fO
CJ »C
•M
•H
-P
'H
? T3
,Ǥ,
U 
J CU
Q



M




v£>
1
in




^
CO
x^
2*
C/J
M




^
Cv]








03
-M C^
3 O
CU-H
C -M
>
cu a>
m cu

03 C
C -H
O (0
•P U
(0 CU
> -p
cu
rH U
cu O
-p
•H CU
(0 U
i-i 0)
^4 t-l
cu
ij (0
O cu
-P 1-1
cu

U (0
cu u
tl O!
o 2
c cu

II II
O rH




eg
M




CO
1
{•*>.




^
^
^.X
2

M




rH
"
rg













03
CU
^j
CU
S
.,_,

01
C
O

-U
>
cu
i-H
cu
™ 0
(^J
OJ 05
5-4 CU


03 W
U 0}
g"0
ti -P
CUrH
3
II (0
ip.
rH CU
1 Q





























t^ C
O 0)
-U
-P
Ci •'H
O SH
"H 2
4->

U ti
"c a
<" tn
O 5i
5
o ,5

O^G Q
•5 4^) O
C -P £

4J S g

8 -H S1
Tj
03
CU CD ^
i— ^ 3 O
•H rH
•H
4-J C -P
3 O (0
pi .t-H £_|
4J V -P
3 -H C
O 03 CU
Cu C
O CO O
c 'a u

II II
O rH




rg
M



O
rH
1
cn




^.
in

S
w
M




1-1
«.
f^J






















<
£— (
M

4.J
•H

r— t 0}
f^ *U
M P
•rl 3
(Jl 03
O W
C 4J
O rH
3
(0
UH
01
Q





























3-32
-------






















W
8
u

H
M
Q
W
2
,2
H

fa §
M
- H

0£ HH
W Q*
cf ? HO
><>> £8
3 3*

IJ •< Q
« C & 5
H ° EH
"" CU H
W ZJ
Q O
QJ fa
1
Q£
cu

H
CO
O
CO
M




































o
•H
4J
Oj
• H
U
u
01
Q
















2 "S —•
JS O -P
S 4J U
O -H O
fa TJ fa
W ^-
01
c
•0 §
u 3
 tj
ft i o> i— i i— i I-H
rH S-4 03 03 03
U 03 4-1 4-1 4-1
3 O O O
O 03 4-> 4J 4->
-C 4J
OS
•o
U SH U
JJ rH O O O
Oj 03
0) U
O -H
X C7> C C C
 cj ^ O C7> o
t-H-P <1) 03 i— 1 d)(~t— 1 G)03i-H
03 03-^ O £^03O £!^03O £^03O
4J CJ-^T3 -M> M 4->5 01 4->> 01
*OO*i-H4-*Q) 03c01 O 4->01 O 4J01
ft Ij^ftCn £1-1 -H W JS1-1-H01 £U-H01
C4JO 03 130103 130103 I3O103
•HC"H O 1 fl) *— 4
C ft £ CO 03 3 C *—* 'O 3 C oj 'O 3 C n T3 3
03 O3 03 03
II II II 4-4 II II 4-1 II II 4-1 UN 4-1

•-H




Q
rH

^
CO
M



i-H

tM


3-33
-------





































«*< ^
1 Q)
m 3
ta -H
, ~] jj
u










































H
Q
O
O

EH
M
Q
U
2
,5
OH
H
a
O 2
fa O
M
- H
(/> Oi
a M
w a:
EH CJ
W CO
S H
2
r^ U3
g*
P, g_4
M SJ
Q O
OS fa
0 ~
1

CU

EH
CO
&
M




























o
• H
^ i
Pl
•rt
(.4
U

0)
a


















cu
iv ^ "^

s"i
O -i O
fa TJ fa
ta »-

01

•o i
u 3
rO rH
°3
0)
I 1
4) 0)
6 e
<0 n>
2 2
(0
o,
•> U
u, cu
u §
U 2
•O -O
U U
n} m
O 0
rH
(0
-P
O
Jj

1-1
o


c
• ^
U
-P
g

J~
« g^

o 
™ C 0)

3 -2 §
O -P en
A u -H en
1 3 en ro
vO O O
si cu -P
O 1 CU rH

(0
II II M-l
CU
0 rH Q





f\J
M




CM
CM
1

CM

rH
rH
*•*
2
M
M


rH

CM


rH r-H rH i-H rH T3 r- 1
cct (Q (Q to ttj e ^tj
4J 4J 4J -P -P t) U
o o o o o -H
O ^-i
!H '^ "H n
u K ^ ° ° i s
0 ° ° eog _&2
cu o g jj
rH -H O ., CU
C e ^3-^ 01 £ £
5 o o to"3 CU^-H
'U -jj •£ ^-g -° i "o
2 ij i g^S ^§"S>,


c Q)  CJ U OUW-HP
g WC WC 0) U^,c
'OP'O 00*0 OCJt3 S)o^-£ Ojnjujy
O 0) -H<1) -HW fOW OjWtTj^puifTir-tX^
OlCCU tJ CO) t* GO 'O'COJ T3 H C , 3J
u of D oe 2 oe ^oe ajo^. §
3 -H3 O -HQ O -H 3 O*^-H3 O'O'-^ -<
O 4J03 J^UnUOl Xli-i-MW C - 4J W C -U 0]
£ u -H en i 3 -H cn I 3 -H tn -H tn -H oj 01
t 3 W (Q C*J O CO 4H II II <4-l II II <4H
Q) CU CU CU CU
OrH Q OrH Q OrH Q OrH Q OrH Q





(M CM CM CM (N
M rH M I-H M




^J* VO OO O CM
CM CM CM n cn
1 1 1 1 1
CO in f"«  rH
(M CM CM CM CO

rH rH rH rH rH
••i* ^B« «••* ««^ * ^^
J5 S S S 2
W W CO GO W
M M M M M


rH rH r-l rH rH

CM CM CM CM CM


3-34
-------
1
f
~



































*f T3
k! fl\
1
B3
S §
H ^5
O
*""*





















1
F




















w
Q
O
O

EH
M
Q
W

H
06
0 2
fa O
- H
W (i
06 M
u a
EH O
W 00
2 W
< a
< a
CH
5 -
a H
^4

2
§o
&4
^, 'N^
U
8
a
cu

EH

M




























c
o
•H
4J
Oi
•H
U
U
U
0)
a













0)
^y ^3 ^"^
S ® 4J

H e
06 -U U
O -H O
fa TD fa
W —

CO

•o g
ij 3
3'2 -H ,. mu
•-nmuo ^j^ ^.jg
J3 >— * T1 T5  „ t< ti -U
u»_, -a ^>S°^ °* *
0)™--" ^ ^3(02 _.T3
ww3 'i -H o
10 S , in ,_ o S^-H
uk §cw £HOI
4Jo° ico "^wo
w °-u » 3§2'0 Ps--^
0)4J Oi-Uoj e -2 Tl C «MO
£WC,ro>icn
JJ4J ^-J -H -H JJ £ JJ 3 C71 3 -U
W t4 O -W O ™ ' ^ "~^ t^ tj O  m !•••
m cn ro


I-- oo ox
M rH M
1f^ ^^ ^^ ,
S S 2
M CO CO
M MM




M rH
rH
s *. v
<^1 CNJ CM




















C C C
O O O
C -H -H -H
O -u -u -u
•H CU QJ Qj
4J O O O
On O
O i-H -l r— H
OS D 3 D 3
(C
II II II II <4-t
CD
o I-H CM cn Q



CM
M





O
«*

O^
cn


0
-------















1
o

EH
M
O
W
5
s
H
Pi
O 2
fa O
^H
- H
VI CL
« M
~* W 05
<* £ I"1 U
11 1 w
W -H ^ /-,
•J -w ffi S
as 11
S5 *^
H ^£
Q*
gg
8
O5


EH
CO
M




























O
**H

•H
o
w
01
Q














0)
|jH £
o: 4-1 u
O -H O
&4 ^3 t*T4
W «-
CO

*° 1

rO i— i
O O
U

3 ^
O §
u 3
C3 2
•O T3
u u
rtJ (0
0 CJ
0) vO T3 C >i i-H «~>i r-i >i

•H j_, (0 O -H 3 -H -H O
^W Q CJ oj 4-J 4jJ 4-J »^ -W 7 4-*

tj rj ^i i— t Q) 1^ (^ d) r—i (— |
Oj -H m 3 4J OO44JOJ3W
5ot<, ^ •* " "° c u '» 0 C ^ ll
I s $ 8 S S OT-^ -8 -S « S
^O J7 I-H fsj ... *^J **^ ^4^ »Q OT (\j
*»z w ^o 5 1 ^*
^* ^4
1 • 1
rH CO



S S
S 3:
CO CO
M M




rH " i-l

pg rg



3-36
-------
»'











FORTRAN EDIT CODE
ION
CO Oi
on M
^ W OS
Mft y
1"
i% M
< Q
me * g
< o ,. "•
EH O g ^
"•' D. EH
s
Q O
OS &4
1
OS
&
H
M










»-
















Description






2 "§ .w
s" i
O -H O

01
q
•Hi
5 0
o
0)
4J
Q) Q)
6 £
ro n)
f-4 55
(Q
Oi
- u
cu d)
3 £1
° i
O 2
-0 T3
U U
0} Oi
o cj
01
0)
u
u
>i O
!H 01
03
> rH
4J 03
2 ,
C (H
O
O »4H
•o
>1
dl rH
O -H
S-i OJ
3 C
mission rates for all so
mission rates vary seaso
dl d)
II II
O rH




M



VO
1
in
•«*


en
CM

^
CO
M




^H
(N


rH
rH
03
01
dl t-l
0 0
O >i
01 03
rH J-l
0) Ol
Ol
O ti

o
1—t
mission rates vary month
mission rates vary each
0) d)
II II
cs co



























"O Vj
C 3
o) O
rj
'O -C
0) CJ
(1) (0
O, 0)
01
•o 2 *
c o
•rj U >i
5 3 rH
o •-*
>," i
S^ rH O
ources
mission rates vary 1
tability category for al
mission rates vary seas
w  03 C

•o'S °
0) '= 01
•u S 3
C
0) -
*^ (U
d) *H r*
rH >
m
er day
It assumes 0. A zero v
eter allows the user to
individual sources by
eter QFLG.
& 3 e e
0} 03 Ol
4H U S-l (j
d) 0) O rtJ
Q OiM-l O*



























rH
rH
0)


o
M-4
d)
01
•H



d)
3
rogram uses final pi
Oa
II
rH




(N
I-l



CO
1



5"
CM
HM,*
S
CO
M




rH
CM


UH
O

^
O
•i
j_i
O
4->
OJ
•-H
Cn
d)
d)
"^
C
dl
£

It assumes 1
parameter is set to 1
It option ISW(28)=1.
3 3
03 01 03
4-1 -H 4-1
d) £ 0)
Q EH T3












•














O O
4J 4->


10 n-,
O) "
• H d)
li i -H
• H 4H
o 1
i
4->
c <"
OJ
u
m Si
hysical stack heights ;
ccount for downwash
hysical stack heights
ccount for stack downwasi
CU Oi Qj OJ
II II
rH CM




M



O
in
I
o\


in

^^
s
CO
M




rH
(N


•>i
(-1
O
4-J
i-H
3
cn
O)
O)
i i
+•*
C
O)
r^
"5

It assumes 1
parameter is set to 2
It option ISW(28)-1.
OJ U) 03
<4H -H 4H
d> £ O)
Q H TD






























r-1
o
• H
C W
O '-!
•H GJ
W Cj
u m
O) -H
CU T3
01
•H 73
T3 O)
u
T3 3
0) T3
U E
3 '-'
rogram uses buoyancy-ind
rogram ignores buoyancy-
Qj di
11 II
rH (N!




rsi
M



rxj
IT)
I
i-H
m


\c
CM
_,,
^
CO
M




1-1
(N


3-37
-------







§
o
o
EH
M
S
gg
M
CO CU

-. W «
leu S M
W -H £5 _
J 4J 5- g
« c ^ 5
< 0 ,. •<•
HO E _
iT3
C U (0
•H O 
01 rH
3sl»
= 0) 4-1 "
« S 0
14 « O CU
cn £ cu
O S 4J (0
U CUrH 4J
CU 3
01 to £
II -H 14-1 O
£ cu u
rg H "O <«









































jJ
• rH
01 3
CU 10
U 14-1
3 0)
4-* 'O
m
tory default fe
the regulatory
(0
's o>
4J
"I
"I
01 •
01
£ £ cu
m iti s-i
t4 U 3
O> O^ 4J
O O (0
U U Q)
Pi Q4 'i i
II II

•H r>i




eg
M








VO
in
i
in
in





^•t
oo

^
CO
M




rH

s
eg



01
•H


O
CO

being modelled
ant other than
4-1
01 3
•H --I
rH
N 0
o cu
CO
sh
3 M -1
01 w iH
01 2 CU
m m t3
o
£ £ £
oj n)
!j !-i Ol
Cn O> C
O O -H
14 tj CU
Oj Qj f^
II II

IH rg




rg
M








OO
in
i
f**
in





^M>
er>

^
CO
M




rH


eg







cu
•O
jQ
0) CU
*O 'O
£ 4J
3
o> cu
3 C
XI -H
CU
T-3 C
fO
4-1
3 
•H
X
(0 g
CU
4-* jj O*
c u
•H 0) O
01 4-1 CU
jj CU
c , u
o 2
T|3 ^*» "
• r^ UJ
^ c\2
^" u
0 V-H
s-i tn
cu cu cu
XI O* 3
§C i— t
fl3 fl
2 t4 >




^D
M








eg
rH
1
r^fc






*
CO

cu
VJ
*




f\J

S
eg



<4-t O
O !"4
CU
!-i N
CU
3
c
Cn
01
•H
.S •« o
4->
4J « QJ
t« ^
-o 2 °
BIS
U-l c "n.
•H -H
Ul 4J
CU O 0)
X! cu 3
§S»] pH
•H (0
2 T3 >




*4O
M








OO
rH
1
en
i—t





«
CO
EH

^
*




eg


eg



0)
3
• — i
m
0
S-j
cu
N
4J 4J
c c
•H ^
o o
a a,
f, '*-*
It
57 <»»
0 U
cu <"







pa ramp
U U '
ss I
OJ ;_, i
Ss S
-2 TJ r:
"^ H-1
«* § ' -.4
O o
07 , 4-(
S-i CU
CU -H £
XI >H rt)
§Pj J_4
£ O1
2 -H




V^
M






o
^
i
V
^
X?

T^
01
^;
O
rH
fO
O)
1 fC

^
O4
i
O^
rH





*
fH
Ql
£?
r^
2




C*^


(N



^>

£
•^
Z.

X
i
CU
4-1
14
O


^~*
rH
m
**-"
5
4-J
(tj
3
O1





*
3-38
-------









W
Q
O
O

H
M
Q
W
£
O 2
fa O
M
oa cu
u a
H o
W CO
2 Q
a, 2
CU H
HH £
Q O
C^ fa
1
Q£
CU

H
U
M






















C
o
• H
-P
ft
•H
!j
O
(0
(1)
a











i I
0) 0)
€ e
to a
LI 2
(0
CU
- u
CU 0)
3 ^O
o §
I-l 3
O 2
T3 ^3
S-i U
m m
0 O
' 0)
0)
C
o
If
JJ 'd
nj 5 o
• H .. iH
8 £, u
Q
|S|

tj  m


M
%


O
m
I
in


CU

^J
0$
o
2




(N

  rtJ  
           -Hai
vO

 I
 H
 O4
 
                     "8
           t-t   •
           
-------
                        o
                       •H
                       -CJ
                        cu
                       •H
                        Ll
                        U
                        01
                        0)
                       Q
 I  1)

<"§
S3
        <
                     cu
                     •a —
                     o ^j
                     O  (0
                     •H  O
                     -p b
                        01
                        c
                     HJ .-I
                     °6
                     Ll
                     (U
                     -u
                     CD 4)
                     e E
                     (0 (0

                     5s*
                     cu
                      - Ll
                     CU 0)


                     si
                     U 2

                     -o -a
                     u u
                     (0 (0
                     u o
                                         OOX-U
                                                                    & ti  c: a> e en  »
                                                                    C O  O -U O H C
                                                                   •H   -H fl -H 2 0)
                                                                         > -O 0)
                                                           -H
                                                         u^;

                                                         a) 4J
                                                                                         3 a)
                                                                                         C a)
                                                                                         ° >
                                                                                        CJ S


                                                              S

go
m
                                       o
                                                            a)

                                                         <»
                                                 'Hu-HCa>Lic:.CmC.CnJ
                                                                      -P t/3

                                                                    01 (!) §
                                                                   •H U CU
                                                                   x: a) x
                                                                            o
                                                                            u —
                                                                              0)
                                                                                      c
                                                                                    W ••-(  01
                                                               a>

                                                               cu
                               o

                               o


                               oo
                                    o

                                    o
                                    r-l
                                    b
                                    ao
                               o
                               00
                                I
                               §
                               M
                               OS
                                                                   o
                                                                   ao
                                                                    I
                                       0)
                                       4J
                                       (I)
                                       U
                                       u
                                       01
                                       •H
                                       •o
                                    N I

                                    es

                                    gs
                                                                    ro


                                                                    n
                                                      3-40
-------
«•
^B


















<* ^am
1
w -JW
J 4J
OQ C
HU
~ v« /



























V ! I C-HOi4JQ)CH-^ • O m O O 0 O w u u t3









1
CJ
H
I-l
Q
(M
H
Oi
O 2
fc, O
)—|
» H
C/3 Cb
aL_J
F"I
U OS
HCJ
W
u
Q
«Q
01 5
H2
5 -*
a H

h-4 2
ci2
§2
<^^
^^
o
8
a
a,

EH
M









^
•k
•
r



i







escription
Q

•H M-(OJJQ)2-U O <« — • 4J ^. 4J 4J I-i (TJ (TJ Q) i
c^w-HCC£o,c- s a fn acua) uu
•HCH --lOIEnXSTJ .. 73 W  ]
<4-i-H2 *o 2 at n-"us^uu_,
S:'*W
*!5«&-!J8iS sssl .s"N".5«g&
Li ff--1 «-"-• 'H4J^'nj^Q,m>S4-'
.M2^S.2 «•« 8- 22& «£-slS22§
S|--&i-SSr S 5§8&« g^2^^.^
'o!.?^* U3ti-u gUus^a)^ >5s
!saa.cs»«-s !^«2£«-. .s?«a
^ m -UO' *- ^ to 0 *i jjC— CX"1"1^
: m u "0 u to -^ o> = au2I-CwOo30°-:; £ i
a o 5 o c 4J c a> (Dhoo.H-HQj-H^^ -^ 1







0)
2 o -u
a u  u
Oi «
3 J3
0 g
u 5
U 2
•O -O
u u
33
4JW4J.HCJC/3"HWQJ Lj*-' •H»n-iJQJ4-' w.
CUUCU'O>> C>
•rH QJ ^J U Q -^ Qj fQ ^H ^H Q) CJ ^ ^J LJ flj CJ O ^^ ^ ^
£(UOtO HWrHI|r-ir-tT3«-
-------



,















1
u
H
M
§
2
g.
b O
M
- H

OS M
*-* W 05
1 CD H W
00 c 3 Q
a« i§
*c o £_,
" *^ ^ ^^
*~ ft EH

§s
i
06
ft

EH
CO
M




























C
o
•H
4J
ft
• i-t
U
o
01
O)
Q










2 "O <•»
(2 O 4-)
c2 c_) co
S^ B
O -H 0
03

*V3 £
LI 3
(Q ^H
O Q
u
(I)
4J
i i
2 2
<0
ft
- u
ft 0)
° i
U IS
^3 ^D
u u
(0 (0
o o
"O I-H • >i 4-1 — .£4.10} S-i • *O
C CO — * 4-> O N 4-> ^ !-i OWC
(0 -H U -H 4-130) 4J 4-1 It)
4-> 0) <-H — -H CO 4-> U'H
C t * '^H f\ M--I tfrf Q) ^ C r*
^* O 0$ _O zi ^j Q) £ *|_.| 3 rt
H 0 -^ 5 *" J OiQm C'H
_ a.S w u -| | ^ §«2

(N^t2 1-^.S J22-1-1
'^ m 0) i-H CO *i fl) ni
^U^>'~1'O Q)t-l S*O >_U
g.H -Hti 0<" jj8C CnC
ii ^j 3 (0 C* ^ TI fl) flj O O Q
Ut ^^ CJ Q) ® m U **^ U
^7 P rtj Q: !_i *•* — 1 1 i 05 AI (U , j_j
tj ^U tj * -^ 'e o
Ot ^4 to (u ^ oo ^SM~I
v^ (1) ~j j-« 4J ^
'doo'dxww -p1^^ «
Q ^^ -HCDQ) OJ ^ «^*o
01 3 •*•* *^ d) ii i ^** . O ifi _j
fc, ^Ht4 « I O . 'H-W
"^0)01 *0 «3 win £ x
JjjjJ >o< o»w -oS .^jj
uwS^vo^ <0 §^oC o!2 «« s <» .t{

1 " | o S 1 1 • « 1 rt' c ^^S-S
^OOlJ O tj W00) U--IO
(NO) cjit-o i-io) s-i SOT t-io3^
(fl^^CUQ) Q)4J QJ'OS 0) CO
•H S e S-i 4J  b U 4-> U^* pq 3 CO ft H-HQrH



o o o o

o o o oo
rH r-4 rH W
vo in

o o o
vO •-! vO CO
1 III

1-1

-

W CO
9 t!
Z M.
Q N D H

W
0) g m
i * §
<0 QJ -H
0) >1
01 •-* rO
•H 0) ft U
X! £  ^ (j
•H " "i" ^
W rn S ,
fO C ro
4H ° U
"S ^ -"H "Jo
| yj 1— ' £Q (~
t^ 4J 0 0 O
•H .H U ft 4J
C 0) O) 3
< 3 W t3 fO





^4
tn


CO
OJ
I

rH




g
O»
M


c>
^H
tn


3-42
-------
Description
    OJ
<  O


1°
O  -^  O
fa  TJ fa
    W •—
 OJ  r-\



°<3
 0)
4J
 
-------










I
H
M
Q
H

O S
fe O
M
co cu
wS
T S E w
00 § 1°
32 So
« c °* 3
< 9 H
^ J3 ^*«
"* Cu H
M 2
3
O O

i
§

Pi

H
CO
£_}
CO
M































Description









01
J? O i '
K U W
S 4-> S
O -H O

fe J§ b

01
e
•o §
s-i 3
(0 rH
CJ O
QJ
»



u
0)
4J
Q) <1)
£ g
Q n)

(0
o>

v bl
p, d)
3 X)
o e
u 3
u s

^3 Tl5
(0 ITJ
U 0
U >l
O) rH
4J tl
u o
X
II -^
^
4J (0
O) 4-1
E 01









































U 14 £
Ol "H O
4J ITJ 4J
w u i
04^
-If
II
5^5 g
so ffl
HH -™* £
s*.6"1
<4-t rH
••H C
meter is not read
(last two digits o
leteorological data.
<0 £
Ui t-i
 e









































!H
o
4-1
§ Cn
C 4J
§-s
•H 
n) -H
U 4J
•H .H
*«-t 01
•H O
unique source iden
em run. Must be a
I-H
-Q
'_i
0)
4J O)
C £
W 4-'





m
j i







m
i
i-H












O
to
SB




£
1— 1

^
vO











-type source
e-type source
type source
•» 5 i
o 3  (0
II II II
O rH rg





rH
L j








u3











U
o.

H
M




*
rH

S
VO

Ol 01 i
Ol-H T3

1 Q O
M Q
O M,
01 i-l
01
0 w §•
01
rH (11
C ^
O
ni
rameter pertains
with building waki
or left blank.
rrt
1?
01 T3
0) CD
U !H
01 t-i 0)
•H 3 4J
JC O C
EH 01 0)





rH








p^












pa
^/
j^
s




^
rH

^
vO

rH i-l
O
lj_| *->
M 73
O rH
rr] 4J rH
m ti '
-H S ^
•5 01
u u c
rH C 0
fl 0 "H
S o-u
O)
W : Od
C 0)
tion or deposition
ed, a "lower bou
n is calculated (se
m u o
S-l 0) -rl
4J 4J 4J
C C -H
oi o) 01
u O
C 04
O 01 01
U -H T3









































C7> 4J
C rH
•H 3
4-> <4-l
4J 0)
0) Q
01
rH O
«™
§ II
•rl
4-J 01
(0 3







4-1 O
•H i— 1
(0 03
ie number of gr
s. Maximum number

£ O) O
• H
!H 0!
O cu

«H cn S
01 cu 3
4-1 4-> 01
C (0 01
W U (0





(N







cn
I
CO












CO

Sa







•
01
01
S
'jj

O
a
z
cu
u

^
o
01

£
o
(0
Ol
o
4-1
-O
01
4J
(0
01
O4
01
I-1
01
•H
rQ
u
« rt)
rH

t
o

tn
**

4-1
H
*
3-44
-------
•
k
1
r






























_.
0)
jc
FH
4J
_Q
—































1




















w
Q
O
U

H
M
Q
i
H
§2
fa O
M
» H
W CU
CK M
W Q!
H O
is
< o
< g
§
f_l
Qu H

n JE
Q O
Ctf p4
i^« "*"'*
CJ
2
8
OS
a*

E-t
GO
O
w
M

































C
o
• H
4J
Ol
•H
U
U
0}
0)
Q












•2 TJ ••-
< O 4J
2 o «
H E
OS 4J U
0 • H 0
fa TD fa
w ^-



0)

•c §
u 3
<3 o
u






Ll
0)
4J
E E

oS

- S-i
pi (j)
3 J3
O E
U 2
•O "O
03 Oj
o o
U 4J •
(U 3 O
4-1 CU
W .H I
. (U en

^ W (0
* w (0
^^* O *VI
5" -P 0)
*$ (0 O
CrJ jj
1—1 -H
•o •
^W C (/]
•H .H C
O
T3 **H
d) C -W
t4 O Q|
O -H O
C -P
Cn (0 ti
•H -H O
Ll *4-l
TO (0

CO
i «~
| U M
(0 t.
Ll f*
eL ° 4J
"•H 0)
TO e
TO TO (Q
!c E m
H <3J ft




i-H
M








O
fB-|












S
&




«
|-(
vfi


(U i-i i-i (— ( QJ M-l (U M-ld) Q> O^S-iC
cuooj u o,c ox: co^" woo


^« '( | | * LJ 1-.* | i (Q Q) '| | • rH
1 1 Q) r^ ^3 -_ J|C^ -j, u u]
*O ^5 LJ 'O 5^ 'O Oj ZJ " v '
T5 C (0 W r* rti r* S« -^ QJ ' H
r^Jrt CU ui w« »^i (^ r; c

/rt ^^ ^U J~ tj *"1 '
1 1 s1 « a c ^ c^ i o"s£
iss^t! -S « -« a, fef§i
"c^^^iS^1 'c « i ^ *« i ^3 (. MI
5*0(tJ Cg rflOO UOO "^ oj "^
Hsg (0 3>tn o>w ^^-^ -p.v°
CO»Q ^) ^(Djj^x;
^ti?j'HW^ '""'n'1' — ^  C-^CU
O flj _* 4J <03 tj " ^ t4 O Q) V JJ
CM "HgCPjj (0"^ OJ i1^ S
•gmtna) a) C^J4J c^4J C O 4-> >4J CULlCUaJCn
4j(OpLiLi3*H CJfl)3 UQ)3 0)0) 4->34-'Q4iH
C >iO)OC IJ2O I.CO ^n£ COC>iQ)
W O 4J ft 01 3 X-PTO >H4JTO W ^ HTOO)4-I£



o o o o o

fa fa fa fa fa







OO If) CVJ CO «tf*
r—t f\| CO OO ^J*
1 1 1 . I 1
i-H 
(0
0)
0)
w
'H
T3

iO
U
W
^
•K
                                              3-45
-------
^* T3
 I  01
n 3

M.S
J 4J

§§
1









1
u
H
M
Q
W
5
•s
O 2
fa 0
WETERS,
lESCRIPT]
«j U
b ^
Cu p

H4 S
Q O
Q/ p^
O "*
I
H
M





















C
o
•H
4-1
Oi
•H
Ll
U
01
O)
Q






O)
2 *o *^
S u  o  ,,J i- u
iM "^ .1 ^* W fl)
»O L ^ QJ M t ! TJ
d) ^^ c ^* ^ O ^
^•* ^"^ O U ^J r^
ir co ^j o *H
^» •* « ° H ^
^1 ** *H ,£« ^^ QJ ^H . j
•H r— ( trf lj *O tl
^t*0 OJ Q i U .5 5^ 0) -^jJ
cu ai jj fl e
U £ -U U 0) 0) U D U ft)
ooic oejsocr o--<
fajJO) fa^'4-'U-IU] fo T3



o o o
fa fa fa

O vO (VJ
tn in vo
i i i
in i-i r-
•* in m


CO CO
H > Q






«
i-i « «
r-t ft
\O *-P vO



          IM  <  01 a>   -
          O     tn 0)  <
          S
                        .ca> J->
d  01  o
*  S  C
   o
ti  rn  ni


°   .  «
CQ  ^^  0)
S  T3  u
    •  u


sli
                                     **  C  U


                                     8-.2  8,
                                        jj  en
                                     U  U  O)
                                     O  O)  I-i
                                     4-1  00
                                           O)
                                     «  « -C
                                                                                             I-  Ji  u


                                                                                             5  c£

                                                                                             S.2M
                                                                                                4-) 4J
                                                                                             O)  CU  U
                                                                                             2  O  0)
                                                                                              o
 e C -u

 o 'H
                                     HH J3  0)
3-46
                                               12/87
-------
i-p
CQ _
< 0










H
Q
O
U

H
M
g
H
a
O 2
CM 0
h- 1
CO 0.
OS w









1
4J
a
•H
U
U
01
ai
Q



vw
O

_^
to
u
0)
4-1
0)
c
C ai
u
£ u
*s
* J*
^ u
•5
5 »
u.2
« £
S*
0) 0
4J
*
01 4-1
0) C
U 0)
u U
3 10
O -i-i
W T3
m
0 a-
„ c

«£ O 4J
a cj m
S 4J U
O -H O
fegb





01
c
•o g
u 3
<0 M
" r9
O





u
0)
4J
S S
10 10
u 2
£


«. u
CU 0
2-i
S 1
M ^
U 2. •

•O TJ
t* h
10 10
U CJ




O
•
vO
CM







«*
r~
I
o*
vO









+
«
«
g




*
rH
*
vO



m

vw
O

tn
u
0)
4J
0)
s '«
o
11
* X
s S
5 IS
U 01
a> -i
4-> JC
C 4J
0)
o
» 4-1
01
0 source
adjacent
oi cn
Cu C
>1-H
4J T3
•-1
U -H
O 3
CM -Q





O
•
vO
CM







0
OO
1 •
in
r-










«
«
g




*
|H
*
vO



O Mr*1-'
J- -ft (0
o) 
U U
•0 3 O tO
<0 g «w ^
Q) CQ A
u e " u
C « 0)
4J « 4J 4J
o 2 n c
c '^^ w
O> 3
rn U
" (0 "* •
4J >,
« o 5S °

4J
o
c «o


01 U
•H 0
vw
u
s-
0)
p-s
is
in E
•H O
£ u
H vw





O
•
O
rH
CM
00






0
oo
1
rH


















«
fl
^
VO



u en
0) C
Qj-H
i— t
4-1
4-1
W 0)
u en

'^t «ka
r-4 U
7j m W
*^ iO (^^
1 1 fl» ^^
*^ w c^,
rtl ^S
w ^^
w u
,
nj ^ u
4J T3 O
•H c cn
> O Q)
(0 U 4J
w Q) (C
Cn in u












































O
u
0)
N

in
rH
m
O1
0)

VM
•H
T3
«
0)
U
) 1
o
c


01
•ameter i
u
TO
Oi
in
• H
£
H





O
,
0
rH
CM
oo






o
00
1
rH










^f
*P
QJ
S




«
*

vO



oi £ in |
£ U 0)
4J IT3 3
Q) rH
m
U >
0)
4J CO
C ta >
H O S
vw
U
0)
iven source.
coefficient
ategory. Ent
Cn O
Cn
m c c
§ -H
.2 ^
W TJ 4J
0 u 4J
>w 5 Q)
" <"
^ ^ m
U S
•o o
S-l -rH
rc 4-J
U Ol (0
U 4J
(0 -H
E vw >
O u 
§
Q
CO
2

0)
u
u
3
O
01

X
u
10
0)

u
o
vw
•o
a>
jj
(0
 ni
ro
atically uses
t punched or
e o
o c
4J
3 01
/O t_l
to
£
m ^
u c
cn —
21
^S
0)
1— V
i; J
2 « T3
S ffl O)
M S-1
•o at
c LW t:
(0 -H "1
in
J . C
= u O
U « °
O m 4J
S °
03 S C
CO"
35 3-
•^ Qj
01 S-i
t, m

tt) ^ U
e • u
(0^3
fc. • o
S-^ "
«*« 0)
u • s>
0 N -H
VW 4J
C y
•a o 
? «w
_ « VW
p 4J 0)
U o
2 « «
N lu w
^ ^*< ^^
1 vw (0
S « *
§ .S
Ll ^
<« (0 0
MSI
41
«
£
fC
CJ

to
- ^
H

i
rejected widt
ted width.
a u
a>
§T~I
O
e s-
•H Ol
X
M
i C«
U C
O "^
4J 4J
* -^
i— 1 W
g m
Cn
a* ><
w US

fc. t3
H
§1
r^
« fr
5 o
** 0
« s
^J
0 a)
2 J2
-f

                                                      3-46a
                                                                                           12/87
-------
-------




METERS, FORTRAN EDIT CODE
ESCRIPTION
< a
Q*
< a
a, 2

% ~
^ *•"«»
r>. e_|
b_ ^^
22 <5
s
Q O
C% fa
u ""
i
8
a
Oi

H
W
u
M
M


















Description




(U

2 o -u
H e
a *j u
2-H O
TD b
W «-

01
c
*O £
tl 3
(0 •— 1
U/«\
rx
CJ


h
(U
4J
0) 0)
e E
i c a> i c — u .. 2TJ-V.O) i *j
Enter the source emission rate scalars i:
manner depending on the value of ISW(23) or i
(whichever parameter is available). If ISW
or QFLG = 1 enter 4 seasonal scalars in the o
of winter, spring, summer, and fall (1 card);
= 2, enter 12 monthly scalars beginning
January and ending with December (2 cards); j
3, enter 24 scalars for each hour of the da;
cards); if = 4, enter 6 scalars per card for
wind speed category and 6 cards for each of
six Pasquill stability categories (A-F)
cards); and if = 5, enter 24 hourly scalars
each of the four seasons (12 cards)
• all sources. Otherwise, if ISW(23) > 0 then
or each source for which QFLG > 0.
o^
<4-l T3
03
O 0)
U
1 1
o en
o q'H
r-l f1 13
b fe, U
00 °* flj
f\
T3 U
S M
[y -^
o5
u
o
0 ~-
OO Mil
1 
-------

















w
§
EH
M
§

o2
c2
O 2
b O
M
CO Cu

«• £ P S

m 3 S W
fvl
j jj i< Q
OQ C °* %
< 0 ,_ ""•
EH O g ^
*" CU EH

*""* ȣ
Q O
CC b
d "*
5
2
o
OS
CU

H
CO
o
CO
M "







































§
•H
cu
• rl
u
u
01
cu
a














cu
< O 4J
GS c^ ro
EH E
04 4J i-i
2-H O
TJ b
H ^*



01
G
TJ I

(0 ^^
^J O
o







^4
0)
4-1
01 0)
E €
(0 (0
u S
ro
CU

v U
CU CU
3 J3
0 §
C) Z

TJ TJ
i-4 Ul
m ro
O O
^ g\ r*
rH £ U
!-l 4-> -H
3 JT
0 0) 3
•C 4J
3 01
cu w
4-1 £ U
0 0 ij

ra1 ° w
£J
*^ tJ
OT W
!c ^ o
it ti i
01
4-4 CU
O 01 t,
Jfi'3
^i c*^ £^
rO a)
Q u
(0 a.
c -P !tj
mm
•n TJ ^
3 *H g*
u g
•H fc
CU tjl
•C 0 «H
4J rH O
O
U G
U O O
CU CU 01
4J 4-1 «J
G cu cu
W 6 01






m
M








CO
1















^4
g
1-3


He
HC
•-H
»
^
f-N.















01
0)
^J
(0
S-l
emission
•H
c
o
•H
4J
m
u
m
>
cu
>
ro














































cu cu
s: j=
4-> 4J

F> 2
»» ro
U
5 "^
3 M
3
S-. O
* W i-H
5 "^ co
O *0 »rj
^ 01 2
— > -H
01 CU
cu cu £
CU 3 4J
cu > ja
TJ
-C V*
O 
4-1
5'SC
^ 'O
0) i) C
i S
en
•^ e
U O
CU T) TJ
4J C C
C -H tO
W S U





O
oo
b







V43
i-H
1
















?
S


He
£
rH
v
HC



x^
TJ
C
O
CJ
cu
01

!-t
cu
01
(4
cu
4-J
cu
e _
— N

Ti ^
CU r-«
CO ^*
TJ CU
c u
•H G
3 «»

cu u
[ 1
0) <"
TJ 'O
QJ
1,4
i- 3
CU 01
4-1 (Q
C CU





0
00
b







^J*
fsj
1

i-H














§
<


HC
HC
rH
s
^g
f«»


en
c
• H
^
• H

0)
o
rO
4-1
3
01
cu
£.

4-1
0

CU
o
4J
0)
4J
O
4->
Is
J- CO
cu-S
J= e
4J -^

U t-i
cu cu
-U >1
,S^





O
00
b







ra

1
m















3
33


4C
HC
rH
V
^g
r-


^^
C
•H
^
r-l
CU
^
01
cu
0)
cu
TJ


CU
3
J_l
rO
cu
CU
s
0)
4J
•H '
(0
4J
c
cu
•H
(0
CU
J5
4J

cu
4J
s





o
00
b







o

1
n














Pi
g
EH


4[
4[
1-1
.
HC



• 4-1
n G
cu
•H
rO
(4
(M
f*^ Q)
'sT u
w 5
M (Q
CU

•H g
0)
i i
^i
*~H
§ 2
III
1^
2 *^ ®
s ^
s|I
| > cu
2 cu ^
(0 •*• M
Q. 4J CU
cu
S-i Vj
01 CU O>
• H 4-1 CU
J3 C TJ
EH W -~





0
00
b







00

1
i-H
^1







•




M
Q

Q


HC
41
i— 1
s
1C



II

f*^3

*

n

rH
>1
U
O
o>
0)
i 1
+J
<0
0

•H
1 stabil
I—I
•H
3 —
en •
01 a
(0 4-i
cu a>
0) -
£ U

II
cu m
4J
C -






r-t
1-H








\Q
m
















CO
M


HC
HC
I-H
»
HC








•
01
CU
E
•H
4J
CO
i^
Q
2
T!
0)
4J
(0
CU
CU
cu
u
01
•H
cu
o
0>
u
ro
U
CO
•H
rC
-U
V



&
rH
^**
CO
M

4-)
M

•
rH

Cfi
_
S
CO


4-4
•H

TJ
rO
CU
S-l

4->
O
G

01
•rl

CU
0
o>
TJ
u
rO
U
01
.^
r^
EH
He

























^,
01
CU

4J
CO
OS
^
i


^"1
rO
TJ

0)
4-1
O
j_i
3
O


•C
U
rO
0)

j^i
O
4-1

TJ
CU
4J
(0
CU
CU
(U

01
•rl
TJ

ro
O
01
•H

H
HC
HC
3-48
-------











1
0
H
M
Q
W
EH
Oi
M
- EH
^^ c.0 Q*
^^k (V f-|
•^ H a
rs &&
<*> 3 i a
3!
11 ^i
< o H <
^ " |H

S
Q O
fV fV,
>4! "^
o

§
2
o
Otf
cu

EH
w
o
C/3
M


































ription
u
01
a)
Q









0)
S U iO
EH £
a: 4-1 ia
O -H O
h *O b
W —





01
C
173 i

(Q ^H
o o
o





u
Q)
CD Q)
6 £•
(0 fQ
Sa 2
(0
0-


» la
Oi 0)
3 .0
O 6
Sa 3
U 2
^D ^D
Sa la
(0 (0
U t_>
.
ro


II

^
r— |
 4J 4J X S
£ > S O4
«~> C_) O tn
7 W01Q4J sC'1'
m "tj -H >H <1) "H ?j
l£Ss3H5
8 Sa •£ OJ 0- Sa
s^f&sl
tisas-ss
4J (t *O m 3 r-H
C 4J C ,5 ,„ rH
* 3 0 3 3 <0
•H rH « Wm rH
0-HCT3cU^flC
«4^O4alla>tl'0>l~l
« -|55 -
o * § c 5 N
° 01 * o o w
U-l 01 C CO 4-> ^
>,0<°S| §d
fl . -H S V -C "
S1^: <0ssa<"l><
-!?^°::i
« S S ^ 04 . " ° .
•*-•, 01 3 i-H la Q) .-H
-4-1 r-H 0) O || 0) <4a II
(0 4-> t3 (OOQ(0(OC/1
W UQ OOM O«JSM


O
00
b








ro

1
in
vO


•






^4
r^«
^_)
w
Q



4t
*
rH

>•
[1









01
(U
•H
4J
Q
f^
is repeatei
04
3
O
Cn
T3
S-i
(D
U
01
•H
JS
4-1

*
II

O^
r-H
S
M
M

,
f-H

II
_»

•O
la
<0
U

01
ic
EH
*

















•
<•••»
01
IV
•H
4J
W
a
5
^
(0
•O
0)
r"
4J
14-1
O
la
3
O
JS

J
U
(0

Sa

01
•H
•O
Sa
(0
U

01
•^4
EH
•K

3-49
-------
where:
    NSOURC = number of input sources  (see  card  columns 1-6 of the  second card
             of Card Group (2))

    NXPNTS = number  of  X  points  or  ranges  in  the  receptor, grid  (see  card
             columns 7-12 of the second card  of  Card Group (2))

    NYPNTS = number of Y points  or direction  radials in the receptor grid (see
             card columns 13-18  of the second card of Card Group  (2>)

    MXWYPT = number  of  discrete  receptors  (see  card columns  19-24  of  the
             second card of Card Group (2))

     NPNTS = NXPNTS • NYPNTS + NXWYPT (total  number of receptors)

      NAVG = number of  time periods.  This  equals -the number  of  time  period
             parameters  (ISW(7)  through ISW(14)  in  the   first  card  of  Card
             Group (2.)) set to "1"

    NGROUP = number of  source  group  combinations  (see card  columns  25-30  of
             the second card of  Card Group (2)).   For the purpose of  computing
             the required data storage for  a  problem run,  assume  NGROUP  equals
             "1" in Equation (3-1) if NGROUP  equals "0" in Card Group  (2)

         A = NPNTS • NGROUP  if  ISW(15)  equals  "1"  in the  first  card of Card
             Group (2); otherwise A equals  "0"

         B = 4 • NAVG • NPNTS •  NGROUP if ISW(17)  equals "1"  in the first card
             of Card Group (2);  otherwise B equals "0"

         C = 201 • NAVG  • NGROUP if ISW(18)  equals  "1"  in the  first card of
             Card Group (2); otherwise C equals  "0"

         D = NPNTS if ISW{4) equals  "1"  in the first  card of Card Group (2);
             otherwise D equals  "0"

         E = NPNTS if ISW(25) equals  "1" in  the first card of Card Group (2);
             otherwise E equals  "0"

and

     LIMIT = 43,500.   This  is  the  current  data  storage allocation   of  the
             program (consult Section 3.2.7 for modification of  this value)


    Card Group  (3)  consists of  parameters which contain  the  receptor  location

information.  If the user chooses not to define a  receptor grid  (either  NXPNTS

or  NYPNTS  = "0"),  the program does  not  read parameters  GRIDX,  GRIDY,  GRIDZ,

and RHT (regular).  Likewise, parameters XDIS,  YDIS, GRIDZ, and  RHT (discrete)

are  not  read by  the program if  the user chooses not to specify any discrete

receptors  (NXWYPT =  "0").  If  ISW(4)  =  0  both  GRIDZ   (regular)  and GRIDZ


                                      3-50                              .   12/87
-------
 (discrete)  are  not entered.  If  ISW(31)="0",  RHT  (regular)  and RKT  -('discrete)

'"are  not entered.   All  regular  receptor  information  is  read  before  discrete

 receptor  information.   In  addition,  one discrete receptor card  is  read for  each

 discrete  receptor.  This format  is described  in Table  3-4 and Section 3.1.2.d.

     Card   Group   (4)   contains   the  parameters   which  define  what   sources

 constitute  each source  group combination.  This Card  Group  is  not read  by  the

 program if  NGROUP equals  "0"  in   the  second card  of Group  (2).   Parameter

 NSOGRP reads up to 20  integer  values per card in  4-column  fields.   Parameter

 IDSOR reads up  to  13  integer values  per card  in 6-column fields.

     Card  Group  (5) consists  of  meteorological-related parameters  which  remain

 constant  once  they  are  set,  and   identification  labels  and model  constants.

 The  first parameter  in this  Card Group  (PDEF) consists  of  six  cards,  and  is

 read by the program  only  if ISW(21) equals  "2" and ISW(28)  = "2"  in Card Group

 (2).  Likewise, the  second parameter (DTHDEF) consists  of  si:-:  cards,  and  is

 read  by  the  program  only  if  ISW(22)  equals  "2"   and  IS"(2S)   =   "2".   The

 following two  cards  (cards  13  and  14)  are  read  by  the  program  and  contain

 parameters   which  have   program-provided  default  values  as   indicated  in

 Table 3-4.   The   user  should  note   that  the default values of  the  units

 conversion factor  (TK),  the units  label for source emission  rates  (IQUN)  and

 the units label for concentration or deposition (ICHIUN) are compatible.  That

 is,   the  default  mass units of  the  source  emission rates  (grams)   is scaled by

 the default conversion value which  is compatible with the  default  mass units

 of  concentration  (micrograms)  or deposition (grams).  Cards 15 through 19 in

 this  Card  Group  consist   of  the IDAY  parameter.   IDAY  is  not   read by  the

 program if  ISW(19) equals "2"  in Card Group (2).  This parameter  is an array

 where  each  column on  the  80-column card  image   for each  card   represents  a

 Julian  Day.    For . example,  to  indicate that Julian Day  140 of  the  hourly

 meteorological  data is to be processed by the program, IDAY(140) is  set  to "1"

 which  is  column  60  of the  second  card  of  the IDAY  parameter.   The remaining
                                       3-51         '                       12/87
-------
.parameters  consist  of  one card  (the 20th possible card of this Card Group) and




 are  not  read  if IS^:{19) equals "2" in Card Group (2).




     Card Group (6) contains  all source data parameters.   Except  for the  last




 parameter  (card  5)  in this Card Group  (QTK),  this Card Group  is  repeated for




 each source input (NSOURC times).   The  first card of this Card Group consists




 of  the principal  parameters  used  to define  the  characteristics  of  a source.




 Cards 2  to 4 pertain  to  the  gravitational  settling categories of particulates




 (parameters PHI,   VSN, and  GAMMA)  and are  read  by  the  program  only  when




 parameter  NVS in columns 8-9 of the first card is greater than "0" for a given




 source.   If  NVS  is  greater than  "0", cards  2  to  4  are  read immediately




 following  the first source card for which  NVS  is greater than "0".   It  should




 be  noted that cards 2 to 4  of  this  Card Group  may actually  consist of  more




 than 3 cards.  That is,  if NVS  is greater than "8",  the  program will  read more




 than one card for each  of  the  three  settling category  parameters (PHI,  VSN,




 and GAMMA).  Hence, depending on  the value of NVS,  the  program reads  no  cards,




 3 cards,  6 cards,  or 9  cards  for  parameters PHI,  VSN,  and GAMMA.    If  the




 building height   (HE)   is  entered as  a negative value,  the model expects to read




 3 cards  each for 36 direction specific  building  heights (BH)  and  36  direction



 specific building widths,  (BW)  respectively.  These are read after  the first




 through fourth cards  if NVS>0.   After the gravitational  settling  parameters




 and  direction specific building dimensions are  read, card 5 (consisting  of the




 source emission  rate  scalar  array (QTK)) is  read,  provided one of two options




 is  exercised by  the user.   That is,  either ISW(23)  is greater than "0"  in Card




 Group (2) or any number  of the QFLG parameter in card 1 of this Card  Group are




 greater than  "0"  for  all input sources.  If  both ISW(23) and QFLG are equal to




 "0"  for all sources,  card 5 of this Card Group is not read by  the  program.  If




 ISW(23)  is greater  than "0",  card 5  is read  once  and contains  the  source




 emission rate scalars for all sources.  Also,  the QFLG parameter  in  card 1 of






                                       3-52                                 12/87
-------
this Card Group is  ignored  for  all  input  sources.   If ISW(23) equals .."0",  card

5 is  repeated  each time a QFLG parameter  is greater  than  "0" for a  source.

The source emission rate  scalars contained in card  5 of this Card Group  allow

the user to vary emission  rates as a function of  season*, month*, hour of the

day, wind  speed and Pasquill  stability  category,  or  season and  hour  of  the

day.  As  mentioned in  the  descriptions of  parameter QTK  in  Table   3-4  and

Section  3.1.2.6,   the  value  of  ISW(23) or  QFLG   (whichever  is  applicable)

governs the  number and manner  in which the  source emission rate scalars are

entered into parameter QTK.  If ISW(23)  (or QFLG)  equals  "1",  QTK contains  4

seasonal scalars in the order of Winter,  Spring,  Summer,  and  Fall (1  card).  If

ISW(23)  (or QFLG)  equals "2",  enter  12  monthly scalars beginning  with  January

and ending with  December  (2  cards).   If  ISW(23)  (or QFLG)  equals "3",  enter 24

scalars for each hour  of  the  day beginning with hour 1 and ending  with  hour 24

(3  cards).  If  ISW{23)  (or QFLG) equals  "4",  enter 6 scalars per card for each

wind  speed category  (1  to  6)  and  6  cards  for  each of  the  six  Pasguill

stability categories (A to F)  for a  total of 36  scalars (6 cards).  If ISW(23)

(or QFLG)  equals "5",  enter 24  hourly  scalars  for each hour  and 4 sets for

each season  (12  cards).  Hence, card 5  of this Card Group may actually consist

of more than one card depending on the value of ISW(23) (or QFLG).

    Card  Group  (7) contains the hourly meteorological data parameters.   This

Card  Group  is  not   read  if  ISW(19)  equals   "1";   instead  all   hourly

meteorological  data are  read  from  an  input file  described in the  following

paragraph  (Section 3.2.3.b).  This  Card Group  is  repeated for  each day of

meteorological  data to be processed (NDAYS  times).  All meteorological  data

parameters are contained on one card image which is read for each  hour  per day

of  meteorological data (NHOURS times).
 *The  program determines the season or  month based on the Julian  Day or month
  value  read from the hourly meteorological  data.  Consult  Table  3-5  for the
  conversion used by the program of Julian Day to month or season,  and month to
  season.
                                      3-53                                12/87
-------
    t^ w
    Z X
 _   06  U
^   O  J

0   2  aj


3   18
«   S  H
     3
     H<4
                             «*3l>O — ^*—'.f-A^^aj^Q — ^••'j^.*




C


    o







       2222"       "    "               --.-__.

    i

    >

    —    -- —  -  —  j-—— — o«*»«^ T-"».a*»M.»p"— ^••^•t^*'-i»«»3









    I




                                 _ — _ — — _ -* -I -( ^, •» -I -4 •( -4 -« — —







                                 ^i «* f* ""I -I -I ^1 *t ft ~» -I *l ft -*« -^ ft (^«





                                 — ~ — ~ — — «^ -^ *s* *^ ci »j -4 -4 r^ -< ««





                                   tJj«O — "<•" tJ^-*'»aO>3 — "*•"-*
                                 -1*1 -<•* — — — » — —»—i — —  r  y  T^-T






    ^   —•f*«'^^j^j"»M^O*"^*'— * "•£  "*^^"~^^^*'^!*^fc?*5







                                         ppppoppooS — ? —


     I


     y   -™-**-^ f^<****3^*)^ f-"fi  "*-^"l~^*"%*^*^**^





          .?**«-* »>3 — -* — ^ ^ « ^ « 9> 9 • r«-»-»^«^«0»O— »*





















     2   — -*«-*/* *-.»»O — M — -* ^ O -^ W 0* O




















        i^ss^sss^r^c^^sississsss^











                               •«<^-«M.«9kO*Aim^^^^9«io
                               ^^^•«v<4W^
-------
    b.   Disc  or Tape  Input  Requirements.   The ISCST program  accepts  an input




file of hourly  meteorological  data in a format  generated by  the  preprocessor




program.    Although  this  file  is  optional,  most  problems   call  for  hourly




meteorological  data  in this format.   If input  parameter ISW(19>  equals  "1",




the program  reads  hourly meteorology from  an  input file.  If  ISW(19)  equals




"2", the  program reads hourly meteorological data in a card image  format.   The




program reads the  input  file from the FORTRAN logical unit number specified in




parameter IMET.   The  user must provide  the surface  station  number and year,




and the  upper air station  number and year which are specified  in parameters




ISS, ISY,  IUS,  and  IUY,  respectively.   The  user does  not  need  to  know  the




specific   format of  the  hourly  meteorological  data  contained  in the  input




file.   For a  description  of  the specific format  of the  input tape file,  the




reader is referred to Table  3-6.









    3.2.4  Program Output Data Description




    The ISCST program generates  several  categories of  printed  output  and  an




optional   output  file.   The  following   paragraphs describe  the  format  and




content of both forms of program output.









    a.    Printed Output.   The  ISCST  program  generates  five  categories  of




printed  output,  four  of  which are  tables  of  average  concentration or total




deposition values.   All five categories  of  printed output are optional  to the




user.   That  is,  the  user  mus.t  indicate  which  categories are  desired to  be




printed for a particular problem run.   The five categories are:






    •  Input Data (Card and  Tape)  Listing




    •  Daily Calculated Average Concentration or Total Deposition Tables




    •  "N"-Day Calculated Average  Concentration or Total  Deposition Tables
                                      3-55
-------
                                 TABLE 3-6

                PREPROCESSOR OUTPUT FILE RECORD DESCRIPTION
Position of Variable
 Within the Record
Variable      FORTRAN
  Name .    Variable Type
1
2
3
4-27
28-51
52-75
76-99
100-123
124-171
IYEAR
IMONTH
DAY1
KST
SPEED
TEMP
AFV
FVR
HLH
INTEGER
INTEGER
REAL
INTEGER
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
Year of record (last
digits)
Month
Julian Day
Array of 24 Stability
gory Values
Array of 24 Wind
Values (ms~ ' )
two


Gate-
Speed
Array of 24 Ambient
Temperature Values (°K)
Array of 24 Flow Vector
Values (degrees)
Array of 24 Randomized
Vectors (degrees)
Array dimensioned 2 t
Flow
>y 24
                                                containing  24  rural  mixing
                                                height values  and  24  urban
                                                mixing  height   values  (m).
                                                The values are stored  on the
                                                record in  groups of two for
                                                each  hour  with  the   rural
                                                mixing height  first followed
                                                by  the  urban  mixing  height
                                                for that  hour
                                    3-56
-------
    •  Highest,  Second-Highest   and  Third-Highest  Calculated   Average
       Concentration or Total Deposition Tables

    •  Maximum 50  Calculated  Average  Concentration  or  Total  Deposition
       Tables
These  output  categories  are all available  regardless of  the  setting of  the

regulatory default  option switch  ISW(28).   The  first line  of  each page  of

printed  output  is  a  heading  used to  identify the  problem  run  (see  input

parameter TITLE in Section 3.2.3.a).

    The  user  may  list all  input  data parameters  used by  the program  for  a

particular problem  run.   If  input  parameter ISW(6)  equals "1"  (discussed  in

Section   3.2.3.a),   the   program   lists  -all   program  control   parameters,

meteorological-related constants and  identification  labels,  receptor  data  and

source data.   See  Figure  C-2 in Appendix C  for  an  illustration of  the content

and format of  an input data  listing for a  typical  problem run.  The  user  may

also  direct  the program  to print  all hourly  meteorology  processed by  the

program.   If  ISW(6)  equals  "2",   the   program  produces  a   list   of  the

meteorological data for  each day processed as shown  in Figure  C-3  in Appendix

C.  Hence, a  page  is  generated for each  day of  meteorology processed by  the

program  (NDAYS  pages  if  ISW(19) equals "2" or the number  of entries set to "1"

in the IDAY array if ISW(19)  equals "1").

    The  next  category  of   optional   printed  output  are  tables  of  average

concentration  or total  deposition  values  calculated for each day ("daily")  of

meteorology  processed  by  the  program.   If ISW(16)  equals  "1",  tables  are

printed  for each day for  all user-defined  combinations  of source groups  and

time  periods.   As  shown  in  Figure C-5  in Appendix C, each  table  consists  of

the calculated average concentration values for all receptors.   The heading  of
                                      3-57
-------
the table  indicates  the day,  time period,  time  period  interval*  and sources




that represent the printed values.




    The  user   may  direct  the   program   to  print  tables  of   calculated




concentration averaged over  "N"-days  or deposition summed over "N"-days  where




"N"  represents  the  total  number  of  days  of  meteorology  processed by  the




program run.   If  ISW(15)  equals "1",  tables  are  printed for  all  user-defined




source groups.   As shown in Figure C-6 in Appendix C,  each  table  consists of




the calculated concentration for all receptors.




    The  program  may also  print  tables  of the  highest,  second-highest  and




third-highest average concentration or total deposition values calculated at




each  receptor  point  throughout  the duration  of  the problem  run.   If ISW(17)




equals  "1",  a  table  of  the  highest  and  a  table  of  the  second-highest




calculated  values are  printed for  all   user-defined  combinations  of  source




groups and  time periods.   Figure  C-7  in  Appendix C  is  an  illustration  of a




highest  calculated average concentration  table.   The  second-highest table is




not shown  but  is similar in  format.    If  ISW(17)  equals "2",  a  third-highest




table  is also printed.




    The  final  category  of the printed  output that may be produced are  tables




of the maximum 50 calculated average concentration  or total  deposition values



found  for  the problem run.  If  ISW(18)  equals "1",  a table  of the 50 maximum




values is  produced for all user-defined combinations of  source groups and  time




periods.   As shown  in  Figure  C-8  in  Appendix  C,  each table  consists  of a




heading  and the  maximum  50  calculated values.  The  number of tables of daily




average  concentration or  total  deposition values  is  governed by  the number of




source groups  (specified  in  parameter  NGROUP), time   periods  (specified in




parameters   ISW(7)   through  ISW(14))   and  time   period  intervals  (parameter
 *See Table  3-7  for  the  hours  which define a particular  time period  interval.
                                       3-58
-------


















'O
o
••-H
Jj
0)
Q«
0)
E
•^
H




















T3
0
•H
S-i
OJ
ou
0)
E
H
3
o
x
1
CM
5-1
3
O
X
1
CM .
rH
S-i
3
O
X
1
00
s-i
3
O
X
1
vX5



3
O
X
1
^
u
3
0
X
1
n
S-l
3
O

1
CM


"f
rH

i— f
(0 t.

£4 f^
0) g
•f 5
C 2
M


CM
1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0


-------
IPERD).   After  all  hourly  meteorological  data  have  been  processed  by  the




program, the "N"-day tables,  highest,   second-highest  and third-highest tables




and the maximum 50  tables  are alternately  printed for  each source group  for




each specified time  interval.  The  number of tables is  governed by the number




of source groups (NGROUP)  and time periods (ISW(7) through ISW(14))  specified.









    b.  Output  File.   The  ISCST  program is  capable  of  generating an  output




file  containing  the  calculated  average  concentration or  total  deposition




values based on the selected time periods and source groups.   If ISW(5)  equals




"1",  this  output  file is generated.   The user must assign an  output  file  and




associate the logical  unit  number  specified in  parameter  ITAP to  the  output




file (see Section 3.2.3.a).




    The  output  file  is  written  with  a  FORTRAN  unformatted   (binary)  WRITE




statement  and  consists  of  constant  length  records  whose  lengths equal  the




total number of receptor  points  (NPNTS)  plus  3  words.   Word 1  of  each record




contains the hour  at which the corresponding values were calculated in words 4




to  NPNTS +3.  Word 2 contains the  Julian Day and  word  3 contains  the source




group  number.   Words  4  through  NPNTS  +  3 contain  the  calculated  average




concentration  or  total  deposition values  for  all  receptors.   The  values




calculated  for  the  receptor  grid  (if  any)  are  written first  followed by the




values  calculated at the discrete receptors  (if  any).  Starting with the first




Y point (direction radial)  of the  Y-axis (radial)  grid, the calculated values




are written for the X-axis  (ranges) in the  same order  that receptor locations




were  entered in parameter  GRIDX (see  Section 3.2.3.a).  For  each successive




Y-axis  (radial),  the values  are  written for  the X-axis  (ranges).   After the




calculated  values  have  been  written   for  the  receptor grid,  the calculated




values  are  written for the discrete  points  in  the order the  discrete points




were  entered in parameters  XDIS and YDIS  (see  Section 3.2:3.a).
                                      3-60
-------
    The content and  number  of records  produced  is governed  by the  number  of




source groups  (specified in  parameter  NGROUP) and time  periods  (specified in




parameters  ISW(7)  through  ISW(14)}.   For  each  day  of  meteorological  data




processed by  the  program and for  each  hour, the  program  generates  records  of




calculated  values  for  all  applicable  time  period  intervals  for all  source




groups.   For  hour  one,  a 1-hour  record of calculated values  for  source group




1, followed by  1-hour  records of calculated  values  for  each  remaining  source




groups are  written  to  the  output file.   For hour two,  a 1-hour  and a  2-hour




record are written to the output  file  for each source group.   For hour  three,




a  1-hour and  3-hour  record  are written  to the  output  file for  each  source




group.   For hour  four, a  1-hour,  2-hour,  and  4-hour   record  of  calculated




values are  written to  the  output  file  for each source group.  This  format  is




continued for each hour of the day.  For example, if there is  one  source group




and  only  24-hour  average concentrations  are  calculated,  only one  record per




day  is written to  the output file.   If ISW(15)  equals   "1",  records  of  the




"N"-day  average concentration or  total  deposition  values  are  additionally




written  to  the  output  file   for  all  source  groups  after  the  program  has




processed all "N"-days of meteorological data.









     3.2.5  Program Run Time, Page and Tape Output Estimates




     This section provides the user with equations which estimate the  amount  of




run  time  required and  program output  generated for a given problem  run.   The




.equations describing the amount  of  printed  output  data  (in  pages)   and  tape




output  data  (in   words)  can be  quite  accurately  estimated.   The  run  time




estimate is less accurate because of unknowns such as the  nature of the  hourly




meteorology and wake effects.  These unknowns may affect the run time estimate




significantly for a  large problem run.
                                      3-61
-------
    a.   Run Time.  The amount  of  time a problem  takes  to execute  is. primarily

governed by si:-: factors.   These factors  are:   (1)  the  number of hours  in  a  day

of meteorological data (NHOURS);  (2)  the  number of  days of meteorological data

processed  (NDAYS);  (3) the  number  of  sources  (NSOURC);  (4) the  number  of

source groups  (NGROUP); (5) the number  of receptor  points (NPNTS);  and (6)  the

number of  time periods (NAVG).   Using  these  factors,  the following  equation

estimates the run time in  minutes:
    No. of Minutes * C • (NDAYS +!)•(!+ NHOURS • (1 + 0.8 NSOURC
                                                                          (3-2)
                     • (1 + 0.6 • NPNTS + 0.1 • NGROUP • NAVG)))
where
       C = 2.1 • 10~5
The  constant,  C,  is derived from  problem  runs made on a  UN I VAC 1103 computer

and  is different for other computers.



     b.   Page  Output.   The  number  of pages  of  printer output  produced  by a

problem  run is  primarily controlled by which  categories  of output are desired

by  the  user.   The  content  of  these categories  of program print output  are

discussed  in  Section 3.2.4.a.    Input  parameters  ISW(6), ISW(15),  ISW(16),

ISW(17), and  ISW(18),  discussed in Section 3.2.3.a.,  control  which categories

of   program  print  output  are  produced.   Other factors  which  determine  the

amount  of  print  output  are the number  of receptor  points, number  of  source

groups,  and  the  number  of time  periods  for which  average  concentration or

total deposition  values  are computed.

     If  ISW(6)  equals  "1", all  input data  are  printed, producing about 5  pages

of   print  output.  For   source  with  gravitational  settling  categories   (NVS

greater than  zero)  or variational  emission rates (QFLG greater  than zero),  add

one-third  of  a page per source.   For sources  with  direction specific building

dimensions (HB less than zero), add one-fifth of a page per source.   If ISW(6)
                                      3-62                                 12/87
-------
equals "2", all meteorological data  processed by the  program are  printed.   Add

one page  for every day of meteorological  data  processed.

    If ISW(15)  equals  "1",  tables  of  the  "N"-day  average concentration  or

total deposition values are printed.  The  number of tables  printed  equals  the

number of source  groups  desired  by the  user  (NGROUP).   If  parameter NGROUP is

specified as "0",  one table will  be printed.   The number of  pages  produced  for

each "N"-day table is given the following equation:


    Number of Pages = (NXPNTS/9)  (NYPNTS/38)  + (NXWYPT/114)         '  (3-3)

where

    NXPNTS = the number of X points on the' X-axis grid or
             the number of grid ranges

    NYPNTS = the number of Y points on the Y-axis grid or
             the number of grid direction radials

    NXWYPT = the number of discrete receptor points


Round up any fractional number in each term to the nearest whole number.

    If ISW(16) equals "1", tables of average  concentration  or total  deposition

for  user-defined  combinations of  source  groups and time periods  for each day

of meteorological  data  processed by  the  program are  printed.   The  number of

tables produced by this output category for each day is given by the following

equation:


    No. of Tables = NGROUP •   (24/IPERD) • ISW(7)

                    + (12/IPERD) • ISW(8) + (8/IPERD)  • ISW{9)

                    + (6/IPERD) • ISW(IO) + (4/IPERD)  • ISW(ll)      (3-4)

                    + (3/IPERD) • ISW{12) + (2/IPERD)  • ISW(13)

                    + (1/IPERD) • ISW(14)

where

       NGROUP = number  of  source  groups  as specified by  input  parameters
                NGROUP.  If NGROUP is specified as "0", assume a value of
                "1" for this equation.

                                      3-63                                 12/87
-------
      IPERD    =  "N"th  time interval for all  time periods as specified  by
                input  parameter IPERD.   Note that  if  IPERD  is  not set  to
                "0",  the term  (3/IPERD) •  ISW(i)  equals  (3)  •  ISW(i).   If
                IPERD  is  set  greater  than  "0",  'the  term  (j /IPERD)   •
                ISW(i)  equals  (1)  • ISW(i)  if  (j/IPERD) is greater  than
                or equal  to  "1";  otherwise, it  equals  (0)  •  ISW(i)  if
                (j/IPERD)  is  less  than  "1".

      ISW(7)- =  the corresponding  1-,  2-,  3-,   4-,  6-,  8-,  12-,  and
      ISW(14)   24-hour  time  periods  as  specified  by  input  parameters
                ISW(7)  through  ISW(14).  The "1" or "0" values  specified
                by the  user  in these  parameters are the  numeric values
                used in  the  equation


The number of pages produced by each table is given in  Equation  (3-3).   Hence,

the total number of pages generated by the print output option  ISW(16)  equals

the product  of  the  number of days processed by  the  program  for  a probler,  run,

the number  of tables printed  according  to  Equation  (3-4)   and  the  number  of

pages produced per table according to Equation  (3-3).

    If ISW(17)  equals  "1",  tables  of  the  highest and  second-highest  average

concentration or  total  deposition  values  found at  each receptor are  printed

for  all  user-defined combinations  of  source   groups  and   time  periods.    If

ISW(17)  equals  "2" tables  of  highest, second-highest,  and third-highest  are

printed.   The number of  tables  printed   equals  two or three   (depending  on

ISW{17))   times  the number  of time periods specified  (the  number  of  input

parameters  ISW(7)  through ISW(14)  set to  "1")  multiplied  by  the  number  of

source groups desired.    If no source groups  are specified  (input  parameter

NGROUP equals "0"), assume  one source  group for  the  purpose of  computing  the

number of  tables  printed by this option  (ISW(17».  The number  of pages  each

table produces is given by the following equation:


    Number of Pages = (NXPNTS/5)  (NYPNTS/38) + (NXWYPT/76)           (3-5)


where  NXPNTS, NYPNTS, and NXWYPT are defined following  Equation (3-3).  Round

up any fractional number in each term to the nearest whole nvunber.  Hence, the



                                      3-64                            .     12/87
-------
number of pages printed by this output category equals two or  three,  times the




product of  the number  of  time periods.,  the  number of source groups,  and the




number of pages produced per table according to Equation (3-5).




    If ISW(18)  equals  "1",  tables  of the maximum 50  average  concentration or




total  deposition   values   calculated   are   printed   for  all   user-defined




combinations of  source groups  and  time  periods.   Because each  table  printed




produces only  one  page of  output, the  total  number of  pages  printed  by  this




output  category  equals  the number  of  time periods  specified (the  number of




input parameters (ISW(7) through  ISW(14)  set  to "1")  multiplied  by  the number




of  source  groups specified.   Again,  if no source groups  are  specified (input




parameter NGROUP equal to zero), assume one source group.




    Thus,  the  total  number  of pages of output produced by  the  program equals




the sum of the number of pages produced by each optional print output category




desired by the user for a problem run.









    c.   Output  to  Disc  File.   Values  of   average  concentration  or  total




deposition are written by  a FORTRAN  unformatted WRITE statement to  an output




file  only if  parameter ISW(5)  equals  "1".   Otherwise,  the program  does not




generate an  output  file.   It  is  not  practical  to  discuss  the physical amount




(length  of  magnetic  tape  or  number  of tracks  or  sectors  of  mass storage)




generated  since   this  introduces   factors  which  depend  on   the   computer




installation.   Instead, the number  of  computer words generated by  a problem




run is  discussed.   The user may  then equate  this  number to a physical amount




for the particular  storage device being used.




    The  output file  is written  in  records,  where the  length of each record




equals  the number  of receptor points (NPNTS)  plus  3  for a total of  NPNTS + 3




computer words for a given problem  run.   For  each day of  meteorological  data




processed, the number of records written to the file  is governed by the number
                                      3-65
-------
of source groups and time.periods specified by the user.  If we  substitute  the




term  "Tables"  used in Equation  (3-4)  with  the  word,  "Records" and  set  IPERD




equal to  "0",  Equation  (3-4)  gives the number of  records  written to  the  file




for  each  day  of  meteorological  data  processed.    All   variables   used  to




formulate Equation  (3-4) maintain the  same  definition.  Hence,  the  number  of




records equals  the  value computed from Equation (3-4) multiplied by the number




of  days  of meteorological  data  processed by  the program  for  a problem  run.




Also,  if input  parameter  ISW(15)  equals  "1", .additional  records  containing




"N"-day  average concentration or  total  deposition values  are  written  to  the




file  depending  on the number of source groups specified by the input parameter




NGROUP.   If  NGROUP equals  "0",   assume  one  source  group.   Hence,   the  total




number  of computer  words  written to  the file  equals the number of records




generated, multiplied by (NPNTS  + 3) computer words  per record for  a problem




run.









     3.2.6  Program Diagnostic Messages




     The  ISCST program prints diagnostic messages  when certain conditions occur




during  a  problem run.    The  diagnostic  messages consist  of two  types.   The




first type  is a  table format that informs  the user  of the  conditions found,




but does not terminate program  execution.   The second  type is an error message




which informs  the  user  of the  condition.  The  run  is  terminated  after  the




error message  is  printed.




     The  diagnostic  message  in a  table format informs  the  user  when a  receptor




is  located  within one  meter or three  building heights  (or  three  effective




building widths)  of a source.  As shown in Figure C-4  in Appendix C,  the table




lists all source-receptor  combinations for  which this condition has  occurred.




The table lists  the  source number,  receptor location, and calculated  distance
                                       3-66
-------
between  the  corresponding  source  and  receptor.   A  negative  distance  value

implies that the  receptor  is  located within the dimensions of a volume or area

source.

    Four types of diagnostic  error  messages may be printed by the program.   If

the  allocated  data  storage  is  not  sufficient  for  the   data  required  by  a

problem run, an  error  message is printed (Figure 3-2(a)).   An error message is

printed  if  the station  numbers  or  years  read  from  the  meteorological  data

input  tape  do not  match the  'corresponding station numbers or  years specified

by the  user  in parameters ISS, ISY,  IUS,  IUY  (Figure 3-2(b».   If  the  number

of  input sources  equals  "0",  an  error  message  is  printed  (Figure  3-2(c)).

Finally,  if  there  are  no  gravitational  settling  categories  to  calculate

deposition  for   any   source,  an  error  message  is  printed  as  shown  in

Figure 3-2(d).



    3.2.7  Program Modification for Computers Other than UKIVAC 1100 Series
           Computers

    The ISCST program, which  is written in FORTRAN 77,  provides easy transport

and  adaption for use  on other  computers.   The program  design requires that:

(1) at  least  four Hollerith  characters can be  stored in one computer  word;

(2) the  computer  word  lengths of integer and real type variables are the same;

and,  (3) at  least 132  characters per line can  be printed on  a page  with 57

lines  per  page.   The  program  requires  about  70,000   words of  executable

storage,  26,500'of  which consist of  the program  itself  compiled on  a UNIVAC

1100  Computer.   The size  of  the compiled program will vary depending on the

FORTRAN  compiler  and  computer  installation.   The  remaining  43,500  words

consist  of  data storage used by the program for storing the  input data values,

intermediate values, and output results of a given problem run.
                                      3-67                                12/87
-------
                                  TABLE  3-8

                             I SCSI ERROR MESSAGES
**ERROR**CALCULATED STORAGE ALLOCATION LIMIT  EQUALS n AND EXCEEDS  THE  MAXIMUM
STORAGE ALLOCATION LIMIT OF m
RUN TERMINATED.  The program  has  determined that n  locations  of core  storage
are required  for the  run,  but only  m locations are available.  See equation
(3-1)  in Section 3.2.3

                                      (a)

***ERROR***MET DATA -REQUESTED DOES NOT MATCH MET DATA READ.
'REQUESTED/READ' VALUES ARE:
SURFACE STATION NO. = isisis/jsjsjs YEAR OF SURFACE DATA = iys/jys
UPPER AIR STATION NO. = iuiuiu/jujuju YEAR OF UPPER AIR DATA = iuy/juy
RUN TERMINATED.   The surface  or  upper air  station identifiers  or  the  years
selected on  the card input deck  do  not  match the  identifiers or years in the
preprocessed meteorological tape  file.   Correct the identifiers and  years for
the proper values and rerun.

                                      (b)

***ERROR***NUMBER  OF SOURCES  TO  BE READ EQUALS  ZERO.   RUN  TERMINATED.   The
parameter NSOURC on the  input card  deck  has been  set to zero.   The  program
requires at least one source to execute properly.

                                      (c)

***ERROR***SOURCE  NUMBER HAS  NO  GRAVITATIONAL SETTLING  CATEGORIES WITH WHICH
TO  CALCULATE DEPOSITION.   RUN TERMINATED.   For  deposition calculations,  the
program  requires  particulate  settling  parameters  to  be entered  for  each
source.  Check  the input card  deck and rerun.

                                      (d)

***ERROR***DIRECTION SPECIFIC BUILDING HEIGHT OR  WIDTH  IS GREATER  THAN 9999
FOR SOURCE  NO:   n, RUN TERMINATEJ.  When  the stack  height  is less  than or
equal  to the building height  plus one-half  the lesser of  the  building height
or  width, the  program  expects  the  building height to  be set as a  negative
value  in order  to read direction  specific  building dimensions.   The program
attempted  to read direction  specific building dimensions and thus encountered
values which were  out of  range.  Reset  HB  to  a  negative  value,  insert 36
direction specific building heights  and widths and  rerun.

                                       (e)


FIGURE 3-2.   (a)  through  (e)  show the five  types  of error messages  printed by
              the ISCST Program.  The  run  is  terminated after  an error message
              is printed.
                                      3-68                                12/87
-------
    If it is  necessary  to adjust the current allotment of 43,500 words of data




storage,   only  two  FORTRAN  statements  in  the  ISCST  program  need  to  be




modified.   The  FORTRAN  statement with  sequence number  ISC07540  (in columns




73-80) in the main program allocates  the  data storage in array  QF.   Also,  the




value assigned  to the  variable  LIMIT at  sequence  number ISC07620  must  agree




with the value used in array QF.




    The program assumes  FORTRAN  logical unit 5 for the card  reader and logical




unit  6  for  the  printer.   These  logical  unit  numbers  may  be  modified  on




sequence numbers ISC07690 and ISC07700 in the main program.
                                     3-69                                12/87
-------
                                   SECTION 4




                    USER'S INSTRUCTION FOR THE ISC LONG-TERM




                              (ISCLT)  MODEL PROGRAM






4.1 Summary of Program Options, Data  Requirements and Output




    4.1.1  Summary of ISCLT Program Options




    The program options of  the ISC Dispersion Model long-term computer program




ISCLT consist of three general categories:






    •  Meteorological data input options




    • ( Dispersion-model options




    •  Output options






Each category is discussed separately below.









    a. Meteorological  Data  Input  Options.  Table 4-1 lists  the  meteorological




data  input  options for the ISCLT computer  program.   All  meteorological  data




may be input by card deck or by a magnetic tape  inventory previously generated




by  ISCLT  (see Section 4.1.1.C below).   ISCLT accepts STAR  summaries  with six




Pasquill  stability  categories  (A  through  F)  or  five  Pasguill  stability




categories  (A through E  with the E  and F categories combined).   It  does not




accept  STAR  summaries  with  separate   day   and   night   neutral  categories.




Site-specific  mixing  heights  and  ambient  air  temperature  are  ISCLT  input




requirements  rather  than  options.  Suggested procedures  for  developing  these




inputs are  given  in Section 2.2.1.2.  The remaining  meteorological data  input




options  listed  in Table  4-1 are identical  to the  ISCST meteorological  data




input options discussed in Section 3.1.1.a.









    b. Dispersion  Model Options.   Table  4-2  lists the dispersion model options




for  the  ISCLT computer program.  In  general,  these  options correspond to the






                                       4-1
-------
                                   TABLE 4-1

                  METEOROLOGICAL DATA INPUT OPTIONS FOR ISCLT
Input of  all  meteorological  data  by card  deck  or by magnetic  tape inventory
previously generated by ISCLT

STAR summaries with five or six Pasguill stability categories

Site-specific mixing heights

Site-specific ambient air temperatures

Site-specific wind-profile exponents

Site-specific vertical potential temperature gradients

Rural Mode or Urban Mode 1, 2 or 3

Final or distance dependent plume rise

Wind system measurement height if other than 10 meters



                                    TABLE 4-2

                       DISPERSION-MODEL OPTIONS FOR ISCLT



Concentration or dry deposition calculations

Inclusion  of  the  effects  of  gravitational  settling  and/or  deposition   in
concentration calculations

Inclusion of terrain effects  (concentration calculations only)

Grid  or  discrete  receptrrs  (Cartesian or  polar system),  with capability  to
model receptor heights above  ground.

Stack, volume and area sources

Pollutant  emission  rates held constant  or  varied by  season or by wind  speed
and stability

Time-dependent exponential  decay of pollutants

Inclusion of  building wake,  stack-tip  downwash and buoyancy-induced dispersion
effects

Time periods for which concentration  or deposition calculations  are to be made
 (seasonal  and/or annual)
                                       4-2                               12/87
-------
ISCST  dispersion-model  options  discussed  in  Section   S.l.l.b.    Pollutant

emission rates may  be  held constant or varied  by  season or by wind  speed  and

stability in ISCLT  calculations.   The  program uses seasonal STAR  summaries  to

calculate   seasonal  and/or   annual   concentration   or  deposition   values.

Additionally,  monthly  STAR  summaries  may  be  used  to   calculate   monthly

concentration or deposition values.

    c. Output Options.   Table  4-3 lists the ISCLT  program output options.   A

more  detailed  discussion of the  ISCLT output information is given  in Section

4.1.3.

    The  ISCLT  program has  the capability to generate a master  file  inventory

containing  all   meteorological and  source  inputs  and  the  results  of  all

concentration or deposition  calculations.   This file can then be used as input

to future update runs.   For example, assume  that  the user wishes  to add a  new

source and  modify an existing  source at a previously modeled industrial source

complex.  Concentration or  deposition  calculations  are  made  for  these  or

modified sources  alone and  the results  of  these  calculations  in combination

with  select  sources from the original file  inventory  are  used  to generate  an

updated  inventory.   That is,  it  is not necessary to  repeat the concentration

or deposition calculations for the unaffected sources  in the industrial source

complex  in  order  to   obtain  an  updated  estimate of  the  concentration  or

deposition  values  for  the  combined  emissions.    The  optional  master  file

inventory is discussed in detail in Section 4.2.4.b.

    The  ISCLT user may elect to print one or more of the following tables:


       •  The program  control  parameters,  meteorological  input data  and
          receptor  data

       •  The source input data

       •  The  seasonal  and/or  annual  average  concentration  or  total
          deposition values  calculated at  each receptor for each source
          or for the combined  emissions from select groups or all sources
                                       4-3
-------
                                   TABLE 4-3

                              ISCLT OUTPUT  OPTIONS
Master file  inventory of meteorological  and source inputs and  the  results of
the concentration or deposition calculations

Printout of program control  parameters, meteorological data and receptor data

Printout of tables of source input data

Printout of  seasonal and/or  annual  average concentrations  or  total  seasonal
and/or annual deposition  values  calculated at each receptor for each source or
for the combined emissions from a select group or all sources

Printout of  the contributions  of the  individual  sources to  the  10  highest
concentration or  deposition values calculated for  the  combined  emissions from
a select group  of all sources or  the  contributions of the  individual  sources
to  the  total concentration  or deposition values  calculated for  the  combined
emissions from a select group of all sources at 10 user-specified receptors
                                       4-4
-------
       •  The  contributions  of the  individual  sources to the  10  receptors
          with highest concentration (or deposition)  values obtained from
          the  combined  emissions  of  select  groups  of  sources;  or  the
          contributions   of  each  individual   source,   as   well  as  the
          combined sources,  to a select -group of user specified receptor
          points;  or  the  maximum 10 concentration (or deposition)  values
          for   each  source   and for   the   combined   sources,  determined
          independently  of each other
    4.1.2  Data Input Requirements

    This section provides a  description  of all input data  parameters  required

by the  ISCLT program.  The  user should note that  some  input parameters are not

read or are ignored  by  the  program, depending  on the  values  assigned to  the

control parameters  (options)  by the user.

    a.Program   control  Parameter Data.   These  data  contain  parameters  which

provide user-control  Parameter Data.
  Parameter
    Name

      ISW(l)
      ISW(2)
      ISW(3)
Concentration/Deposition   Option—Directs   the   program   to
calculate either average  concentration or total deposition.  A
value  of   "1"   indicates  average  concentration  is   to  be
calculated and a value  of "2" indicates total deposition is to
be calculated.   If  this parameter is not punched,  the  program
defaults to "1" or concentration.

Receptor  Reference  Grid  System  Option—Specifies  whether  a
right-handed  rectangular  Cartesian  coordinate  system  or  a
polar  system  is  to be   input  to  the  program to  form  the
receptor  reference  grid  system.   A value of  "1"  indicates  a
Cartesian- reference  grid  system is being input  and a  value of
"2"  indicates  a  polar  reference grid  system  is being  input.
If this  parameter  is not punched, the  program  will  default to
a value of "1."               '

Discrete  Receptor  Option—Specifies  whether  a  right-handed
rectangular  Cartesian  reference  system  or  polar  reference
system  is  used  to  reference  the  input  discrete  receptor
points.  A  value of "1"  indicates that the Cartesian reference
system  is used  and  a  value  of  "2"  indicates  that  a  polar
reference system  is  used.   If this parameter  is not  punched,
the program will default  to a value of "1."
                                       4-5
-------
Parameter
  Name
      ISW(4)     Receptor Terrain Elevation  Option—Specifies whether  the  user
                desires to  input  the   terrain  elevations  for  each  receptor
                point or to use  the  program as  a flat  terrain  model.   A value
                of "0" indicates terrain elevations are not to be  input and  a
                value  of  "1"  indicates terrain  elevations for each  receptor
                point are  to be input.   Note that terrain elevations cannot  be
                used  with   the  deposition  model.   The  default  for  this
                parameter  is no terrain or  "0."   If  equal to "-1,"  the program
                assumes input elevations are in  meters rather than feet.

      ISW(5)     Input/Output  File  Option—Specifies  whether  disc  file  input
                and/or output is to be  used.   A  value  of "0" indicates no  file
                input  or  output.   A value  of "1" indicates an output file  is
                to be  produced on the  output  unit  specified  by  ISW(15).   A
                value of  "2"  indicates  an  input file is required on the input
                unit  specified by  ISW(14).   A  value  of   "3"  indicates  both
                input  and  output  files  are being  used.   Default   for  this
                parameter  is  "0".  It  is the user's  responsibility to  ensure
                that  the  correct  tapes or  files are  mounted on  the correct
                units.

      ISW(6)     Print  Input Data Option—Specifies  what input  data are to  be
                printed.  A value  of   "0"  indicates  no input  data are to  be
                printed.    A   value   of  "1"   indicates   only  the   control
                parameters,   receptor points and meteorological data are to  be
                printed.  A value  of "2" indicates  only the source  input  data
                are to  be printed  and  a value  of "3"  indicates all input data
                are to be  printed.   The default  for  this parameter is "0."

      ISW{7)     Seasonal/Annual  Print   Option—Specifies   whether   seasonal
                concentration  (or  deposition)  values  are  to  be  printed,  or
                annual  values  only,  or  both seasonal  and  annual  values.   An
                ISW(7)  value  of "1" indicates  only seasonal  output  is  to  be
                printed, a  value of  "2" indicates only annual  output  is to  be
                printed, and  a value of "3" indicates both seasonal and annual
                output are to be printed.  If this parameter is not  punched  or
                is "0," the ptogram defaults to "3."

      ISW(8)    Individual/Combined  Sources  Print   Option—Specifies  whether
                output  for  individual  sources or the combined  sources (sum  of
                sources)  or both  is to be.printed.    An  ISW(8)  value  of "1"
                indicates output for individual  sources only is to  be  printed,
                a value of  "2" indicates output for  the combined  sources only
                is to  be printed, and a value of "3"  indicates  output  for both
                individual  and combined sources is  to be printed.   The default
                for  this  parameter  is  "3."   This   parameter   is  used  in
                conjunction with the parameter  NGROUP below.  If NGROUP equals
                "0,",  all  sources  input  to  the program   are  considered for
                output  under ISW(8).   However,  if NGROUP  is  greater than "0,"
                only  those   sources  explicitly  or  implicitly  defined  under
                NGROUP are  considered  for  output unddr ISW(8).  Also, a single
                source  defined under NGROUP  is logically  treated  as  combined
                source  output  when ISW(8) equals "2" or "3."
                                       4-6
-------
Parameter
  Name
      ISW(9>
     ISW(IO)
     ISW(ll)
Rural/Urban Option—Specifies whether  rural  or urban modes are
to be used  (see Table  2-3).   A value  of "1"  specifies  Urban
Mode 1  and the  E  and F stability categories  are  redefined as
D.   A   value  of  "2"  specifies Urban Mode   2  and  stability
categories A and B  are redefined as A, C becomes  B, D becomes
C, and  E  and  F become D.  A  value  of  "3" specifies  the  Rural
Mode and  does  not  redefine  the   stability  categories.   The
rural Pasquill-Gifford dispersion curves  are used  with values
of  1  through  3.  A  value  of "4" specifies Urban  Mode  3,  with
no.stability category  adjustment and  use  of the  urban Briggs
dispersion  curves.   If  this parameter  is  not punched or is
"0," the program defaults  to  "3."   If  file  input  is used, the
program  defaults  to  the value  saved  on  file.  The parameter
ISW(9)   is only  used  for card input  sources  and/or  tape  input
sources when ISW(12)  equals  "I."  It  should be  noted that the
use of  Urban Modes  1 and 2 are  not  recommended for regulatory
purposes.

Maximum  10  Print  Option—Specifies  whether   the  maximum  10
values  of concentration  or deposition  only are  to  be printed,
or the  results  of  the calculations for all  receptors only, or
both are to be printed.  A value of "1" directs  the program to
calculate and  print only  the maximum  10  values and receptors
according to  ISW(ll) or  ISW(12) below.   Values  at  receptors
other  than the maximum  10  are not  printed  if   this  option
equals  "1."  A  value of "0"  directs the  program to  print the
results of  the calculations  at all receptors;  the maximum 10
values  are  not  produced.   A  value of  "2" directs  the  program
to  print  the   results  of. the  calculations  at  all  receptor
locations as  well  as  the  maximum  10.  The  default for  this
parameter  is  "0."   The  ISCLT program will  print  less  than 10
values  in cases where  there are  less  than  10 concentration
(deposition) values greater than zero calculated.

Maximum  10  Calculation  Option  1—This  option  directs  the
program  to use  one  of  two  methods  to   calculate and  print
maximum  10  concentration  (or  deposition)  values.   If  this
option  is  .used, option  ISW(12) must  equal  "0."   The  program
determines  the  maximum values  and  receptor  locations from the
set of  all  receptors input.  Method- 1:   A  value  of "1"  directs
the  program to calculate  and print the  maximum 10 values and
respective  receptors   for  each  individual  source   and  to
calculate  and  print  the maximum  10 values   and respective
receptors  for  the  combined  sources  independently  of  each
other.   The output  for individual  sources and combined sources
will in general show a different set  of  receptors.  Method 2:
A value of  "2" directs  the  program  to  first calculate and
print the  maximum  10 values  and respective  receptors  for the
combined   sources   (sum   of   sources)  and   then  print   the
contribution at each receptor of each  individual source to the
combined  sources maximum 10.   This option can  only be  used if
one or  more of the following conditions is met:
                                       4-7
-------
Parameter
  Name
                Condition a - The run uses  an output  tape or  data  file
                              (user  must  specify  NOFILE,  if tape)

                Condition b - The run  uses  an  input  tape or data  file,
                              but has no  input data card sources  (all  are
                              taken  from  tape;  user must  specify NOFILE,
                              if tape)

                Condition c - The total  number  of  input  sources  is  less
                              than  or  equal  to  the minimum  of  I and  J,
                              where

                J = 300

                and

                I =   (E - (Nx + Nv  + 2NXV) - K-L-M)                 (4-1)
                         (Nse(NxNy + N»y»

                E =    the  total  amount  of program data  storage  in  BLANK
                       COMMON.  The  design size is 40,000.

                Nx =   Number  of  points  in  the  input  X-a:-:is  of  the
                       receptor grid system (NXPNTS)

                Ny =   Number  of  points  in  the  input  Y-axis  of  the
                       receptor grid system (NYPNTS)

                Nxy=   Number  of   discrete   (arbitrarily  placed)  input
                       receptors (NXWYPT)

                N,.=   Number of  seasons in the input meteorological data
                       (NSEASN)

                K =    N..(N,N,+N,y)

                         0   ; if ISW(4) = "0"
                L =    OR
                         N,Ny+Nxy;  if ISW(4) = "1" or  "-1"

                       OR
                         N,Ny+N,y;  if ISW{25) = "1"

                       OR
                         2(N,Ny+NXy>; if  ISW(4) and ISW(25) are
                         both non-zero.
                 M =   0;  if  ISW(4) =  1 or  "-1" and ISW(ll) = 2 or
                          if  ISW(7) =  l,or  NSEASN = l,or WGROUP = 0

                       N«Ny+Nxy;  if ISW(4)  =  0 or ISW(ll) ± 2 and if
                         ISW(7) = 1 and NGROUP = 0 and NSEASN = 1
                                       4-8                                12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name
     ISW(12)
     ISW(13!
     ISW(14)
     ISW(15)
Maximum  10  Calculation  Option  2—This  option  directs  the
program to  calculate concentration or deposition  at  a special
set of  user  supplied  discrete  (arbitrarily placed)  receptor
points.   If this  option is  used,  option  ISW(ll) must  equal
"0."  A  value of  "1"  directs the  program  to  expect to  read
from  10   to  50  special  receptors  at  which concentration  or
deposition  is  to be calculated.   If this  option is  selected
and 10  special receptors are input, both  seasonal  and  annual
concentration or deposition values  for  individual sources  and
combined   sources   are  printed  for   the   10   user-specified
receptors.  If more  than 10  special  receptors  are  input,  the
program assumes  the  first  10  points  are  for  season 1,  the
second 10 points are for  season  2,  and the  last  10  points  are
for annual  tables.   This option  requires the parameter  NXWYPT
given below to be  a multiple of  10.  All  input tape or  data
file  sources  are recalculated with this option.  Also,  if  an
input tape  is  being used, the  receptor grid system,  discrete
receptors  and   their   elevations  input  from  the   tape  are
discarded and  the  user inputs the new  special  set of receptor
points  (with  elevations if  ISW(4)  equals  "1"  or   "-1"  and
receptor heights above ground if ISW{25) = "1")  via data card.

Print  Output  Unit  Option—This  option   is  provided   to  enable
the  user  to  print  the  program  output on  a unit  other than
print  unit  "6."   If  this value  is  not  punched  or  a "0"   is
punched,  all  print  output goes to  unit  "6."  Otherwise,  print
output goes to the  specified unit.  Also,  if  this  value   is
punched  non-zero positive,  two  end-of-file marks are written
at the end of the print file.   If ISW(13) is  a  negative  value,
the end-of-file marks are not written.

Optional  File Input  Unit Number—This  option  is provided   to
enable the  user  to  assign the unit number  from  which data are
read  under ISW(5).  If  ISW(14)  is not punched  or is "0," the
program defaults to unit  "2."   If  the input  data   are  being
read  from  a  mass-storage  file,  ISW(14)  must  be   set  to  a
negative value.  A positive value  implies magnetic tape.   Note
that  ISW(14)  is  the internal  file name  used by the  program  to
reference  the  data  file and must be  equated with the external
file  name used to assign the file (see Section 4.2.2).

Optional  File Output  Unit  Number—This option  is provided  to
enable  the user to assign the  unit number to  which tape   or
output file data are written under  ISW(5).   If  ISW(15)  is not
punched or  is "0", the program defaults  to unit  "3."   If the
output  data are being written to a mass-storage file, ISW(15)
must  be  set  to  a negative value.  A  positive  value implies
magnetic  tape.  Note  that  ISW(15)  is  the  internal  file name
used  by the  program to reference  the  data file  and must   be
equated  with the  external  file name used  to assign the file
(see  Section  4.2.2).
                                       4-9
                                                         12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name
     ISW(16)
     ISW(17)
     ISW(18)
     ISW(19)
      ISW(20)
      ISW(21)
      ISW{22)
Print Output Paging  Option—This  option enables the user to
minimize the number  of  print  output pages.  A  value  of "1"
directs  the  program  to minimize  the  output  pages  by not
starting a  new page  with  each type  of  output table.   If
this  option  is  not  punched  or  is "0".  the   program  will
start each unrelated output  table on a  new  page.   The user
is  cautioned  not  to exercise  this  option until  familiar
with the output format because the  condensed listing  may be
confusing.

Lines  Per  Page  Option—This  option  is provided  to  enable
the user to  specify the number of  print lines per page on
the output  printer.  The  correct number  of lines per page
is  necessary  for  the  program  to   maintain  the  output
format.   If  this   value   is  not  punched  or   is   "0",  the
program defaults to 57 print lines per page.

Optional  Format  for Joint  Frequency  of  Occurrence—This
parameter is a switch used to inform the program whether it
is  to use  a default  format to  read the joint  frequency of
occurrence  of   speed and  direction  (FREQ)  or   to  input the
format via data  card.  If  this option  is  not  punched or is
"0",  the program  uses  the default format  given  under FMT
below.  If this  option  is  set to a value  of "1",  the array
FMT below is read by  the program.

Option  to Calculate Plume Rise  as a  Function of Downwind
Distance—This  option  is  applicable  to all  stack  sources
and   if  set  equal   to  "0"  or  not  punched,   the  downwind
distance is  not considered  in calculating  the plume  rise.
If  ISW(19)  is  set equal to "1",  the  plume  rise calculation
is  a  function of downwind distance.   ISW(19)  is  set  to "0"
if  the  regulatory default  option  (ISW(22» is selected.

Option   to  Add  the  Briggs   (1974)   Stack-Tip  Downwash
Correction  to Stack  Sources—This  option is  applicable to
all  stack sources  and  if set equal  to "0"  or not punched,
no  downwash correction  is  made.   If  ISW(20)  is set equal to
"1",  the  Briggs (1974)  downwash correction  is  applied to
the stack  height for all  stack  sources.  ISW(20)  is set to
"1"  if  the  regulatory default option  (ISW(22))  is  selected.

Buoyancy-Induced Dispersion  Option—Allows  the  program to
modify  the   dispersion   coefficients   to   account   for
buoyancy-induced dispersion.   A value  of  "0" directs the
program  to   modify  the   dispersion   coefficients   for
stack-type   sources  while a  "1"  directs  the  program to
bypass  the  modification.   ISW(21)  is  set  to  "0"  if the
regulatory default  option  (ISW(22))  is selected.

Regulatory Default Option—If chosen  (this  option is chosen
if  ISW (22)  =  0, otherwise ISW(22)  should  be set to  1), the
program will  internally  re-define some user   defined  input
                                       4-10
-------
Parameter
  Name

    ISW(22)
      Gont.
         options  to  produce  a  simulation consistent  with  EPA  regulatory
         recommendations.   The following  features  are ^.incorporated  when
         this  option is  selected:

         1)  Final plume  rise is used at  all  downwind receptor locations.
         2)  Stack-tip downwash effects are included.
         3)  Buoyancy-induced dispersion  effects  are  parameterized.
         4)  Default   wind  profile  coefficients  are assigned  (.07,  .07,
            .10,  .15, .35,  .55,  for the  rural  mode; and  .15,   .15,  .20,
            .25,  .30, .30  for  the  urban  modes).
         5)  Default  vertical potential  temperature gradients are assigned
            (A:0.0,  BrO.O, C:0.0,  D:0.0, E:0.02,  F:0.035  °K/m)
         6)  A  decay  half-life  of  4 hours is  assigned if SC>2  is modeled  in
            an urban mode; otherwise, no decay is assigned.
         7)  Revised   building  wake  effects  procedure  is selected,  which
            uses   either the  method  of  Huber   and Snyder,  or  that  of
            Schulman  and  Scire,   depending  on the   stack height and
            building dimensions  (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).

         Note   that   the  model  selects   the  appropriate urban  or  rural
         mixing  height,  and  that building  downwash is  calculated  when
         appropriate.

ISW(23)  Pollutant  Indicator  Switch—If SC>2  is  modeled the user  should
         set this option equal to  "0".   If  a pollutant other than  S02  is
         modeled  the  user  should  set this option  equal  to "1".   Note,
         this  switch is  only used when ISW(22) = 0.

ISW(24)  Input Debug Switch—If  the user wants input data printed  as soon
         as it is  entered  set  this option  to  "0",  otherwise set this
         option  to   "1".    Note:    any   input  data  resulting   from  the
         selection of ISW(6) will also be printed.

ISW(25)  Above Ground ("flagpole")  Receptor Option  - Allows the user  to
         model receptor heights   above  local terrain.   A  value  of  "1"
         directs  the program to  read user-provided  receptor  heights above
         local terrain.   The  default value  of "0" assumes no heights are
         provided.  This option  is available  regardless  of the  regulatory
         default  option setting.

NSOURC   Number of  Data Card  Input Sources—This parameter  specifies the
         number  of  input  card image sources.   This includes card images
         that  specify a new  source being  entered  and  card images  that
         specify modifications or deletions to  sources input from tape  or
         data file.   If this  value is not punched or is "0", the  program
         assumes  all  sources  are  input  from tape or data  file.   Also,  if
         a negative  value is punched for this parameter, the program will
         continue to  read source  data  card images  until it  encounters  an
         end-of-file  or a negative  source  identification number   in the
         parameter  NUMS  below.    There  is  no  limit  to  the  number  of
         sources   the program can  process  when  using   tape  output  (see
         (ISW(H)).

NGROUP   Number  of  Source  Combination  Groups—This  parameter is  used  to
         select  concentration   (deposition)  calculations   for  specific
                                      4-11
                                                                     12/87
-------
NGROUP     sources  or  source  combinations  to  be  printed   .under  the
  Cont.    parameter ISW(8)  above.   A source combination consists  of  one
           Parameter or more sources and is the sum of  the  concentrations
           (deposition) calculated for those^sotlrces.   If the user desires
           only individual source output  or only all sources  combined  or
           both,  the  parameter NGROUP  is  not  punched or is set  equal  to
           "0"  and ISW{8)  is set  according  to which option  the  user
           desires.  Also,  if NGROUP  is  not punched  or is set  equal  to
           "0", the  parameters NOCOMB  and IDSOR below are omitted from
           the  input data.   However,  if NGROUP is set  greater than zero,
           the  program assumes the  user  desires to  NGROUP restrict  the
           output of concentration  tables  to select individual sources or
           select combinations of sources  or  both,  depending  on ISW(8).
           The  maximum value for NGROUP  is 20.   If  more  than 20 source
           combinations  are  desired  they  must  be produced  in  multiple
           runs of  ISCLT.  This  can be done by  specifying  an  output tape
           or data file  on the first execution.   The user  would  then use
           this tape for input on subsequent runs to produce the remaining
           desired  source  combinations.   Also,  only  a few of  the data
           cards  and  values  from the initial data  deck are  required  on
           subsequent  runs.    The  parameter  NGROUP  cannot  be  used  or
           punched  non-zero  unless   one   or  more   of   the  following
           conditions  is met:

           Condition a - The  run  uses an  output  tape  or data  file (user
                         must specify NOFILE, if tape)

           Condition b - The  run  uses an  input tape or data file, but has
                         no  input data card  sources  (all  are taken from
                         tape,  NSOURC =  "0")  (user must  specify NOFILE,
                         if  tape)

           Condition c - The  total  number  of  input   sources  (NSOURC   +
                         input tape sources)  is  less than  or  equal  to the
                         minimum of I and  J, where

                         J = 300

                         and

                         I = [E - (N* + Ny + 2N» Ny)                 (4-2)
                             - K -  L  -  M]/[N,.(N« Ny +  Nxy)]


   All of the variables  in this  equation  except K  are the  same  as those
   defined under ISW(ll)  above.
                          0      ;  if  ISW<8)=1 and
   K  =                   or
                   N,.(N,Ny+Niy);  if  ISW(8)*1 or ISW(11)=2
                                  4-12                                 12/87
-------
Parameter
  Nam'e

     NXPNTS
X-Azis/Range Receptor  Grid  Size-This  parameter specifies  the
number of east-west  receptor  grid locations for the  Cartesian
coordinate  system  X-axis,  or  the  number  of  receptor  grid
ranges (rings)  in the polar  coordinate  system,  depending  on
which  receptor  grid  system  is  chosen  by  the   user  under
parameter ISW(2).  This  is the number of  X-axis  points  to  be
input  or the  number  of  X-axis  points  to  be  automatically
generated by the program.  A value of "0"  (not  punched directs
the program to assume  there is no regular  receptor  grid being
used.  The maximum value  of this parameter is related  to other
parameter values and is given by the  equation
                E  > [N,+Ny+2N»y]  + [(KN.+I)
                                                          (4-3)
                where all  variables in  the  above  equation  are the  same  as
                those defined under ISW(ll) above  except  K  and I,  which  are
                defined  as
                       1  ;   if ISW(8)=1 and
                   K =  or
                       2  ;   if ISW(8)^1  or ISW(11)=2
                       0  ;   if ISW(4)=0 (no terrain)
                        or
                   1=1  ;   if ISW(4)=1 or "-1"  or if ISW(25)  = 1
                        or
                       2  ;   if ISW(4)  and ISW(25)  are both non zero

                This parameter is ignored  by the program if tape  or  data file
                input is being used.

     NYPNTS     Y-Axis/Azimuth  Receptor Grid  Size—This  parameter  specifies
                the  number  of north-south  receptor  grid  locations for  the
                Cartesian coordinate system  Y-axis, or the number  of receptor
                azimuth  bearings  from  the origin  in  the  polar  coordinate
                system, depending on which receptor grid  system is  chosen  by
                the user  under parameter  ISW(2).   If the parameter  NXPNTS  is
                set non-zero,  the parameter NYPNTS must also be  non-zero.   The
                maximum value  of  this  parameter  is given by the equation under
                NXPNTS above.   The parameter NYPNTS is ignored by  the  program
                if tape or data file input is being used.

     NXWYPT     Number   of   Discrete   (Arbitrarily  Placed)   Receptors—This
                parameter  specifies  the   total  number  of  discrete  receptor
                points  to  be input  to  the  program.   A  value  of  "0"  (not
                punched) directs  the  program to  assume  no  discrete  receptors
                are being  used.   This  parameter must be set to  a  multiple  of
                10 if  option  ISW(12)  is selected.  Also, the maximum value  of
                this parameter is limited  by  the equation  given under NXPNTS
                above.  This parameter is ignored by the program  if input tape
                or  data  file is  being used,  except in  the  case  where  the
                ISW(12) option has been selected.
                                      4-13
                                                         12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name

     NSEASN
     NSTBLE
     NSPEED
     NSCTOR
     NOFILE
Number- of  Seasons—This  parameter  specifies  the  number  of
seasons or months  in the  input  meteorological  data.  A  value
of  "0"  (not  punched)  defaults  to  "I".    Also,   if  annual
meteorological data  are  being  used,  a  value  of  "1"  should be
specified.   The  maximum  value of this  parameter  is  "4".   If
monthly STAR summaries and seasonal average mixing  heights  and
ambient   air   temperatures  are  used   to   calculate  monthly
concentration or deposition values for  each month of the  year,
four  separate program  runs,   each  containing three "seasons"
(months),  are required.   This  parameter  is ignored  by  the
program if an input tape or data file is being used.

Number   of • Paquill  Stability  Categories—This   parameter
specifies the  number of  Pasquill  stability  categories in  the
input   joint   frequency  of   occurrence  of  wind   speed  and
direction  (FREQ).   A  value  of  "0"  (not  punched)   causes  the
program  to  default  to  "6"  (maximum).   This   parameter  is
ignored by the program if an  input tape or data file is  being
used.

Number  of Wind Speed  Categories—This  parameter  specifies  the
number  of  wind speed categories  in  the  input joint frequency
of  occurrence  of  wind speed and direction  (FREQ).   A value or
"0"   (not  punched)  causes  the  program  to  default  to  "6"
(maximum).   This   parameter  is  ignored  by  the  program  if an
input tape or data file is being used.

Number  of  Wind  Direction Sector  Categories—This  parameter
specifies  the number  of  wind direction sector categories in
the  input  joint  frequency of occurrence  of wind  speed  and
direction  (FREQ).   A  value of  "0"  (not punched)  causes  the
program to  assume the standard  "16"  (maximum)  sectors are to
be  used  (see  Section  2.2.1.2).   This  parameter  is ignored by
the program  if an  input tape or data file is  being used.

Tape  Data Set File Number—This  parameter specifies the output
tape  file number  or, if  only  an input  tape  is  being used, the
input tape  file  number.   This parameter  is  used by the  ISCLT
program to position  the  tape at the correct file  if multiple
passes  through the data are required.    This  parameter must be
input if the  user is using Condition  a or  Condition b under
ISW(ll)  and/or under NGROUP.   This parameter  does  not apply to
runs  that  use mass-storage  (assumed  one  file)  or runs  that
satisfy Condition c  under ISW(ll) and/or  NGROUP.    Also,  the
user  must position input and  output tapes at the correct files
prior to executing the ISCLT program.
                                       4-14
-------
Parameter
  Name
     NOCOMB     Number  of   Sources   Defining  Combined  Source   Groups—This
                parameter is not read  by  the  program  if  the parameter  NGROUP
                above is zero or not  punched.   Otherwise,  this  parameter is an
                array of NGROUP  values where  each value gives  the number  of
                source   identification  numbers  used  to   define  a   source
                combination.  The source  identification numh_r  is  that  number
                assigned to each  source  by  the  user under the  source  input
                parameter  NUMS  below.   An   example  and  a  more   detailed
                discussion  of the use  of  this parameter  is  given  under  IDSORC
                below.  A maximum of  20 values is  provided  for this array.

     IDSORC     Combined Source Group  Defining  Sources—This parameter  is  not
                read  by  the program if the parameter  NGROUP above is zero or
                not punched.  Otherwise,  this  parameter  is  an array of  source
                identification numbers  that  define each combined  source group
                to be output.  The values punched into the  array  NOCOMB above
                indicate how many source identification  numbers  are punched
                into  this array successively  for  each  combined source output.
                The  source  identification numbers  can  be punched  in two ways.
                The first is  to  punch  a positive  value directing  the  program
                to include  that  specific  source  in the combined  output.   The
                second is to punch a  negative  value.   When a  negative  value is
                punched, the  program  includes all sources with  identification
                numbers less than or equal to it  in absolute value.   Also,  if
                the negative value is  preceded by a positive value in  the same
                defining  group,   that  source  is  also   included  with   those
                defined by  the  negative  number,  but no  sources with  a  lesser
                source  identification  number  are  included.    For   example,
                assume  NGROUP above  is set  equal  to  4 and the  array  NOCOMB
                contains the values 3,  2, 1,  0.  Also, assume  the entire  set
                of  input  sources  is  defined by  the  source  identification
                numbers 5,  72, 123, 223, 901,  902,  1201,  1202, 1205, 1206,  and
                1207.   To  this  point we  have  a total  of 11  input sources  and
                we desire  to see  4  combinations  of sources taken from these
                11.   Also,   the array  NOCOMB  indicates  that  the first  3  values
                in the  array IDSORC  defines  the first source combination,  the
                next  2  values   (4th  and  5th) in  IDSORC   define  the  second
                combination,  the  6th  value   in   IDSORC  defines the   third
                combination  and  the  last combination  has no  defining  (0)
                sources  so  the  program  assumes   all   11   sources  are   used.
                Similarly,   let the array  IDSORC be set equal to  the  values 5,
                72,  -223, 1201,  -1207,  -902.   The  program  will  first  produce
                combined source  output for source  5,  and all so'urces from 72
                through 223.  The  second combined  source  output  will  include
                sources  1201 through   1207.   The  third will  include  source
                numbers  1  through 902  and the last will-  include  all  sources
                input.   Note that  the source  identification numbers in  each
                defining group   are  in  ascending  order  of  absolute  value.
                Also,  if ISW{8>  equals "2"   (combined output only) and there
                are  groups  with only  one positive  source   number  (individual
                sources),   the   program  logically  treats   these  individual
                sources as combined sources.
                                      4-15
-------
Parameter
  Name

        FMT     Optional   Format   for   Joint  Frequency  of   Occurrence—This
                parameter is  an array which  is  read  by  the  program  only  if
                ISW(18)  is  set  to a  value  of "1".   The  array FMT is used  to
                specify  the  format of the  }oint  frequency of occurrences  of
                wind  speed   and  direction  data   (FREQ,   STAR   summary,
                fi.j.k.a  in  Table 2-4).  The format  punched,  if  used,  must
                include   leading and  ending  parentheses.   If  ISW(18)  is  not
                punched  or  is set to  a value of "0",  the  parameter  FMT  is
                omitted  from  the  input deck  and  the program  uses  the  default
                format "(6F10.0)".  This  default  format  specifies  that  there
                are  6  real  values   per   card   occupying   10  columns   each,
                including the decimal  point  (period), and  the first value  is
                punched  in columns one through ten.   If the  user has  received
                the STAR data  from an outside source, the  deck must also  be
                checked  for the proper order as well  as format.

    b.  Receptor Data  These data  consist  of  the  (X,Y)  or  (range,  azimuth)

locations of  all  receptor  points  as well  as the  elevations  of the  receptors

above  mean  sea  level  and  heights  of receptors  above  local terrain.   The

minimum  distance  in meters  between source  and receptor for which  calculations

are made is given by:
Stack Sources:
           minimum distance =
1           ; no wake effects
or
MAX(1,3*HB) ; wake effects, squat building
or
MAX(1,3*HW) ; wake effects, tall building
Volume Sources:

           minimum distance =

Area Sources:

           minimum distance =

                   Where:
1 + 2.15*SIGYO
1 + 0.5*BW
                         HB = height of building (regular or direction specific)
                         HW = width of building (regular or direction specific)
                      SIGYO = standard   deviation   of   the    lateral   source
                              dimension of building
                         BW = width of area source
                                      4-16
                                    12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name
                Receptor Grid  System  X-Axis or  Range — This  parameter  is  read
                by the  program only if  the parameters NXPNTS  and NYPNTS  are
                non-zero and  only  if an input tape  or data file is  not  being
                used.   This parameter is an array of values in  ascending  order
                that  defines  the   X-axis   or   ranges   (rings)   (depending  on
                ISW(2)) of  the receptor grid  system in meters.   If only  the
                first  2 values on  the  input card are punched  and the parameter
                NXPNTS  is  greater  than 2, the program  assumes  the X-axis
                (range) is to  be generated automatically and  assumes the  first
                value  punched  is the starting  coordinate  and  the second  value
                punched is an increment used to generate the remaining NXPNTS
                evenly-spaced points.   If all receptor  points  are being input,
                NXPNTS values must  be punched.

                Receptor Grid  System Y-Axis  or Azimuth — This  parameter is read
                by the  program only if  the parameters NXPNTS  and NYPNTS  are
                non-zero and  only  if an input tape  or data file is  not  being
                used.   This parameter is an array of values in  ascending  order
                that  defines  the  Y-axis  or  azimuth   bearings (depending  on
                ISW(2)) of the receptor  grid system in meters  or degrees.   If
                only  the  first 2  values on the  input  card are  punched (third
                and fourth  values  are  zero)   and  the  parameter   NYPNTS  is
                greater than  2, the  program assumes the first value punched is
                the starting  coordinate and the second value  punched is  the
                increment used to  generate the  remaining NYPNTS evenly-spaced
                (rectangular or angular) points.  If  all  receptor  points  are
                being   input,  NYPNTS   values   must  be  punched.    If  polar
                coordinates are being used,  Y  is measured clockwise  from  zero
                degrees (north).

                Elevation of  Grid  System Receptors — This  parameter is not read
                by the program if the parameter  ISW(4)  is  zero or  if an  input
                tape  is being used or  if  NXPNTS or NYPNTS eguals  zero.   This
                parameter is  an  array  specifying  the  terrain  elevation  (feet
                if ISW(4)=1,  meters  if  ISW(4)=-1)  above mean  sea level at each
                receptor of  the  Cartesian or polar grid  system.    There  are
                NXPNTS  •  NYPNTS  values  read into  this array.   The  program
                starts  the  input  of  values   with the   first  Y  coordinate
                specified  and reads the elevations for each X coordinate  at
                that  Y  in  the same order as the X  coordinates  were  input.   A
                new  data  card is  started for  each Y value  and  the NXPNTS
                elevations  for that  Y  are  read.   The  program  will  expect
                NYPNTS  groups  of  data cards  with NXPNTS  elevation values
                punched in each group.   For example, assume we  have  a 5  by 5
                Cartesian  or  polar receptor  array.   The values  Zi  through
                Z$  are  read  from  the  first  card  group,   the   values  Z«
                through  Zio  from  the  second  card  group  and  Zzi  through
                    from the last card group.
        RHT     Above  Ground   ("flagpole")  Grid  Receptor  Heights   -  This
                parameter is not  read by the program if  the  parameter ISW(25)
                is  zero  or if  an input tape  is being used  or  if NXPNTS  or
                NYPNTS equals zero.   This  parameter is an array specifying the
                receptor  heights  (meters)  above  local   terrain  elevation  at
                each  receptor  of the  Cartes ion  or  polar grid system.   The
                method of input is similar to that of Z described above.
                                      4-17                               12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name
                                     Rectangular
Z21 ,


Z6
Zl
Z22 .


Z7
Z2
Z23 ,


Z8
23
Z24 ,J


Z9
Z4
                                                           25
                              X
     z
  (Cont.)
                                                                    - X5
                                                                    - X4

                                                                    - X3

                                                                    - X2

                                                                    - XI
                                   4-18
-------
Parameter
  Name

          X     Discrete  (Arbitrarily   Placed)   Receptor  X  or   Range—This
  (Discrete)    parameter is not read by the  program  if  the parameter  NXWYPT
                is zero or  if  the  program is  using an  input  tape  or data file
                with the  ISW(12)  option  set  to zero.   This parameter  is  an
                array defining  all  of  the discrete  receptor  X points.   The
                values are  either  east-west distances  or  radial distances  in
                meters,  depending on the  type  of reference  system  specified by
                ISW(3).   NXWYPT points are read by the program.

          Y     Discrete  (Arbitrarily   Placed)   Receptor  Y  or  Azimuth—This
  (Discrete)    parameter is not  read by the program  if the parameter  NXWYPT
                is zero or if the program  is  using an input tape or  data  file
                with  the  ISW(12)  option  set  to zero-.  This  parameter  is  an
                array defining  all  of the discrete receptor Y points  in  meters
                and degrees.   The  values  are  either  north-south  distances or
                azimuth bearings  (angular distances)   measured  clockwise  from
                zero degrees (north  depending on the  type  of  reference  system
                specified by ISW(3).   NXWYPT points are read by the program.

          Z     Elevation of the Discrete  (Arbitrarily  Placed)  Receptors—This
  (Discrete)    parameter is not  read by the program  if the  parameter  ISW(4)
                is zero or  if the  parameter NXWYPT equals zero of  if an input
                file  is being  used  with the  ISW(12)  option  equal  to  zero.
                This parameter  is  an array specifying  the terrain  elevation
                (feet if  ISW(4)=1, meters if  ISW(4)=-1) at each of the  NXWYPT
                discrete receptors.

        RHT     Above Ground ("flagpole")  Discrete  Receptor  Heights  -  This
  (Discrete)    parameter is not read by the  program if the  parameter ISW(31)
                is zero or  if the  parameter NXWYPT equals zero or  if an input
                file  is being  used  with the  ISW(12)  option  equal  to  zero.
                This  parameter  is an  array  specifying the  receptor  heights
                (meters)  above  local terrain  elevation at each of the  NXWYPT
                discrete receptors.

    c.  Identification  Labels  and  Model  Constants.    These  data  consist  of
parameters  pertaining  to   heading  and  identification  labels  and  program
constants.  These  data,  except  for TITLE, are  not read by  the  program  if an
input tape or data file is being used.

Parameter
  Name

      TITLE     Page Heading Label—This  parameter is an array that  allows up
                to  80 characters  of title information to  be  printed  as the
                first line of each output page.

      UNITS     Concentration/Deposition    and    Source   Units    Label—This
                parameter is an array used for the optional  input  of two unit
                labels.   The  first  40 characters  of  this  array are provided
                for  an  optional  output  units  label  for  concentration  or
                deposition.  This  label  is defaulted  to "micrograms  per cubic
                meter"  for  concentration  and  "grams  per  square meter"  for
                deposition,  if  the  parameter  TK below  is  not  punched or is
                "0".  The  second 40  characters of this array  are  provided for
                                      4-19                               12/87
-------
Parameter
  Name
      UNITS     an optional source  input  units  label.   This  label  is  defaulted
       Cont.     to  "grams  per  second"   for  concentration  or   "grams"   for
                deposition  for  stacks and volume  sources and  to "grams  per
                second per  square meter"  or  "grams per square meter"  for  area
                sources,  if the parameter TK below is not  punched or  is "0".

     ROTATE     Wind  Direction Correction Angle—This  parameter  is  used  to
                correct for any difference between north  as  defined by  the  X,
                Y reference  grid  system  and  north as  defined  by  the  weather
                station at  which the  wind direction  data were   recorded.   The
                value   of   ROTATE   (degrees)    is   subtracted  from   each
                wind-direction  sector  angle   (THETA).    This   parameter   is
                positive  if  the positive  Y  axis of the  reference grid system
                points  to "the  right  of  north  as  defined by  the  weather
                station.    Most  weather stations  record direction  relative  to
                true north and the  center of most grid systems are relative  to
                true  north.   However, some  weather stations record  direction
                relative to magnetic north and the ends of some  UTM  (Universal
                Transverse  Mercator)   zones  are  not  oriented towards  true
                north.  The user is cautioned to check the wind  data  as errors
                in  the  wind direction  distribution  will  lead to  erroneous
                program results.  The default value of ROTATE is "0".

         TK     Model  Units Conversion Factor—This  parameter  is  provided  to
                give  the  user flexibility  in the source  input  units  used and
                the  concentration  or  deposition output  units   desired.   This
                parameter  is  a  direct   multiplier  of   the  concentration  or
                deposition  equation.   If  this parameter  is  not  punched or  is
                set  to a  value of "0",  the program  defaults  to  "1  x  10s"
                micrograms  per  gram  for   concentration  and  to   "1"   for
                deposition.    This    default   assumes    the   user   desires
                concentration in micrograms  per cubic  meter or deposition  in
                grams  per square meter  and  the input  source units  are grams
                per  second or total  grams for  stack and volume  sources  and
                grams  per second per  square  meter or  grams per  square meter
                for  area  sources,  depending on  whether the   program  is  to
                calculate  concentration  or deposition.   Also,   if the default
                value  for  this parameter is selected, the program  defaults the
                unit  labels  in the  array UNITS above.  If the  user  chooses to
                input  this parameter  for other units, he must  also  input the
                units  labels in UNITS above.  This  parameter corresponds  to K
                in Equations  (2-51),  (2-56),  (2-57), and  (2-58).

         ZR     Weather Station Recording  Height—This  parameter is  the height
                above  ground level  in meters at which  the meteorological  data
                were  recorded.   If this  parameter is not  punched  or has  a
                value  of  "0",  the  program  defaults  to "10"  meters.   This
                parameter, corresponds to Z\ in Equation (2-1).

          G     Acceleration  Due to Gravity—This parameter, which is  used in
                the   plume  rise  calculations,  is  the  acceleration  due  to
                gravity.   If this  parameter  is not punched  or  has a  value of
                                      4 20
-------
Parameter
  Name

          G     "0", the  program uses  "9.8"  meters per second squared  as  the
       Cont.     default value.   This  parameter corresponds  to g in  equation
                (2-3).

      DECAY     Decay   Coefficient—This   parameter    is    the    coefficient
                (seconds'1)  of  time-dependent  pollutant removal  by  physical
                or  chemical  processes  (Equations  (2-20),  (2-21)).   If  SOz  is
                modeled in an Urban  Mode and  the  regulatory default  option
                (ISW(22))   is  chosen,  the  program  assigns a  decay  coefficient
                corresponding  to  a  half  life  of  four  hours.   Otherwise,
                pollutant  decay is not considered.


    d.   Meteorological  Data.   These   data   are  the   meteorological   input

parameters classified  according  to one  or  more  of  the categories  of  wind

speed,  Pasquill  stability,  wind  direction  and  season  or  annual.    These

parameters are not read by the program  if  an  input tape or data  file  is being

used.
       FREQ     Joint  Frequency of  Occurrence—This  parameter array  consists
                of  the  seasonal or  annual  joint  frequency  of occurrence  of
                wind-speed and  wind-direction categories  classified  according
                to   the   Pasquill   stability   categories   (STAR   summary,
                fi.j.k.a  in  Table  2-4).   This  parameter  has  no  default  and
                must be  input   in "the  correct order.   The  program begins  by
                reading  the  joint  frequency table for  season  1  (winter)  and
                stability category  1 (Pasquill  A  stability).   The first  data
                card contains the  joint  frequencies  of wind speed categories 1
                through  6 (1  through  NSPEED)  for the  first  wind  direction
                category  (north).    The  second  data  card  contains the  joint
                frequencies  of  wind speed  categories  1   through 6  for  the
                second wind  direction  category (north-northeast).   The program
                continues in this  manner  until  the joint  frequencies of  the
                last   direction  category   (north-northwest)   for   stability
                category 1,  season 1 have been read.  The  program  then repeats
                this same  read sequence  for stability category 2 (Pasquill B
                stability) and  season  1.   When  all of the  stability  category
                values  for  season 1 have been  read,  the  program  repeats  the
                read sequence for  season  2,  season 3, etc.,  until all of  the
                joint  frequency values have  been  read.   There are a  total  of
                NSPEED«NSCTOR»NSTBLE»NSEASN  data cards.   If  the  total sum  of
                the  joint frequency of occurrences for any  season (or annual)
                does not add up to 1, the  program  will  automatically  normalize
                the  joint   frequency   distribution   by  dividing  each  joint
                frequency  by  the  total  sum.    Also,  the program  assumes
                stability categories 1  through 6 are Pasquill stabilities A
                FREQfhrough  F.   Seasons   1  through  4  are  normally  winter,
                spriny,  summer  and  fall.   See the parameter FMT above for  the
                format of these data.
-------
Parameter
  Name
         TA     Average Ambient Air Temperature—This  parameter  array consists
                of   the   average   ambient   air   temperatures    (Ta;i<,4   in
                Table 2-4),  classified according  to  season  (or  annual)  and
                stability category, in  degrees Kelvin.   One data card  is read
                for each season  (1  to NSEASN) with the  temperature  values for
                stability  categories  1  through  NSTBLE  punched  across  the
                card.   When  the  program  has   completed   reading  these  data
                cards, it will scan  all of  the  values  in  the order of  input
                and,  if any  value  is  not punched or is  zero,  the program will
                default to the last non-zero value of TA it encountered.

         HM     Mixing Heights—This  parameter  array  consists  of  the  median
                mixing  layer   height  in  meters   (Hm/i,k,i  in   Table   2-4)
                classified according  to wind speed,  stability and  season (or
                annual).  The  program begins reading the mixing  layer  heights
                for  season  1.   The  program  reads the mixing  layer  height
                •values  for  each wind  speed category  <1 to NSPEED)  from each
                card.  There are NSTBLE (1 through NSTBLE)  cards  read for each
                season.  The program scans  each value  input  in the order of
                input and, for each  season,  if a zero or non-punched value is
                found,  the  program   defaults   to  the  last  non-zero  value
                encountered  within the  values  for  that   season.    The  ISCLT
                program  automatically  uses  a  mixing  height  value of  10000
                meters for  the  E and F stability  categories when  the  program
                is run in the Rural Mode.

       DPDZ     Potential  Temperature Gradient—This parameter  array consists
                of the vertical gradients of potential temperature (BQ/Bzl/k
                in Table  2-4)  classified  according to wind speed and stability
                category,  in units  of  degrees  Kelvin  per   meter.    There  are
                NSTBLE  (1  through  NSTBLE)  data cards read  with  the values for
                wind  speed categories 1 through NSPEED read from  each card.  A
                value of  39/3z greater  than  zero  indicates  stable  thermal
                stratification   and  a   value  of   36/3z   less   than   zero
                indicates  unstable  thermal  stratification.   However, because a
                blank input  field  is interpreted as zero,  the program  assumes
                a  zero input value  means a  default  value  is  desired.  Also,
                because the  same plume rise equation is  used for adiabatic and
                unstable  conditions,  a  negative  input  value will  direct the
                program  to  use  the  plume  rise  equations  for  adiabatic  or
                unstable  thermal  stratification.   If the first value on  a data
                card  is  not punched or is  zero,  a default  value is  used that
                depends  on  the stability category.  -If  the stability  category
                is  A,  B,   C or  D,  the  value   is  left  as  a  zero  and the
                adiabatic/unstable  plume rise  equation is  used.   However, if
                the   stability category is  E or  F,  the  value  defaulted is
                0.02  degrees Kelvin per meter  for E  and 0.035 degrees  Kelvin
                per  meter for F stability.  When  any  of  the  second  through
                sixth values of DPDZ on a  data  card are input as a zero  or are
                blank,  the program will default to  the previous value on the
                data   card.   If   the  regulatory  default  option  is  selected
                 (ISW(22)=0)  the default  values  will  override any  user   input
                values.
                                       4-22
-------
Parameter
  Name
       UBAR
      THETA
Wind Speed—This  parameter  array consists  of the  median  wind
speeds  in meters  per second  (ui  in Table  2-4)  for  the  wind
speed  categories  used   in   the  calculation  of   the   joint
frequency  of  occurrence  of  wind  speed  and direction  (STAR
summary).  There  are NSPEED  values  read from  this card.   If
any value  is not  punched or is zero, the  program  defaults to
the following set of values:   1.5, 2.5, 4.3,  6.8, 9.5  and  12.5
meters per second.

Wind  Direction—This parameter  array consists  of  the  median
wind  direction  angles   in   degrees   for  the   wind-direction
categories used  in  the calculation  of the  joint  frequency of
occurrence of  wind speed  and direction (STAR summary).   There
are NSCTOR values  read from  1 to 2 data cards and if the first
two values  of this  array are  not  punched or  are zero,  the
program  defaults  to the following standard  set  of  values:   0,
22.5, 45,  67.5,  90,  . .  .  ,  337.5  degrees  (N,  NNE,  NE	
NNW).  The wind  direction is that angle from which the wind is
blowing, measured clockwise from zero degrees (north).

Wind  Speed Power  Law  Exponent—This parameter array  consists
of  the   wind  speed  power law  exponent  (p  in  Equation  (2-1))
classified according to wind speed and stability categories  1
through  NSTBLE.   If  the  first  value on any data card in  this
set  is  not punched  or is zero,  the program  defaults to  the
value from the following  set of values:   Rural A  =  .07,  B =
.07, C  = .10, D =  .15, E =  .35, F  =  .55;  Urban A =  .15,  B  =
.15,  C   =  .20,  D =  .25,  E   =  .30,  F =  .30 depending  on  the
stability  category A through  F.   Also,  if  any of  the  second
through  last  values  on a card is not punched or  is zero,  the
value is defaulted to the previous value on  the  data card.   If
a  negative value  is input,  the  result  is  a wind  speed power
law  exponent  of  zero.   If  the regulatory  default option is
selected   (ISW(22)=0)  the  default  values   will  override  any
user-input values.
    e. Source Data.  These data consists of all  necessary information required

for  each source.  These  data are  divided  into three  groups:   (1)  parameters

that  are required for all source types,  (2)  parameters that are  required for

stack type  sources,  and  (3) parameters  that are required  for volume sources

and area sources.  The order  of  input  of these parameters is given  at the end

of this  section.
                                      4-23
-------
Parameter
  Name
       NUMS     Source  Identification Number—This  parameter  is  the  source
                identification number and  is a  1- to 5-digit integer.   If this
                number is negative, the program assumes NUMS is only a  flag  to
                terminate the  card source  input  data.  Also,  if NUMS  is  not
                punched  or  is  zero,  the  program  will default  NUMS  to  the
                relative  sequence number  of the  source  input.   This  number
                cannot be defaulted if  source  data are  also being  input  from
                tape or  data  file.   Sources  must be  input  in  ascending order
                of the source  identification number.

       DISP     Source Disposition—This  parameter is  a flag  that  tells  the
                program what to  do  with the source.   If this  parameter is not
                punched or has  a value of  "0", the  program assumes  this  is  a
                new  source  for  which  concentration  or deposition  is to  be
                calculated.   Also,  if the  program is  using  an  input  tape  or
                data file, this  new source will be merged into the old sources
                from file or will replace a file  source  with the same source
                identification  number.   If the parameter  DISP has  a  value  of
                "1", the program assumes that the  file  input  source  having the
                same  source  identification  number is  to  be deleted  from the
                source inventory.   The  program  removes  the  source as  well  as
                the concentration or  deposition  arrays for the source.  If the
                parameter DISP  has a  value of  "2",   the  program assumes  the
                source strengths  to be read from data card for this source are
                to be  used  to  rescale the  concentration or  deposition values
                of  the tape input  source with the  same source  identification
                number.  The new source  strengths input from card replace the
                old values taken from the input tape  and  the concentration or
                deposition arrays taken  from tape are  multiplied by  the ratio
                of the new  and old source strengths.  The DISP option equal to
                "2" can  only  be used  if  QFLG  equals  zero  and the  tape input
                source has QFLG equal to zero.

       TYPE     Source  TYPE—This parameter is  a flag  that  tells the program
                what type of source is being input.   If this  parameter is not
                punched  or  is  "0",  the  program  assumes  a stack  source.   If
                this  parameter  has  a  value  of  "1",  the   program  assumes  a
                volume  source.    Similarly,  if  this  parameter  has a  value  of
                "2", an area source is assumed.

       QFLG     Source  Emission Option—This parameter is  a  flag  that tells
                the  program how the  input source  emissions are  varied.  If
                this  value  is  not punched or is  "0",  the  program  assumes the
                source emissions  vary by  season  (or annual) and  only NSEASN
                values are read by  the program.  If  this parameter has a value
                of  "1",  the   program assumes  the  source  emissions  vary  by
                stability category  and season.   If this parameter has a value
                of  "2",  the program assumes the  source emissions vary by wind
                speed  category  and season.  If this  parameter  has a  value  of
                "3",  the program assumes  the  source  emissions  vary hy wind
                speed  category,  stability  category  and season.   The  order of
                input  of the  source  strengths under  each  of these options is
                discussed under the parameter Q below.
                                       4-24
-------
Parameter
  Name
         DX     Source  X  Coordinate—This  parameter  gives  the  Cartesian  X
                (east-west) coordinate  in  meters  of  the  source  center  for
                stack and  volume  sources  and  the  southwest  corner for  area
                sources   (X in  Table  2-6)   relative   to  the   origin  of  the
                reference grid system  being  used.

         DY     Source  Y  Coordinate—This  parameter  gives  the  Cartesian  Y
                (north-south)  coordinate  in meters  of  the source  center  for
                stack and  volume  sources  and  the  southwest  corner for  area
                sources   (Y in  Table  2-6)   relative   to  the   origin  of  the
                reference grid system  being  used.

          H     Height  of  Emission—This  parameter  gives  the  height  above
                ground  in  meters  of  the   pollutant   emission.    For   volume
                sources, this  is the height  to the center of the source.

         ZS     Source  Elevation—This  parameter gives  the terrain  elevation
                in meters  above mean  sea  level at  the  source  location  and  is
                not used by the  program unless receptor terrain elevations are
                being used.

          Q     Source Emission—This  parameter array  gives  the  emission  rate
                of the  source for  each category specified by  QFLG  above.   If
                QFLG above is "0",  NSEASN values are  read from one  data card.
                IF QFLG is  "I",  NSEASN data  cards  are  read  with  the  source
                emission values for stability categories 1 through NSTBLE read
                from  each  card.    If  QFLG  is  "2",  NSEASN data cards are read
                with  the  source emission values for  wind  speed  categories  1
                through NSPEED  read from  each card.   If QFLG is "3", NSPEED (1
                through NSPEED) source emission values  are read from  each data
                card  and  there are NSTBLE  (1 through NSTBLE)  data  cards read
                for each season.  There are  no default values provided  for the
                parameter  Q and  the  program  assumes   "0"  is  a  valid  source
                emission,  the input units of source  emission are:
                                           PARAMETER Q
                Source Type
                  Stack or
                   Volume

                  Area
                *Default units
   Concentration
   Deposition
mass per unit time
    (g/sec)*

mass per unit time
  per unit area
  (g/sec*m2))*
total mass
  (g)*

total mass per unit
      area
      (g/m2)*
                                      4-25
-------
Parameter
  Name
        NVS
         VS
        FRQ
      GAMMA
Number of  Particulate  Size  Categories—This  parameter  gives
the number  of particulate size  categories in  the  particulate
distribution  used  in  calculating  ground-level  deposition  or
concentration  with  deposition  occurring.    If   ground-level
deposition (ISW{1)  =  "2")  is  being calculated, this  parameter
must be  punched and has a maximum value of 20.  Also,  if the
program is calculating concentration and this  value  is punched
greater  than  zero,  concentration with deposition  occurring is
calculated.    If  the  parameter NVS  is greater  than zero,  the
program  reads  NVS  values for  each of the  parameter variables
VS, FRQ and GAMMA below.

Settling Velocity—This  parameter  array is  read  only  if  NVS
above  is greater than zero.   This  parameter  is the  settling
velocity  in  meters   per  second  for  each  particulate  size
category  (1  through  NVS).   No default values  are  provided for
this parameter.

Mass Fraction of Particles—This parameter  is  read  only  if NVS
above  is  greater  than  zero.  This parameter  is  the  mass
fraction of  particulates contained  in  each  particulate  size
category  (1  through  NVS).   No default values  are  provided for
this parameter.

Surface  Reflection Coefficient—This parameter  array is  read
only if  NVS  above  is greater than zero.   This parameter is the
surface  reflection  coefficient  for  each  particulate  size
category  (1  through  NVS).   A value of "0"  indicates no surface
reflection  (total  retention).   A   value   of  "1"  indicates
complete   reflection   from   the   surface.    The   reflection
coefficient  range  is  from  0  to 1  and no  default  values  are
provided.
Stack Source
 Parameters

         TS
        VEL
Stack Gas  Exit  Temperature—This  parameter gives the stack gas
exit  temperature  (T$  in  Table  2-6)  in  degrees  Kelvin.   If
this  parameter  is zero,  the exit temperature  is  set equal to
the ambient  air temperature.  If  this  parameter  is negative,
its absolute  value is added to the  ambient  air temperature to
form  the  stack gas  exit temperature.   For  example,   if  the
stack  gas exit temperature  is  15  degrees  Celsius  above the
ambient  temperature,  enter TS as -15  {the minus  sign  is used
by the program  only as a  flag).

Stack  Gas Exit Velocity—This parameter gives the  stack gas
exit velocity in meters per second.

Stack Diameter—This  parameter gives the  inner stack diameter
in meters  and no default  is provided.
                                      4-26
-------
Stack-Source
  Parameters

       HB  Building  Height—This  parameter, gives  the  height  above  ground
           level  in  meters  of  the  building  adjacent  to  the  stack.   This'
           parameter and BW  below  control  the wake  effects  option.   If HB and
           BW are  punched  non-zero, wake  effects for the  respective  source
           are considered.   A negative value of  HB (or  the selection of the
           regulatory  default  option)  instructs  the   program  to  use  the
           revised building  wake  effects  procedures, which  uses  either the
           methods  of Huber and  Snyder  or  those  of  Schulman  and  Scire,
           depending  on  the  stack  height to   building  height  ratio  (see
           Section 2.4.1.1.d).

       BW  Building  Width—This  parameter  gives  the  width in  meters  of the
           building  adjacent  to the stack.   If  the building  is npt  square,
           input  the  dimension of  a  square  building  of  equal  horizontal
           area.  If  HB  is not  punched or  is zero, this  value  should  not  be
           punched.  The effective  width  used by the  program is  the diameter
           of a  circle of equal  area  to  the square  of  the  side  length BW.
           Regulatory  applications  generally  require  the use of  the "maximum
           projected width".   This  can be  accomplished  by setting  BW  = 0.886
           MPW where MPW is the maximum projected width.

     WAKE  Supersquat  Building  Wake Effects Equation Option—This   option  is
           used  to  control   the  equations  used in  the calculation  of the
           lateral virtual distance (Equations   (2-37)  and  (2-38)) when the
           effective  building width to height  ratio  (BW/HB) is  greater than
           5.  If the parameter is not punched or has a  value of "0"  and the
           width  to  height  ratio  is  greater than  5,   the program  will use
           Equation   (2-37)   to  calculate  the   lateral  virtual   distance
           producing  the upper bound  of  the concentration or  deposition for
           the  source.   If  this  parameter has  a value  of  "1",  the  program
           uses   Equation   (2-38)   producing   the   lower   bound   of   the
           concentration or deposition for the source.  The appropriate value
           for  this  parameter depends  on  building  shape and  stack placement
           with respect to the building (see Section 2.4.1.1.d).

     DSBH  Direction  Specific Building Height—This  parameter  array  is  read
           only  when  the  Schulman-Scire  wake  effects  method  is   used  (see
           Section 2.4.1.1.d).   The values are  building  heights for aaqh wind
           sector  flow vector starting at  north  and  proceeding  clockwise  to
           north-northwest.   A  total  of  NSCTOR values  are  read.   Negative
           values of  DSBH provide the same option as WAKE on Card Group 17.

     DSBW  Direction  Specific  Building  Width—This parameter  array  is  read
           only  when  the  Schulman-Scire  wake  effects  method  is   used  (see
           Section  2.4.1.1.d).   The values are building widths  for each wind
           sector  flow vector starting at  north  and  proceeding  clockwise  to
           north-northwest.  A total of NSCTOR values  are read.

 Volume Source
   Parameters

     SIGYO  Standard   Deviation   of  the   Crosswind  Distribution   	  This
           parameter   gives   the   standard   deviation   of    the   crosswind
           distribution  of   the  volume  source   (a
                                                      yo
in  Table   2-6)   in
                                     4-27
              12/87
-------
      SIGYO     meters.   See  Section  2.4.2.3 to  determine the  correct  value
      (Cont.)    for this parameter.  No default  value  is  provided.

      SIGZO     Standard   Deviation   of    the    Vertical   Distribution—This
                parameter  gives  the   standard   deviation  of  the   vertical
                distribution  of  the   volume  source   (ozo  in  Table  2-6)   in
                meters.   See  Section  2.4.2.3 to  determine the  correct  value
                for this  parameter.   No  default  value  is  provided for this
                parameter.


Area Source
Parameters

         XO     Width of Area Source—This  parameter  gives  the width  of  the
                area  source  (x0  in  Table  2-6}   in  meters.   This  parameter
                should be the  length  of one side  of  the  approximately  square
                area source.  No default is provided for  this  parameter.


    f. Source  Data Input Order.   There are  from one to  four data  input card

groups of one or more cards each  required  to input the  source data.   The data

cards and parameters required depend on the source type (TYPE) and on the  para-

meters  DISP,   QFLG,  NVS  and  the  concentration/deposition  option  parameter

ISW(l).   Card  Group 17  is  always  included in the input  deck for  each source

input  (1  to  NSOURC).   Card group 17a  through  17c are included only  if NVS on

Card  Group 17  is non-zero.  Card Group 17ca and 17cb are included  only  if HB

on  Card  Group  17 is negative or  if the regulatory default mode  (ISW(22))  has

been  selected.  Card Group 17d is included only if DISP on Card Group 17 equals

"0" or "2".  The order of input of  these source cards is Card Group 17 followed

by  those used from 17a  through 17d for each successive source  input.   DO NOT

group all of  17  together,  all  of  17a  together, etc.  or  the program  will

terminate in error.
 Source  Input
 Card Group  17

        Required  Source  Parameters for Card Group  17—The  parameters  read from
        the  first data card for each source and their order are:

                    Stack Sources — NUMS,  DISP,  TYPE,  QFLG,, DX,  DY,  H,
                                     ZS, TS, VEL,  D, HB, BW, WAKE, NVS
                    Volume Sources - NUMS,  DISP,  TYPE,  QFLG, DX,  DY,  H.
                                     ZS, SIGYO,  SIGZO, NVS
                    Area Sources  	 NUMS,  DISP,  TYPE,  QFLG, DX,  DY,  H.
                                     ZS, XO, NVS
                                      4-28                                12/87
-------
                 If the parameter DISP on  this  card  is  set to  value of  "0",
                 all parameters on this card  are  expected to have the  correct
                 value- and the program may  read Card Groups 17a,  17b and  17c
                 (depending  on  NVS),  17ca  and   17cb   (depending   on   either
                 ISW(22)  = "0".or HB  <  0  ), and will  read Card Group 17d.   If
                 DISP is  set  to a value of  "1",  only the parameters MUMS  and
                 DISP are  referenced  (required)  on  this  card,  the  program
                 assumes  it is to delete an incoming tape or data file  source
                 and only this data  card is read  for  this source.  If DISP  is
                 set up to a  value of  "2",  only the parameters  MUMS, DISP and
                 QFLG  are referenced  (required)   on this   card because   the
                 program  assumes it  is to  read  the source strengths  from  Card
                 Group 17d and to rescale  the concentration  or deposition  of
                 an  incoming  tape   or  data   file   source.    Parameters   not
                 referenced on this  first data card  are  set from tape or  date
                 file source  data by  the program.
Source Input
Card Groups
 17a, 17b,
  and 17c
                 Source   Particulate   Distribution   Data—This   card   group
                 consists of three sets of one or  more  data cards each  and  is
                 read  by the  program  only  if  DISP  is  set  to  "0"  and  the
                 parameter  NVS  is  set  to  a value  greater  than   zero  for
                 concentration calculations  with  deposition  occurring  or  for
                 deposition  calculations.   The first data card(s)  contains  the
                 values  of  the parameter  array VS, the  second  contains  the
                 values of the parameter array FRQ and the third  contains  the
                 values of  the  parameter array  GAMMA.   A total of NVS  values
                 are read from each set of  cards.
Source Input
Card Groups
17ca and 17cb
Source Input
Card Group 17d
                 Direction  Specific  Building Dimensions  -  This  card  group
                 consists of two sets of cards.each and is read by  the  program
                 if HB  is  negative on  the  source card or  if the  regulatory
                 default mode  (ISW(22)  =  "0") has been selected.   The  first
                 set of cards  contains  the values of the parameter  array DSBH
                 and the second  card set contains the values of  the parameter
                 array DSBW.  A  total of NSCTOR  values are read  from each set
                 of cards.
                 Source  Emissions—the   last  input  card  group for  a  source
                 contains  the  source emission  values  for the  source.   This
                 card  group  consists of one or  more data cards  and  is  read
                                      4-29
                                                                          12/8:
-------
                 only if the parameter  DISP  is not equal  to  "1". . The  number
                 of cards  required and the  order of  values  input depends  on
                 the parameters  QFLG and  is  given under  the  source  strength
                 parameter 0_ above.


    4.1.3.   Output Information

    The  ISCLT  program  generates  five categories of  program  output.    Each

category is  optional  to the  user.   That is, the user  controls what  output

other than warning  and  error messages the program generates for  a given  run.

In  the  following  paragraphs,  each  category  of output  is  related  to  the

specific input  parameter  that  controls   the  output  category.   All  program

output are  printed except for magnetic tape or data file  output.

    a. Input Parameters Output.  The  ISCLT program will print all  of  the input

data except for  source  data if the parameter ISW(6)  is set equal  to a value of

"1" or '3".  An example of this output is  shown in Appendix D.

    b. Source Parameters  Output.   The ISCLT program will  print  the  input card

and tape source data if the parameter ISW(6)  is set to a value of  "2"  or "3".

An example  of the printed source data is shown in Appendix D.
                                     4-29a
-------
    c.  Seasonal/Annual  Concentration  or  Deposition.    The   parameter  ISW(l)




specifies  whether the program is  to  calculate concentration or  deposition  and




the parameter NSEASN specifies if  seasonal  or annual input meteorological  data




is being  used.   The option ISW(7) is  used to specify whether  seasonal  output




or annual  output  or both is  to be  generated.   If the input meteorological  data




are seasonal  (winter,  spring,  summer,  fall),  the  program  can  be  directed to




produce tables of  seasonal  as  well  as annual  concentration  or deposition by




setting the parameter ISW(7) equal to  "0"  or "3".  Also,  only seasonal  tables




are produced if ISW{7)  equals  "1".  If the parameter  NSEASN  is  set equal  to a




value  of  "1"  and  only  annual  output  is  selected (ISW(7)="2"),   the  program




labels  the  output  concentration   or  deposition  as  annual   calculations.




However,   if  seasonal output is selected with NSEASN equal to  "1",  the  output




tables are  labeled  seasonal.  Also,  all seasonal output  is  labeled  season 1,




season 2, etc.,  requiring the user  to keep  track  of  the actual meteorological




season.  Example Annual output tables are shown in Appendix D.




    d. Concentration or  Deposition  Printed  for  the  Maximum  10  and/or  All




Receptor Points.  The ISCLT program  is capable  of printing  the concentration




or  deposition calculations for  each  receptor  point input  to  the program or




printing  only the  maximum  10  of  those  receptors or  both.   The  parameter




ISW(IO)  is  used to  determine which  calculations are to be  printed.   Examples




of output tables giving the calculations at  all points and the  maximum  10 are




given  in Appendix D.




    e. Magnetic  Tape or Data  File Output.   The ISCLT  program  will  write  all




input  data  and all concentration (deposition) calculations to magnetic tape or




data file.  These data are written to the logical unit number  specified  by the




parameter  ISW(15).   This tape or data file  must be assigned  to the  run prior




to the execution of  the ISCLT program, positioned to the correct file and  must




be  equated to the  logical  unit  number  given  in  ISW(15).   ISW(15)  must  be a
                                      4-30
-------
positive value  for magnetic  tape  or a  negative  value  for  mass storage.   If




seasonal meteorological input data  are  used,  the program  saves only  seasonal




concentration  (deposition)  on  the  output file  and if  input  is annual,  only




annual  calculations  are  saved.   This  output  file  can  be  read  back into  the




ISCLT program to print tables not  output in the  original  run  and/or to modify




the source  inventory for  corrections or updates  in the  source emissions.









4.2 User's  Instructions for the  ISCLT Program




    4.2.1  Program Description




    The  ISC  long-term  (ISCLT) program  is   designed  to  calculate  average




concentration or  total  deposition  values  produced  by  emissions  from multiple




stack,  volume and  area sources. The concentration or  total deposition values




can  be  calculated  on a  seasonal   (monthly)  or  annual basis  or both  for an




unlimited number of sources.  The program is  capable of  producing  the seasonal




and/or  annual  results for each  individual  source input  as  well  as  for the




combined (summed)   seasonal  and/or  annual results from  multiple  groups  of




user-selected   sources.    The   program  calculations   of  concentration  or




deposition are performed  for  an input set of  receptor coordinates  defining a




fixed receptor  grid system and/or  for discrete  (arbitrarily  placed) receptor




points.  The receptor  grid system  may be  a  right-handed  Cartesian  coordinate




system  or a  polar  coordinate  system.  In either  case,  zero  degrees (north) is




defined as  the-positive  Y axis and  ninety  degrees (east)  is defined  as the




positive X axis  and all • points are  relative  to  a user-defined hypothetical




origin  (normally X=0,  Y=0), although  the  Universal Transverse  Mercator  (UTM)




coordinates may be used as the Cartesian coordinate system).
                                      4-31                               12/87
-------
    The ISCLT  computer program  is  written in ANSI FORTRAN-77 and  is  designed

to  execute   on most  medium  to  large   scale  computers  with  minimal  or  no

modifications.   The  program requires approximately 80,000 words  (UNIVAC 111C)

of  executable  core  for instruction  and  data  storage.   The  program  design

assumes a minimum  of  32 bits per variable word and a minimum of four character

bytes  per  computer  word.   The  program  also  requires  from  two  to  four

input/output devices,  depending on  whether the tape  input/output  options are

used.  Input card image data is referenced as logical unit 5  and  print output,

which  requires 132-character print  columns,  is referenced as  logical unit 6.

The optional tape  or data file  input is referenced as logical unit 2 and the

output  is  referenced  as  logical unit  3.   The  user  has  the option  of either

using  the  default  logical  unit numbers  given here  or  specifying   alternate

logical unit numbers.   The computer program consists of a main program  (ISCLT)

and  22  subroutines as shown in  Appendix. F.  The  FORTRAN source code for the

entire model is given  in Appendix B.



    4.2.2 Data Deck Setup

    The  card  image  input  data  required by the ISCLT  program depends  on the

program  options desired by the user.   The data  may be  partitioned  into  five

major  groups as shown  in Figure  4-1.  The  five groups are:


        1. Title Record (1  data  card)

        2. Program  Option and Control Records  (2  to 5  Records)

        3. Receptor Data Records (the number  of records  included in  this
          group  depends   on  the  parameters   ISW(4),   ISW(5),  ISW(12),
          ISW(25), NXPNTS, NYPNTS and NXWYPT)

        4. Meteorological Data  (only if  ISW(5)  is less than or equal to 1)

        5. Source  Data Cards (this record group is  included only  if NSOURC
          is greater than  zero)
                                       4-32                               12/87
-------
                                   (5)
                               NUHS, DISP, etc.  (this deck  consists
                                 of all source data cards  (Card
                                 Group 17) and is included in the
                                 data deck only if NSOURC > 0).
                       (3)
                                (4)
                              FMT  (this  deck consists  of parameter
                                card groups  FMT  (group 9} through
                                parameter card group P  (group 16)
                                and is  included in the  data deck
                                only if ISW(5) <_ 1)
                                   |
                         XDIS,YDIS,ZDIS,RHT  (discrete receptors;
                     |
                                 RHT  (grid system receptor height deck)
                  f
                                Z (grid system elevations  deck)
                             Y (grid system Y-axis  deck)
                          X (grid system X-axis deck)
                    |   UNITS (read only if ISW(5) <_ 1)

                 |  IDSORC (read only if NGROUP > 0)
              |   NOCOMB (read only if NGROUP > 0)
           (NSOURC, NGROUP, NXPNTS, etc.
        \
ISW
(I)
        TITLE
                   FIGURE 4-1.   Input  data  deck  setup  for the ISCLT program.
                                      4-33
-------
    4.2.3  Input Data  Description




    Section 4.1.2 provides  a summary  description of all input  data  parameter




requirements  for the ISCLT  program.  This  section provides  the  user with  the




FORTRAN  format   and  order   in   which   the  program  requires  the  input  data




parameters.  The input parameter names  used in  this section  are  the  same  as




those  introduced  in Section 4.1.2.  Two  forms  of  data may  be input  to  the




program.   One form  is card image  input data   (80  characters per  record)  in




which all  required  data may be  entered.   The  other form is  magnetic  tape  or




mass storage.  Both  forms  of input  are  discussed below.




    a. Card Input Requirements.  The ISCLT  program reads all  card  image input




data in a fixed-field  format with the use of a  FORTRAN  "A",   "I"  or  "F"  editing




code  (format).   Each  parameter value must  be  punched  in a  fixed-field on the




data  card defined  by  the  start   and   end card  columns  specified  for  the




variable.  Table  4-4  identifies each  variable  by  name and respective  card




group.   Also,  Table  4-4  specifies  the card  columns   (fixed-field)  for  the




parameter  value and  the  editing  code  ("A",   "I"  or  "F"   for  alpha-numeric,




integer  and  real variables, respectively) used to  interpret  the  parameter




value.




    Card  Group  1 in Table   4-4  gives  the  print output page heading  and  is




always  included in the  input   data deck.   Any information  to identify  the




output listing  or data case may be punched into this  card.  If  the  card  is




left  blank,  the heading will  consist  of only the  output  page  number  or the




heading will be  taken from the input tape or data file, if used.




    Card  Group  2 gives the  values of the program option array ISW.  This card




is  always included  in  the   input data  deck.    However,  the  values  of  ISW(l)




through  ISW(4)  are  automatically set  by the program if  you are  using an input




(source/concentration or deposition inventory)  tape.   The options on this card




that  determine  whether or  not some card groups  are  included in the  input data
                                      4-34
-------































s
CO
p/
W

U

2 2
Q; O
< M
a. H
Oi
£«
O* CJ
sa
a
§ Q
< 2
CJ IK.
S H
8i
OS fri
cu
EH
J
U
I-H


























































C
o
JJ
cu

Ll
U
en
cu
Q


















CO
<. O JJ
2 o 
CU
JJ
13 01
•H >,
Li 01
0*
'O
Ll -H
O Li
JJ 01
Cu
(V Li
U O
CO JJ
Li CU
CU
CU 0
JJ CU
s u
•H CU
T3 JJ
O CJ
o •*
u -o
U
C 0
to O
•H U
01
CU Ll
JJ 10
tO O
O QJ

II II

i— i r^

Li
0

0

X
c
(0
1— 1
JQ





rH
l-l










^<








£
«••*
(M

2
00
M













•0
cu
U

1— 1
Ql

^
,— 4
•H

a)
Li
JJ

A
'Tj
rtj



cu
JJ
cu
Li
U
01
• H
•o

to
•H
OI
cu
JJ
m
U

II

1— 1

t_l
0

o

X
c
 -H -H
•"H *Tj (TJ
a, > >
cu cu
C rH rH
•H CU 0)
(0
Li C C
Ll "H -H
cu to to
1 1 (j JJ
t-l t-l
O cu cu
C JJ JJ

H M ii

O i— 1 i— 1
1
s^
o

X
C
(0
rH
jQ





rH
M










00








4C
JIB*.
^t
«•*>
3
CO
M






























cu
Cu
fO
JJ
JJ
Qj >1
JJ rH
3 C
O 0

Li 0)
O Cu
<0
^ 1 1 1
3
CU JJ
C 3
JJ
O 3
C O

II II

O i-H

Li
O

X
C
(0
rH





rH
M









0
rH









^*
m

^
CO
M











,














01
CU
0J
(0
JJ

JJ
3
jJ
§
>i
"c "c
o to
0) JJ
Oj 2
m cu
JJ C
•rl
Qj JJ
G O
•H jQ

II II

(M ro































































tO
JJ
€ >,
rH
•a jj c
cu 3 O
JJ Qj
c c to
• H -H JJ
S-i fT3
CU O> T3 (0
U JJ
jj sj jj to
O 3 3 -O
C O Cu
01 C JJ
Q) -H 3
Li JJ Qj
(0 3 0) C
43 CJ -H
ro t-i
JJ i-H 3 rH
tO r- 1 O r- 1
T3 fO 01 rO

3 C C C
Pl -H -H -H
C L, S-l S-I
•H Qj CU Qj

II II II II

O rH CM fO

S-i
o

X
c
ro
rH





rH
M










fM
rH








.••*
vD

3
CO
M













•H

*-•*
n

u
O

rM

II

in
'*.-•
[^
CO
i— i
"^

4J
Oj
£
• H
CU
Qj
ra
jj
u-i
•H

T3
CU
C
(0
^^
U

0)
_Q

1 i
o

c
m
u
T3
C
m
'U
£
S-i
01
O
Cu
CU
.c
JJ
£*1
XJ
r-H
. — 1
U
•H
4J
rfl

O
JJ
3
(0
JJ
cu
01
cu
Li
rO

01
Li
CU
JJ
cu
£ .
tO T3
L, a)
Qj 3

CU 01
W C
CU -(
jC cu
H .a


*
4-35
-------




















n.
00
a
a
1 2
S o
< M

0,
EH HH
** S U
41 J §8
3 § a°
S " < i
EH CJ i<
i <
88
Q* t«
Ou
EH
J
O
M




































C
0
•H
4->
CU
•H
U
U
01
o)
Q














0)
EH g
OS 4J U
O -H O
H S.


01
C
10 i
(0 rH,
"3
HI
0) 0)
S £
2 2
(0
a,
cu
3
O

0
•a
U
(0
u
~- M C C — TD
>i (0 O O 01 C 0)
M 3 -H -H 0) O C
£ C 4J 4-> U -H -H
4-) G 13 fO Li 4-J *O
arH 4J 4J O W O
C C C 01 O O
^ o Tt i) cu cu
g O CJ T3 0) _.
W fl C C 0) T> ^
c o o c — 5
O U 01 U -H ™
4J "M CJ £ c" rH
^ -H g 3 8 .2 3
O *» ^ flj 5 fO *
Wr ' r 1 rtj ^- ^« ^* t4 ?
^« frt *** ^t i «*^ LJ i
_- M *U /rt ^. • ' ^pj ** t i -M
O CJ ^0 r+ M-l r* Tl
(U C 3 " " b^
Wgjj^yj O.^.r^O^^^.H
03-^0 §'> 0§-
•H C 2 -H -H -H -H X fj
4-'CJJ4J 4J"O 4J"g
(0 flj <0 '^ C "H X
i-H ,-t 01 -H 01 •a
4J34-I4J3 4J O 4JO4-I
coccu • c cu e c cu c £
•H cH -H -H r-H 'H 0) O -H 0) -H O
u 03 u s-i ro i-i 13 s-i u t3 u u
CU O CU CU CJ CU *•* *4-i CU *"^ CU ^4-t

II II II II II II
1-1 U
0 O

0 0
s *•
Jsj J^
c c
(0 <0
i-H iH




i-H iH
M M








•* <£)
iH rH

xt ^.
r~ oo
s" s
W W
M M

•
4J
C
0
(NJ ^.


*
II C 4J
o o
^ -H C
tn ^
•~* "0
1-1 W -1-1
tl M (1) i
o o *
*i^i c
0 -H O
o
CU d)
-~ (0 3
4_) ^
. . 3 o
CU <"H
*W ^
iH fS -H 'H OO — »
<- C
fl) Q) Q) £ Q) O ""O
T3 'O T3 O T3 'HO)
O O O U O 4-1 4J
 U M C
C rH O
0) 1
3 01 T3 O CU
e o u 4J
•H Qj O C
X CU CJ T3 -H
(0 T3 CJ C '-•
S ^^ f7} rn O

II






































4-36
-------
o
I/I
 o
•H
-U
 cu
•H
 14
 U
 01
 0)
Q
                   0)




              05  4J  U
              O  -H  O
                      en
                  •o  s
                   U  3
                   (0  M

                  u<3
                   
                                     o      m
    £  C

    (0 "H
    Q)  I *
        fl3


    *o '-9
                                                              s
                                                                         a>  o
                                                                      0      3

                                                                      u  -  S
                                                                                                       d
                                                                                  05
                                                                                 .2
                                                                                                              c
                                                                                         (0
                                                                                                                      c
                                                                                                                                 H
                                                                                                                                 a
                                                                                                                                 o
                                                                                                                     o  u  o

                                 II

                                Osl
^-     3 T3          3d)

CO  (0 -H  d)  <0  1) -H

    tjl -H  Q)  CT> tl 4-1  01
 
-------



















»
CO
a:
u
w

i i
(0 (0

Qi
3
0
U
0

•o
Ll
W J=
QJ O^
O> 3
20) 2 n] O
i jc
Cb fTJ CH C 4J
c2 "^ LI - •"
o u o Q. c
k* 'J W C •£ > T3
jj ^_^ C W ° -U
0) flfl /Q 4J (4^ zi i~1
* -3 o o -2 °* u
S 3 g - g - « I | §

.2c5§i§ | ej
«jc.*8*3 *j "o^S
li "^ "*^ 3 2 ^* r~^
flcO^O*W^ Qi '2 •** jQ
^* *H Q "*^ Q 4V1 ^5 ^^ fl
4J f"^ 'H 3 C ^
^ *H (Q (Q O Jj "5
3C-tJ24->Sj g -'J 0)
•jj -o 2 -S 2 3; .H
g-» H H g SjjOT
O3O3O u2S
0) •-( CU t. CU Ct, £ 0) C" U
QJ cri 4-1 4J uo^o o
(OO3C3C OJ m i-" >i 3
4J -H O O O O 0) Qj CuaQ W
II II II II II
O O O O fl

Li ^ V Li
0 0
.M C ^
C C
^H ^H
Q JD




a s

0
CO
I 0)
co
^^


^^ ^^
in u>
l-l l-l

I I

•
JJ
c
0
u
CSJ «—

0) D  o» 5?<*-i o o)
I-1 O C P Li -H T3
U4 QJ t«4 -t^ " ^^ ^^ ^j frt
&4 CU l^J O^ • . p^ ^
O U O U Li
0) M^ 0) 0) 0) i—t 0) 0)
4JJ3-PO) 4JvO4JU]4J
II II II II
00 0 .-I

tj /N t^
o o

c c
**H ^H
•Q J2




M t-l

1< vO
co co
1 1

co in
co co

r» eo
i-t rH

1 i
M M








T3.'
r*
• ^
2
f-1
2
0
T3
4-1
O
-w
•o
0)
Cu
0)
•o

w
•^


0)
tn
u
§4J
W
CU T3
II
O

j_,
O

c
2




1— 1
M



03
CO



,_)

2
CO
M








TD
C
•H
2
C
2
0
T3

O
^
C
c
0)
CU
0)
TJ
M
• H



W
•H
U
§4-1
cn
Cu TJ
II
i— i






























4-38
12/87
-------











s
CrO
a
w
5
5
re? 2
ce o
1^ rH
*£
3 a
2 CO
rH U
Q
SH
2 rtf
II
a,
SH
J
O
CO
M


























escription
Q












0)

|<3|
P&4 *O &<
H *-



a
•O 1
U 3
5S
U
O
^J
o o
Hi
u 2
3
O
U
C3

T3
U
0) 01
•O -H
IT]

C
o
M -H
H 4->
correction
awash correc
ight
5 <»
•5 lr
2 •*
s 4J u
£ JS — *
o '"P **
•o a) o»
J3 rH gj
Q. *~ x:
H •* 4J
Y « S°
ts-5:
^2^«2
M -- '^
03 4J rH
0) Ol
O -U £ Ol
C ro 4-1 T3
II II

0 •-(

U
O
C
«H
X)



rH
M








0


O
OJ
M
.-.
| t
C
o
u


c
o

C i <0
0 >i
ram uses buoyan
ram ignores buo
cTc?
Ll U
CU C^
n ii

O rH









rH
M








3


rH
Ci
M







4J
,_4
3
m
4-1
0) 01
-O T3
O
ry default mi
regulatory
O  Q) x: r* u
C/3 O »£• O ^ -*J *~^ *T3
•H D> J3 C CJ
^J «H flj 3 Q ,
Ol cu2 ** »-i «
•H 4J 3 C . W "0 "*
 "
X)i8 QJ *O^ cjiO^
4J *O C (T3 7* t-i • >-* 0)
•H-H jj US OOT3|
iDc'H flC 4-3 .Hp*'tJa'
630) CQ-M rHn,U
•a «j JS ._ „. ;!: ._- lo Q/ ,
3 OT T3 caw cu T3 u, gj 3^
18 3t3 O §'£- lH^§cu
t-it^o uu Uiiuuc ^l~* "^
tji (ji J3 (ji (ji ^^ ^ Q^ 3 LI . 4^
O O O w O O O O ' (Q
1-1 u tn u u U .Q u (j ^ Qi ""J D1
OiOi-H OiCU Oi fO CU Cn 3'^0)
II II II II II II O u r-'
O £ <0 -i
OrH OrHOrH U (0
0) U rH Ol
X) *O C7* *H 3
g U O -W 0
2 CJ QJ





rH rH rH ^«
M M M M





^
|

VO 00 O rH

«
n ? in CJ
CJ. Ci CJ. §
2 rp s ^5
M M M 2





(*")

                                        OCUt3


                                              N
                                              o
                                        0  04
                                        w
-------









METERS ,
< 2
& O
< M

ft,
EH M
^< O Q-
1 <-» & O

*** • MM
3§ §0
oq O jjj: 9
EH CJ rq.
2 H
oi s!
rj a
0 0
C£ b
O.
EH
J
CJ




































C
O
•H
Descript













CD
! 0









M





CM
rH
1
0^



*


^
C/3

2
cu
^
2












ij tj
o m
4-1 rH
CM O
CD CU
U
CD
!H C
•H
CD
O '-o
(0
W I-"
•H
X
p
5|
C C
•H
of receptors
system. (The
nates) .
U -H
CD T3
JD T3 i-i

3 'u 8
2 <* U









M





vO
rH
1
ro
rH





^
CO

Jg
04
SH
2












!-i CM
O
-I-1 II
CU
CD
S!e
^ s
CO
^ M
T3
CD 4-1
0 -H
(0
rH rQ
CU CD
[arbitrarily
er is not us
non-zero.
~ 4J 01
CD 'H
of discrete
This param
nless ISW(12)
U 01 3
CD 4-1
J3 C 00
£ -H
3 O in
2 Cu O









M





O
CM
1
r-
rH






e^
p!
SH
2
v
2












4-> 01
3 -H
Cu£ •
C 4-> rH
01
•H
U
CD O 4J
X «W -H
^ S
l*-l
§0)
- e10
"*.S CD
x x:
ro 4J
£ E °
5 ^
c^ °
o £ w.
S «
(0
rH
W ro M-i
C 4J 'H
O ro
01 rQ TO
rO c
"rH^
ro
U 01
<+-! -H -H
O cj*
O ^
rH Q)
O 4J
U 5-1 0)
CDOE
J3 CD <0
§4J ^4
0) ro
2 £ Cu









M





«*
CM
1
rH
CM





^
Jg
ty3
irf
H
CO
2












-P -O 4J
C C rH
•H rO 3
-O <0
•n MH
•O rQ
Q) <"
-S | «
id categories
rence of v
im is 6 and I
01 u =
* 3 -H
01 rj ^ O
0 e
•o m o
C W
'S "o H C
(0
i— i
O >i C
U O "4-1
C -H -H
i-l CD 4J
CD 3 U <11
jQ rji 0) 3
§0> S-l r-H
tj 'H rO
2 14-1 T3 >









M





CO
CM
1
in
CM





^
Q
U
U
CU
C/2
2












CD T3 vO
JS C
4J rfl to
•H
.S "S -^
S-1
« M>2
 r»
jS 5
stability ca
ccurrence of
um is 6 and
o e
•H
of Pasquill
frequency or
ion. The max
nk or 0.
U 4J (0
CD 4J U rH
ffr f] ni Q
§'H t>4
O -H UH
2 'r~t 13 *H









M





CM
on
1
Ot
(M





*
U

0)
EH
CO
2












«l
•H

ro

O
(VI
II
in
M
JJ
a
•H
(1)
a
4J
0)
(0
u
0)
j2

4-1
o

^
(0
U

•o
C
ro
£
rO
u
O
u

0)
4-)

£
rH
ro
U
•H
4->
(0

O
3
rO
4-1
CD
CO
CD
t-4
co

01
u
CD
1 1
CD
(0 .
^-* t3
(0 cu
Cu en
3
CD
01 rji
CD C
A -H
H 0)

-------








*
(K
s
w
2 s
Ce O
^ t-H
CU EH
04
P S
O4 U
M W
g Q
CJ 2
S H
Jtf ^"
O O
0.

H
J
U
M









.
"

























O
•H
4-1
O4
•H
O
01
CU
Q












CU
Z t3 ^"*
< O 4J
« O 10
« 4J 14
O -H O
pti *O fa
w —





01
(2
•a 1
U 3
HJ rH
O O
o




CU
1 1
CU CD
£ £
n> 
cn

i

cn
cn






Oi
Q
EH
OT
Z









cn


T3 UD
C rH
(0
01
• H
-0 4J
S?
CU ^
cu
•O
C cu
•H .C
5 4J
•o
ccurrence of
ximum is 16 an
o *o
cu
M-t .C •
OHO
S-i
&g °

cu 4J «J
3 U rH
O1 cu J3
CU S-l
U -H 14-4
<4-l T3 "H












































4J • (0 U
3 cu O
04 CU c
4-1 (0 O
3 4-> .H —
O 4J rH
•H rH
O 4J T3 N-'
4H &0 W
•H -H
14 0) JjJ
0» 3
O4
4J 0) "g t>
"ti 10 cn
i * C
O CU .ZJ
u 1 m
| * ••* '*4
CJ ^ ^7\
c  3 H
o

1X3 <-'
aj C
« 2.2
^ CU 4J
J3 (0
e c

(0 c !Q
tn i e
«-" Q O
< M U






I-H
O
M







^* oo

1 1 •

rH 10










8
Z









•4<


Jtf
P
CU
TD
S-i
(0
U
4J
Cu
J5
4J
omitted from
01
^ •
(0 °
U u
fl (14
4-1 ^~i
•38
U
01 2
•H
.C M-l
H "H














0
00

• • 1

r-
























0) rH
01 m
3 3
TJ
0 '>
e ID-numbers
utput and ind
u o
3 CU
O U
01 U
3
cu O
.C w
>1 *
!tj -g
s.1
m u
cu
5 ^
"^
CU C
01 .^
3 e
I-l
>i O

ij
V4 C
,< -n






vO
M
cn
rH






4H
























. !
o
C
o
c
(0
(0
u
w*
S-,
Cu
cu
,£
4-1

>1
•°
r-H
rH
<0
u
•H

(0 •

O
3
(0
-U
cu
01
cu
<0

M
(-1
ai

cu
£ •
(0 T3
U CU
-------
U  C




CO
a
'ARAMETE
'ION
u* _H
Oi
EH M
M W
Q
OS Q
0 §
5 ^

O Cs
0 O
C< fa
ex

EH
t»J
CJ
CO
•"""^




























Description






CU

S O •4J
a 4-> u
O -H O
fa T3 fa
w ^-







01
•s §
M "a
°



0)
0) a)
e e
(0 (0
l-> 2
CU

ft
3
O
M
U

•o
m
U
._
C
o
•H
;ers giving the concentration (deposit
charact
o






o
rH








O
^*
1
rH





CO
H
M
5





<
*
in


>1 01
rH -H
rH
"3 _
put units. This label is automatic
the parameter TK on Card Group 13
4J in
3 .H
O
T3
4J CU
C rH
•H rH
'_! -H
ft MH






































C
•H


4-1
S-i
flj
4->
M
T3
CU
JS
o
ft
cn
•H
i-H
cu
i-H
01
•H
4-1
4-1
M
aulted.
umn 1.
0) O
T3 O






































4J 
C .
ters giving the source strength i
lis label is automatically filled if.
^^
u
(0
JC •
o cn
4J
•H
0 C
•* 3






O
rH








O
CO
1
i-H


















4-) CO OJ
M .H ft
JC <0
EH 4->
•a ^
^rH'"
i; •* ^
3 U
flj C cu
cu i
•O rH ,, .
O3T3
M ° & S
•-1 c .5 3
•H
f"") «% O*
"t;5-
^5 - -S
g W 0 CO
" .^'H
•a •—
•O (1) rrH CO
t* -C cu ,
nj u 4j ^
CJ C 4_> O
3 -H
c ft e «M
0 ° u
01
NX '^ . *^
^rH "
^ 2 S^
s * 2-
cu O>
S 4-1
«J cn T3 3
Si -H IH ft
nj x: ni c
ft 4-1 U -H






































c
•H


NXPNTS receptor points in meters
o
w 'r! cu
O " t-i
"5"
15s
"5 «. -5
1 O ^
X ^ «
0) 01 "*
£ CU
^ H §
S1^*1
1 -5^
•S -a c
IS cu 0
-a £
-U 44
ti M
S u
T3 O
u
o e cn
ending
d syste
rdinate
O -H O
cn U O
fl O> O
















o
(M
1 • •
rH
rH

















cu cn

4J
m
greater than 2, the program assumes
the start of the axis and the seconc
cn
•H cn
•H
CO
H 4J
2 cn
f\j tl
















o
CO
• 1
rH


















. ^
01 U
4-1 CU
C T3
ent used to generate the remaining poi
group is omitted from the input data
= 0.
cu 'O cn
U SJ H
U (t) 2
C U Cu
cn 2
CU -H
J= f. 44
4-> H -H








^_^
•a
u
<0
u

JZ
u
It)
CU
^
m


















cu
JS
H

CU
cn
a
c
•H
CU
cn
• H
ro
S-l
O
CNI
II
in
S
t/i
M
4J
D
ft
.5
CU
ft
4-1
^tj ft
0
cu t{
10 ft
•o-S
T3 a)

4J
^ ^4
U-l
•H
^
2 S
JC W4
fO
4J
£
o cn
U 'H
en-
's «
Si
ft
CU
u cu
<0 01
cu
01 -C
ft -I-1
2 S
CP^
"2.2
5 -j^
p
CU t-i
cn 0
CU 4-1
.C C
EH .H

*
-------


^^
w
^^^













oo
a
Ed
s
2J

4) 0}
E e
(Q 1)
*•* 12
CU
Oi
3
O
1^
o

"2
(0
o
u u 14 O oiOin- £01 -01
OU)O3 --i:4J-rHO U-^IMTJ-H
•O 4J(N4J (Ojs-HOiz;
ing CUM 01 EH M 4J
oioo) CM-I'OS i;3
4jO>>,C4J,,3^Hr-< S ^ cf ""

E'-a !-|U Tl^ OJJ(XJr^
' frt CH Q) 5 4-1 »^ '"H
m ™ S £ ,„ •* ^ ^4J M
mmt4.cn5h" ^ w'^saa
.1 Ool cr 3 «d i-i 5rnQjOi3
ec-|Ja)oi .5£u O^g'njrH
*|J *H CU ^i 
^^u'-aH-^^oiro" ^SScl'o
o5'aj°l-^ .S * * "" e ° ^
a,"-"^0 'Ho< e jquCX)
uCC1'H 14&44J -C
o> >H Si ^ a> 55 -H 	 tiX-*Jo-'->
1 1 ? .5 | f " 1 1 1 5 5 1 " o
gcuo>OTG''05a)e'~H ^-H^^
rri "*^ i £ £ H 1| ) ^4 <4H *"^ ri ,
•Pfrt^OJ -*-*tr1-H OOOj^^Qj
OxCj)IQ(OCPC'U 4-> i-iOM o
01 C in O (0 4-J T3 I* O ^ ^ ij
O) "H i-i W ^ (0 o) Ol 4-J O* &-j J-3 ^t
^1 O) C Ol CU S-i 4J (4-1 ^ CU Ol 4J
H3iH'rt 3 010I4J (OOITSXI T3
ucrmHOirHoi-HC-HC uus-<4JO)u
IH O) Ol S^ ifl _*^ X O) 2 "H JH 0) (0 "H 0) (0
f-H(S4 COO>

1 1 • • • 1 i-1 1 1 • • • 1 (-,
0 0
rHrH 1-H14H i-HrH rH<4H
rH r** ^^ rH ^ ^^












> N




* . *
* *
r- oo
p

0)
J^
H

T3
01
en


H*
•rt
0)
J3
cn
•H
^
ro
O
(N
II
in
00
M
jj
Ij
CU
c
•H

0
cu
(0
4J
.
uj Ol
• rl CU
(0

|> 4J
4H
01
T3 U
4J "^
4J g
'e (°
o u
Ol
S-i a;
<0 01
Ol
01 -C
Cb -i-1
3
O ^
U O
Cn 4-1
S'-2
c
0) in
01 O
0) 4-f
£ C
H -H
^
«
4-43
-------
<*
























1






S
oo
tt
H
S
S
*^« S
a o
< M

CU
H M
^"} Qft
cu u
2 00
M U
§1
X H
I? jrf
CM 5*
o S
o p
Qr ry^
cu
H
J
CJ
00
M

































1
o
4->
CU
•H
tl
u
01
CU
Q















CU
J2 T3 *••»
JS O 4J
H S
O •« O
w S-







M
C
•0 E
ti 3
(t •-(
CJ O
tj





tl
a)
4J
0) (1)
E E

IT)
au

cu
3
O
ii4
U

•o
IT)
. CJ
COCUtiCUC'OCUCU'OE-) •
O 4-> O4J Oi-H4JJ3 tiCUO
C <1> CU 3d) i
(Oti s ti _ O tt US II
•H -H '£ -H ^ -H .C CM

CUjH^fl § ^ ^
5 ,2 ° |H| a> M
m _C *H *•** _fi ^ rt /TI rr-t
o°"u°oimlj'° cm
£ "fO 'rt IB U C -H <1> C 3
1 C CCO04J
X "•* C 'H O *J 'H * _,_, * £?
^o^omug^^'l
"^UnUCUtiO Cu
C" o "S „, c c <" § -H
gU-'u^^.H'H.cg^
m'oJco-c" tJ T-jS1
cu4-1 cti"^ cnxjj § ti "^
O u, W«-1J •O^-t-1
•H C .2 C .H ^ CU " 3
4-1 -H -^ 14-1 r-H CU
IT) ^ ,.nIT)^M CUG
U >< N ^1 01 .H
5 H1 -3 3 « ^ 5 a
• H • -H • w • CU H (0
CU ti ti rO ti ti ti
.C O *TJ O ""* C O CU ti
4J 4-1 ti 4J -• * •»-( 4J *O • O
IT) CU CU ^ IT) CU 'H _***
01 d) CU — ' 4J CU 01 C ^
•H UCUUSCUClTJO
O CU /^ CU 00 O CU O *""*
X4-}tl4JtlMUt4U^||






o
•
o
r-l
CO









o o
O H W
> >H
X Q
*
00

IT)
r**»
*
m
UO


T3 4J

(^ C
CJ ti
4-4
flfl , j
Q) __J
tl 3
(0
1 ^
•D
CU O
01
3 II
^s
o s
0) 4-t
4-1
O> rt)
c S
•H
^1
i| 1 4J
• H O
u c .
Q) --^ ^.
cu o
01 nj •
a> o
r— i
^i Cu PTt
(0 3 vD
ti 0
tl tl 01
< O -H








o








o
CO

1

rH












^
y
CM





4
*
i cn O
0 -u m
'H ti ti
CU *""* tl rn
g3 S-g
§ 5 hj o
e. 4-1 CU
§ W ^ a>
u x: m 5
u u
°2S^
•Su^-
*«2 g*j
u 01 y,
cu

H

T3 4J
01 GJ
a 5
cn
Q U-
/2 ^
01 3
•-1 o
C r* 0) ^ p U
2 5 n ' -r
CU tl 1> •*- " ^
tl ^ 4J ^
^ ti C ^
•H O CU S
4J T3 01 CU II °
C (T) 00 i ^
•H dj ^-^ ^
0 "2 w in ?
•n C _ I— '
HJ r« _. <^-
^•^ C t^- Li_j
OJ O O C/3 „
»C 'O *w *H
4J Q) , ^ H H
Cn.5 ti m > ; a
•> Q iU p ,
^i O^ -j-J Gi rO
fT3 0) ^ D iTJ
t4 Q) I ' Qj • 4_J • j_j
ti £ 10 ti C
< 4-1 U O -H








S

-a
%4
fO
u
*
« £
* u
O O O fT)
i-4 (N lO CU

II . . . 1 tl
0
rH i-H r-4 4-1
r-l IT) ^











8
06
b




«
^e
a)



CD O
14-4 df C
• H  CU 01
?J 4J C
Tj 
-------



fc
r

















s
w
H
H
J4 E~*
CU
£-t I— t
J3 Q£

LLJ M W
P» Q
" go
B SI
a 2
2 H
2 ^
(y 2
ll
UM U4
a.

E~*
j
t_)
w
1-1
















































c
0
•H
4-1
ft
Ll
U
cn
ai
Q












01
52 '& "^*
2 o i *
a o m
H S
OS 4J Ll
O -H O
Ct. TJ fo
pa >-






tn
C
T3 g
J-t 3
(fl ^H
O 0
u




u
0)
g 1
0) a)
E £
 C 0)
rH O 3
01 cn .-H
0) >
cn cn
01
Cn ft
Q) tJ C
TJ -H
(^
C U

Cn O
O) 4->
Li TO "
3 U <1>

2^0
0) -*J
cu
E ^ 0)
™'^5 -
(0
•S«u
fO O
4-1 'o ^
C
Ol c 4J
la .2 S
§ u "^
4^ 3 a>
O *i i <"!
4-1
I>i
(0 ">
U CD
u cn ai
< 4-l
rH IT) •—











r^
H




4t
4C
O
rH


tO 'O 4-1
C 3
rO ft
cn C
tn 2. 4-i
%$°
« S-
£ 0)
fQ
^1 tj
C 4J o
•H -H
rH
•H Ol
01 -O £
4J <0 4-1
JS -1-1
1 4-1 4J . . Ol
Li O X i
Ol Ol H
& c *•
i.2 »
-^ J £
^ c ^
(0 §
•H ^ 0)
4J (X)

•a
0)
3
c - oo , S1
ai <" G
4-1 H
o cn i 01
Q, TO " -Q
^"*
0^0 H
4J ffl «
Cn ^n ^ E "^ •
•H 'H ; S "5 tQ
0) t3 O .rH '_, ° i *" (U
-2 ft
^ w
Q)
TD CD 3
TO ft >1 'H
Ll 4J TO
C^ C ^ > -i
'Hj H jj
TO ^ J3 3 l[
U * jj C --~
j_) cn ^ in
^"^ ^ 53 S n-l ^ ST
X * > PC ° ^
EajS ^^"^
0 ^ 5 •§ -0 ^ 4J
4-t ! -i, O "^
r\ r* U-i f~* uJ Qj
0 o - • i o H a. a c
•H c tn ' x: ""*
>, 4J O 0)
>1 <1> 4J
TOOC03 TOUTD i111
LlCrtJrH U 3 C L, , ft
l-i 3 01 TO
i<^ 4-4 U> >





O

O
rH
VO

•o

m
u

u
O O O TO
rH CM <43 ai

II • • • 1 u
Q
I-H r- 1 *-i IM











s
H




«
*
i— i
rH


U 4J -H O | TO •
< TO S 4-1





o

0
rH
vD
^^
T3

fO


U
O O O TO
rH CN VC CD

II . . . | L.
O
rH rH rH 4-1









N
Q
cu
a




*
4C
(N
i-H


-U 0)
ft
4-1 TO
•H 4J
J* 4J
0) ft
"2 *
r^
ri 1 '
E
3 ^
ft <[ (
c
'H C
0)
Q) ^
£ TO
i i . j
•<— 4_F
E tn
0 -H

4-i cn

T3 0)
01 4-1

4J £
£ «-•
o 
10 ai
w ^
ft
3 LI
O
4-i
°* C
TO 4J
U TO

Ol Li
W O
Ol 4-1
JS C
H -H
•f

4 -45
-------






AMETERS,
M
« O
< M

P,
EH M
M ^""i p^
| -, 04 U
4< • 2 r^
" g Q"

« U 2r 9 •
< •" g 5
EH w ~.
2* EH
•^ ^«
CM 2
rn 2
Qj [t,
O.
EH

M






























Description













(U

I? O 4J
CM C.? 13
CM4J g
O -H O
W ^^





VI
•0 1
«H 3
(0 -H
O O
U

^4
0) •
4J
ID (I)
E €
S^
CU

CU
3
0

o

"S
u
-P 0)
O £
(U -P
t-i
0 >i
U .0
2-a
•P Q)
direction correction parameter used
any difference in north as defin

'O
c u
• H O










o
.
0
rH
fa






O
rH
1
i-H





H
EH
1
05




^t
•ft
CO
rH

T3 (Q *^
 Sj <-»-
Hi it) w
ence receptor grid system and north
le weather station at which the we
recorded. The value of ROTATE is
t-> 73
0) 0)
H-4 ^4
d7 ^i 0>
^ J3 S















































each wind direction category.

£
O
U










































0)
r*
[ i

 ij
TD 4-1









































0
O


X

ntration default for TK is ]
0)
CJ
c
o
u









































01 u a)
£ Q) .*"!
(0 CU EH
S-i
S"I
rj (0 •
•H ^S
en
grams per gram assuming output in
ubic meter and input source units in
d per square meter for area sou:
o u c
S-i 0
O t-i U
• H ID 01
£ CU W









































C C
••H 'H

i i o]
3 4-1
O
(1)
ition default for TK is 1 assuming
per sguare meter and input sourci
01 01
0 £
CU (D
O) U
t3 &>









































01
g
«J

D>
C
(0
grams for stack and volume sources
quare meter for area sources.
rH 01
rt)
4J !-•
O 0)
4J CU









































0)
f"i
EH

T3
<5)
01
3
C
•iH
01
•H
CO
S-l
o
rg
II
in
S
M
4J
3
CU
• H
0)
CU
(13
4J
•
ui (O
-H CU
m
^ 4J
o
TD -^
o*
*O 5
U '
10 a)
O £
4J

cu o
c t-j

rj
•^ "a
4J
£
O 01
S-i •H
01
10 «
JJ -IJ
4J ^
**H l£
fci 0)
fl 01
d)
CO -C
CU *•

ll
-o c
m XI
u (0

0) i-J
01 o
0) 4-1
J= C
EH -^
*
4-46
-------
























in
OS
w
a
25
r? 2
a o
i< M
QJ EH
EH M
*D OH
O4 U
2 01
M U
Q
§Q
< 2
U «
S EH
•^ ^
CK 
e E
(8 (0
^ 2

CU

04
3
O
u
O

"2
(0
CJ
0)

Q
f^
m

co
H
M

S.I
ramete
m
CU
jj

s
c
0)
01
o
j2


O)
•H

•4-J
i-H
3
(v
-0

cu
XI
JJ

"4-1
M



































^
EH




*
«
CO
rH












JJ
0)
01
rH
rH
(0
U
••H
JJ

O
JJ
3
(0

01
'H
in

04
O
s-i
T3
l_|
T3
o

o






























41**fc
•
JJ

Q
£J
^-^

^^
•
jj
c
o
u
^"^


S-i CU
CU X!
rC H

rd
cu .
•5 T3
CU
!H U
O 3
01
\_\ (fl
ti CO
ae
U 01
•H (0
<0 2
JJ *O
(0 CU
CO
T1 OJ
c w
3
O T!
LJ C
CU
> CO
O £
»Q 4-1
CO
01 u
(_l lr^
CU £
CU
£ ,,
-M
c *
• •-*
c
4_) O
f. -H
O> -U
•H (0
CU JJ
K 01









O
•
o
rH
b






O
m
I
rH
(M











OS
N






















01
£j
CO
JJ
£
o

o
rH
01
• r-t

CU
3
i— i
5
JJ
i-H
3
(Q
«4H
CU
•o















































T3
C
O
u
cu
01

u
cu
04

01
u
cu
JJ
cu •
SNu
•,
•H (0
01 u •
1^
Q
>i C

t_l
rH O
> 0
O 1-4
£ CO
CU N
t4
01
JJ -H
C
ro JJ
JJ rH
3 3
rH CO
i— t U-l
aOJ
£}















































T3
CO
CU
O<
01

ro
C
•H
2
,C"i
u
(0
CO
3
>
c

•H
T3
CO

CU
r^
JJ
Oi
c
•H
G
• H
ftj
JJ
0
u

>1

u
<









0

o
rH

VO





o
rH
1
rH










Q£
itf
03





«

*4*
rH


01 CU
co .c
3 -U
rH
ro u
> O

rH U
3 CU W
m -s^ -H
0) c !H
T3 O
m g1
2 ! 4J
£ 3 «J
C-i rH y
"O T1
rri C *
Tjj (C l ' T3
H— '
3
a
tj in *j *^
O • ro "H
O^ rH *O
CU C
JJ CO ro
(0 1-4 JJ
U (0 01



















0 0
CN 
-------























»
CO
a
w

S o
< M
CU EH
CU
EH M
— Da
i ~* cu u
^ . "Z CO
jj w W
we Q <=>
jo 9 0
SB < §
H O i<.
2 H
2 ^
88
05 fa
a.
EH
i-j
o
M







































e
o
•«^

Oi
u
01
cu
a












CU
§ "o *"*
OH 4-1 U
2-H O
T3 fa
W ^





01
c
•o e
14 3
«J rH
U 0
u
JJ
 cu -o co .„ en
CU 01 fl) tZ *0
*O 3 CU 9* 4J
Oi E 01 v
c £ « . *' •
H en*0 -C > £ '
to  .5 -H O -u
" fl S 0 S
S §"! S 2^
O 4J c 2 iw *
4J qj CU Cfl iJ ^
aj s-1 t4 TD _2 3 •
01 n-t 3 4J li_j ^ .
CJ -^ n»
O 01 ° CU -H »
^j *^ ^i v ro •
O ^W -^ *Q *H CD
u <" till S
^ S i-o mS
3 tJ (fl ( ^
^D i*^ CF' o flj o*
C | * rti ii t ^3 C
• H *H Jj ^^ „ (0
> S ui
* cu M
... o> 4J c :; -H c
*tJ C C O * -C o .
O .H "H -H 4J .H 01
C O 4-1 01 4J CU
>, C T-l O fl) U CU
rtJ -H CU 3 O CU U
S-l CT* CU (-1 r- 1 t-4 tj O^
i-l CU .C "H (Q CU "H CU
 NT3-O






O
O
rH
fa
CO
•o
l-l
<0
u
u
o o o H



*
*
m
rH

4J
(0 • rH
01 3
cu n)
01 -H IM
ro s-i cu
O -O
cn
M CU _.
-U 4J ^
C rO 5
C
a>l 01
x -^ 2{
Jj -H 3
<» rH -H
• H (0
•» -Q >
•* n)
^ -u ^
" 01 o
t4 73 U
cu C cu
S OJ 'O
0 2
OIT-J O
cu
•O <" cu
4H X
°2
o c „,
o , 4J -4-1 01
m u 3
SH C CU i-H
U 3 oi ra
< <4H CO >






O
0
rH
fa
10





O O
rH CM

1 1 . .

rH rH
rH





CU



4C
*
VD
rH































•a
S-l
fl)
U

0
O (0
vo cu

I tj
0
i— 1 *4H
in •**






















e
•H

01
CU
. sourc
1—1
ro
i l
+J
1
M
l-i
0)
n
1
ntification -m
cu
T3
• H

CU
o
s-i
3
0
CO








in
M









m

i

fH












i






r^
rH


>4H
M



numbe c .
o
.•4
dentif icat
•H
CU
4J
O
l-l
CU
T3
t-i
O
C
•H
T3
C
CU
u
01
ro















































.
TD
CU
4J
(0
termin
01
•H
4->
ource inpu
01
is negative,
S-i
cu
£t


c

cu
f"J
4J















































CU
.c
4-1


efaults
T3
(0
u
cn
O
u
Oi
CU
r*
4->
h
O
S-l
cu
M
tn
•H
l-l
cu
J3
C
tn
'H
-C
4-J

t4_j
M















































CU
U
l-l
3
O
01
cu
JS
c
"S
is source
^
position of
cu

•H
^ 1
03
r- (
co
u















































T3
CD
4J
( i
•H
O
CU



1 1
3
CU
c
•H















































• .
'Q
t-l
CU
M
01
,— 1
m
C1
cu
O
CO
U-l
-H
"u
cu
(0
4J
cu
cu
1-"
4J


E
o

M-4















































T3
f^
rH


f
0
4-J
U
rH "
1-1 3
0
01 OT
§•3
2 |
o S
0)
c^
H


t)
CU
3
• i-i
0)
01
• H
m
*O u
u "
Oi M-i
3
O 4J
lj 0)
O^ W
("0
o
_jLj rn
CM
II
in
OQ
i— i
3
s-i '-i 9*
CU 0) ~
(~] r"l ^
e 4J
0) o> ^
£ DI Cu
CU O
OS 4-i















































(u
4J

M-4
u
CU

T3

m
u

3
CU
c
"*H

cu
4-J

E
O
S-i
4-1

TJ
0)
4J
J-J
•H
e
o

cu
id
m

01
O
T3
U

CU
01
cu
_f^
H
*
*
















.
CU
Si
rC
4J
4-J
3
Cu
C

cu
—
4-J
e
o
t .


c
cu

"m
•4-J
tn
•H

tn

cu

cu
e
(0
S-i
03
Cu

cu
01
CU
.c
4-1
l-l
O
0
4-J
E

O
*-M
C
•H


4-48
-------
  I  —
•


















*.
a
w
H

2^

4J
cu a>
E E
rtj (tJ
t- 2
(0
CU
Cu
3
O

a

•o
m
o
CU CO -~ 4-> TD C>i'OT3
U E ^ C 3 <0 O4JCUCU
Sjior^OCucu oi'HCUcu
3«]rH'HCU fli-HCuCU
O 4-1 -H CU -H 01 01
01 ,-. 01 -H • CU 01 ^3
TJ -H w 3 aj'O'ac!
'O.HOCno 4JCCO
•-(aT3CUC!-i — 01 .H -H 01
O (0  AJ SS"!
CU 13 01 . H - CU
cocus-i^s^ si-d-c^3
M" «SS . » 'S '!?
rVLlOOeU" ™ **ITJ
&_g M ^0 5 4J " * « 0, « ^
u •§ n, 'H o x n ^ 2 <" <" &
sifsfsl ,s • g|g||
-, QuT-oi (0 _ oi?oi'>4-)
SM ?w g^^^ a § g 2 c g c g
al-Sc^^^ c » ° w .2 w 2 >,
° nj § C R C -H QOl^oiT-jtnna. ui4j
MoiC>C-us-iCue .H-H^roigwctn.H
y O^O . 4J S C 'd (0 '^ rt) 'Z! --H
4->01CLi l^-UC. fljCUO2 E 6 -H
3rd'Hcu w -H ^NOi^cu^
CU j^ .Q CO — • S-i *-* S-i Li fT3
C CO E •— 1 01 CU 13 CU IOCUJSCOOCUOCU4J
C'H4J4->3cj4->ocnucnuco
O -HCUCU3Lli-( U3<0 LlCLiCULlCULi
•r-iS i-HlOli-i3 nJi-HCU 013O34-)34J3'O
4JCU4-ICUQCUIOO01 4JOLi COEOiCOnJOC
•H C —1 "O M U > M -H 01>(0 OOl-^OlU-OlUOlft)
01 -H
all II II • II II II 01 II II II II
CU 01
01O rH CM CUOi-tCM -HO t-H (Nl CO
•H >i E
'O Li 4J Li CO Li
O 0 O
CU CO CO
U Js! U ^ U J*
Ll C Ll C L. C
3 OJ 3 itj 3 <0
O i— i O i— ' O <— '
GO X} 00 »Q OQ X)








i-M i-l (H
M l-H M







vO 1^ CO







CU WO
CO CU J
HH ^H Pu
Q EH CX
-
•
4J
C
o
r- O
i— i >—


                                           4 -49
-------






























s
t/2
a
w
cd
2
r5 S
a o
< M

H M
.si 3 a
~ 	 0u CJ
jj rH W
we Q Q
^ 2 EH
Jtf itf
82
0
05 b
04

H
CJ
M











































O
•H
4->
Cb
•H
Li
O
01
0)
a














cu

2 o 4J
a o 
CJ 0
CJ
Li
0)
4J
(I) 0)
e €
2 5
cu
3
O
Li
T3
Li
<0
CJ
*. 'Q
01 C
Li to
01
is.
y
e 3
•H O
W

iJSj
CJ
.-* tJ
o -^
" ^-^
T1 W
0) C g
LJ I"*
•" ^ 3
CP O
^ C 01
° T3 nj
rH CU
0) -H Li
4J 3 a)
10 rQ
e U
•H Li O
ID o •*-•
Ll *f t
8 . ^
y « c
1 ™ Li
X C °

C S 4J
(0 01
•H CU CU
01 O S
0) U £
4J 3 4J
Li O 3
03 01 O
U ^ 01





0
0
b




oo
rH

1
CT>







S







01
- T3 cu | I -LI
01 C JC 01 01 01 -H CU-
Ll «J 4-1 OlLiLl4->4->
CU Ol O CU CU Ll CU
4-1 ^ ,1 ^ -1-1 4JCU6
§01 
CU ,1 (0 (-1 _jjs P r*
r. -t-* M H E C M
H CU -H  -H Ll -H -H O
01 -Hfli 34-44JO) >,14-|.H
.,, rH I4JO3OI4JO4J
?. *i C l OiQ|'H4J 01 CUrH -HLi^
^ CO 01 01 >i £ 4J 01 >i O) 4J 4J C
01 — » .H 4J<0 (O-H fO 4J > (OOlnJ
73 w £ C 4J -H "O  14 CU 30) CJM-I

(4jCoi CU 01 CULiO'4-' 01 01 C Li 3 rH
^"OoJ O O cufl'SuMH cucpU'Scncn
rH(U A •CQNOIC'OCDO JS COC -H
OJ-HLi "O fl 4J CU (0 C 4J 4-l^01«}rH
4J-3 (O'C Jbli CU 4J -H CU JS O 4J«JTJ
CLiO?5 OnJCr T3O4JCU cu
•H !_, O Ll « 4J CU II -H 01 & II -H
"OQ1*-11^,, OlOl'O 301 <4H
LiiTj ^"OO T3IIO
8Licoi M e NOI
.^cu£=ecu o oiJcj-H
o „. c 4J o DiW'M o &W M j:
I*LI C-HCUHW Xt72-u
^t-piocu.H-p'n ^
^o^ to *• * *• x^«.
?i O CJTJOrH (NT3O'rH(M
C°4Jj3COrH rH
to 01 nj o <-H cu ii M H cu M ii ii
•H Q) CU -H -H -H
01OS 4J 4JCU 4-lCd W Cd M-lW U W
CULiXlffQU Qj Cu CU CUOiCU
4J34-I C7> >Ll 01>t tH >l 01>H >H >l
LiO3 -H CU3 -H H EH H -H£H H H
moiocurHOjs s:
CJ^WXWOIH H





o o o o o
o r- r- r— r~
b b b b




00 IT) (N CT» vO
rsj ff) ^J4 ^4 if)

1 1 1 1 1
1^^ ^^ vo ro f^
rH (M CO «1< ID




O O
>< N
O iJ O
>l CO W Ll rH Ll O Cd IH M
Q KN HOWOX >OW







4-50
-------



























00
H
S~l
H
3 *^
§ o
S LJ
C_i •-- *
• gg
2 W
— sS
kJ 4J So
s c ^ §

EH rj ^*^
^** ^ t_l
5 ^U«
S $
y5 JH
O O
06 fn

J

W
M












































§
•H
4-1
CU
•H
S-I
O
01
0)
Q















0)
55 *O **^


H 1
a 4J t,
p -H o
p^ *O C&4
u *•»



U)
C
•a e
u 3
(0 •""!
CJ O
u



tl
0)
01 <1>
E E
(0 (0
Li 2
(C



CM
3
O
u
C3

•o
u
fl
U
T3 IMOJ14-I 0)£SJ- "O 0) <1> 01
a> O .C O .C 01 
S-i 4-> -P fC t3 CQ U CD 4-> O
QJOl UC&O Q)'4-1<1)
*O LI ^ C 3 Q *O ^ *4-l
•*H rtl rt O CJ flj 5 'tH E ^ *l|
01 i > i) **^ OWOr^l-* 01 OQ)
C ni ^-* J-i 3 t3 rti C *-i ^"1
O c *0 3 ,Zj 4J O t^j
M-lU ii^*O *ijfl) **4U'i..iQ)
•H CC^^^ CuE 0,gS:? S 4JX ^oC S-i-ftotilj-HO
3fllMS2uO-|J 2*001 SniOl 4J0101
°llJ 'S.fHO'1' « K -H -H Ou_i •., ffl -H
w:"oi'02iX|4-t jjW4J oijjoiT:4Jt-ioi
^{•H >g*XU-H4JO)
4JO) cr> uaic-HOT} -H 4J C l-i 4-1
C (0 O 0) <£3 4-J (0 *H Q) (4 (0 C* C 10 O **~* 'O O O
OSM-iX4-'ooStni-iO-iC_)T3cn OSu-iStJOu-jtn
•H -H
oiv. » js M » » x:
•aoo o 4J"ooo 4-i
c c
OIII/N v vdJii/N v
& (N QJ  -a »
i-l O rH i-l O iH
a) at
•H II || -H II ||
ii i ii i
W H H U
01 a, ou m cu cu
H H ^ H H H






O O
• •
t. b





o r~
P~ r-
I I
^^ ^H
vo r-







S m










r- r^
i-t i-H



C

U

01

£
H


:
JS
4->
T3
•H
?
•0
HI
project
th.
T3
S -H
3 5
g
•H -a
X 0)
(0 4J
g O
: Q)
•r~i
0) o
X S-i
4J CU
Hi g
01 3
3 e

dj (^3
•0 e

0)
CD (^
U 0)
•H .C
O1
ai s
2
01
C *
.2 >£>
4J OO
10 OO
u
•H °

"cu II
Gi
(0 13
ca
u o*
o .5
(0 fj
3 «
rt
<- Ja1
C a,
JM
^ 01
4J l-|
(0 a
•C E
4J §
u
Q) O

A
J2 
-------





^
C/l
a
w
E3

**C 2
« o
< M

0«t
H M
<* 3 a
*** jj w W
we Q Q

S »i "^ •§
H O <
2 H
2 rtf
o S
o o
C£ b
Cu
£_(
J
W
M


























cription
01
cu
a
















CU
2 *^ ^"*
S ° -4-1
a w §
2-rt O
•O b
w —



01
T> §
(0 -i
U O
u
u
0)
0) CD
£ c
(0 fO
fc. 2
(0
cu
cu
3
O

u

•a
u
m
u


44
•H
1
1
0)
CU
4J
0)
U
U
O
01
0)
JC
4->
G
O
01
TD
CU
Cu
CU
•a

•a
cu
.i_t
4-1

01
•H
J^
H







r-l
M







00






U

*5
S





p«»
i— i



cu
(Q
S
O^
•a
i— i
•H
.a
4J
tD
U
3
01
01
•H
W

S

N
o
II

w
cu
^
H






























.
Jj
C
o
t_>




CU 01 >
J3 -H 0
4J
tJ
O °
M'-S^
U (0
i-H
C -C CO
O O* -i-l
•H "^
4J 
u C u
4-1 -H 0)
O T3 4J
cu •-< m
4-1 -H CU
4^ 3 l-l
cu ja 01
















































4-1 C
o o
•H
4->
program uses the equation
eral virtual distance (Equa
CU 4J
.C n>
4J <-*
















































i* •
0) C
CU O
CU-H
31) that will produce the u
nd of concentration or deposit
1 3
~Z
















































r-H 4-> 0)
(t) to JZ
!-. £ 4J
CU 4->
WAKE is 1, the equation of lat
tual distance (Equation (2-33))
1 produce the lower bound of
U r-H
4-1 -H -H
M > S
















































C
o
•H
1 t
centration or deposition calcula
used (see Section 2.4.1.1.d)
, this field is left blank
C CM
O o)
U -H lj
o

I-H
u

w
cu

H







































0) U >,
4J T3

rticulate size categories in
listribution for deposition
width depletion due to
(0 u
c
o

^ 4J 4J
° (0 (0
3 4-1
U O C
CU -H 0)
J3 4-> O
§u C
«J O
2 CU U







(N
M




O
CO
1
CT> '
f^






C/3
^
S










01
•H
S-i
0)
4J
1
OJ
nj
CU
01
•H
4-1
0
0)
i— l
(0
§
•H
X
(D
CU
X
H.

.
C
0
-H
4-J
•H
01
0
CU •
CO O
•0 M





































*"O ""O
C -t-i
O ITS II
u o
ing velocities in meters per se
iculate size category. This
d from the input data deck if NVS
r-\ 4J CU
4-1 ^ 4->
4J (TJ 4J
cu cu ^
tn £

^ "S en
° (0 -H
cu
>i CU
(Q 3
!H ti 0
SJ O S-* •
< 4-1 en o






o
o
rH
b
00



0 0
r-H CM
1 1 ' • •
<-H rH
rH







C/2
>
.



n)

I-H



                                                       tl
                                                       fO
                                                       O
                                                       U
                                                   O  (XJ
                                                   00  CU
                                                       o
                                                   r-H 4-1
4-52
-------
r



































v
C/3
05
W
c*
3
5 »-j
/s s
Q£ O
?? tj
w r^
M §8
R )r uU CJ
^,3 S W
C M Q
33 §a
PQ C < 2
So o 3
^^
r£f E"J
I-S S
o o
Q£ &4
QJ
H
u
&
^












k
1
F








cu cu
(-* f~l
4J 4-1
i


















c
0
• H
-U
CU
•H
Ul
U
01
CO
Q



















0)

< O -u
05 CJ 03
Isl
W *•*•



en
C
-o 1
Ui 3
OJ rH
°<3
Ul
cu
1 1
Ui 2
03
CU
CU
3
O
C3

T3
u
OJ
O
CU 4H 5
.COO
-U Ui
o\° 4H
4H 0
o o -o
CO rH CO

03 3 4-)
rH 01 rH -H
3 6
O CO rH O
• H fj 03
-P H 4J 01
Ul O 'H
03 -U
CU • CU

CO U i— 1 O
J3 O 3 Ui
4J C7^ O O^ •
co si o
4H 4-1 01 "O
O 03 U II
U Ss 03
C 03 O CO
O £ Ui >
•H u Ui 01 2
4J 03 03 'H
U CO £ 4-1
OJ 01 H "H
Ui Ui -H
4-1 O £ .*
4H 4J • U
03 *~* CO
01 G C C 13
OJ O -i O

JJ 01 JJ 4J
4-1 3 C 3 03
O .O O -Q T3
•H 'H -H
>, Ul JJ Ul -U
03 JJ U -U 3
U 01 OJ 01 CU
Ul -H Ul -H C
< T3 i O
Ui rH
cn o 01

C Q) O
CO 4J CU

U U 3 O
•H rH Ul
4H CO 03 O>
4H N >
CU -H 13
O 01 03 Ui .
U 03 O
0) •» U
C -u C II
O 03 O 01
•*H rH *«H **H CO
-U 3 4-> JS >
U O U EH 2
CO -H CO
rH 4J rH 4H
UH Ul <4H • -H
CU 03 0) C
Ui CU U. O X
•H U
CU .C O -UJ CO
O U C U T3
03 03 CO
4H CU 01 rH 03
Ul -H 4-1 JJ
3 Ui CO 03
01 O O Ui T3
4-4
4-1 4-1 CU CU
O — O 4J Si
rH CO -U
>1 CO rH
03 O 3 CU S
Ul 4J .-H S O
Ui 03 O Ui
< O > U 4-1




O

o
rH
fa
CO


—
U
03
CO
O 0 0 — «
rH (N 00 Ul T3
1 1 • • 1 O Ul
rH rH rH 4-1 03
rH f- — CJ

3«
|
C3


-


U
^^
rH




03
01 i
Ui -«H
O CJl
4H C Oi
•H 3
01 C O
4J C Ul •
j^ *H CJ* CP C3
Cn O^ G
•r( Q) •-( T3 II
cu ja 01 ui
£ 01 03 —
T3 CU CJ (N
C7* 03 U^ c^J
G cu cr> 01 — '
n U O -H S
T3 Ui £ C/3
rH CU CU EH M
•rl Ul
3 03 13 Ui
J3 C • O !
01 0) 01
U CU 01 CO
• H 3 Ui 03 >
4H rH O CU "4
•H 03 4J £ -P
CJ > CJ O 03
CO CO U CP
CU OS > CO
01 O cu G
EH 3 Si
C CJ O -P 01
O C/3 -H H
••H 2 4-4 13
j-i C CQ
U £ 3 S
CU • 4J O
Ui CU Ui Ui 4-1
•H U O 03 -H
*O Ui G
3 CU >i
4H O CO 01 rH
o 01 si -H c
4J 3 O
N.* .*
03 CJ £ O TJ
u o) 4J O rO
Ul 4J -H rH CO
< 01 3 CJ U




o

0
rH
fa
00


si
u
03
cu
00 0 —
rH CM 00 Ui "O
1 1 • • I O u
rH rH rH IW 03
rH r- —- U


CO
a





CJ
r»-
rH



4-53
12/87
-------
-------
U
u
  o



































"*
tt
a
r"n
S
IS
/S ??
Q£ O
rt tj
n
H M
CU CJ
Z W
hH tu
« Q
u 2
£ EH
2 <
u 2
CU
H
J
U
w
rH








































C
0
• H
JJ
CU
•rl
U
U
01
cu
Q















CU
§ "o "*
QS u 
CU'H
SJJ
tO
U CT>
(U
cu C
r*
JJ 01
•H
T3
c a
3 X
o
l^ 'l 1
m 'H







j-
o
n)
(V
O >•»
00 U -O
• 1 O u
rH 4H (0
r^ «- u















cu
f
JJ

^
Q

•a
01
.^j

0
.a
(0

^
H

•o
C
(0

OQ
H
M

01
U
cu

cu
S
10
u
m
Oi











o
CM
1
i-H
rH


















SN
a 01
• ^H
•a
cu jj
c: 3
•H CU
£ c
U -H
CU
jj 4H
CU O
T3
u
01 CU
•  jj

•a T>
lH C
io 
-------
deck are:  ISW{4), ISW(5),  ISW(12),  and ISW(18).   If ISW(4)  is  left blank  or




punched  zero, Card Groups  8 and 8a are omitted  from the input data "deck.   If




ISW(25) is left  blank or punched zero, Card Groups  8b and 8c are omitted  from




the  input  data  deck.   If  ISW(5)  is  equal  to "2" or "3"  (indicating an  input




data tape). Card Groups 5,  6, 7, 8,  8b, and 9 through 16 are omitted from the




input  data deck.  Also,  Card Groups  6a,  7a, 8a,  and 8c  are  omitted if  the




ISW(12) option is not used or equals  blank  or zero.   If ISW(18) is  left  blank




or  punched zero.  Card Group  9  is  omitted  from the  input card  deck.   The




ISW(IO) option on this card must be  set to "1" or "2" if either the  ISW(ll)  or




ISW(12)  option  is  chosen.   Note the  conditions on  ISW(ll)  given  in  Section




4.1.2.   Also, the  option  ISW(9) must always  be set  correctly when  card  input




sources are used or if tape sources  are used when ISW(12) equals "1."




    Card  Group  3 contains  the  parameters  that  specify the  number of  input




sources,  size of  receptor  arrays and  the  number of  categories  in  the  input




meteorological data.  These parameters are regarded as options  because,  if any




are  zero,  a  particular function  is  not  performed.   All  of  the  parameters on




this  record  except  NOFILE  may alter the  form of the  input deck because  they




specify  how  many  data items to  input to  the  program.   The parameter  NSOURC




specifies  how many times  the program  is  to  read Card  Groups 17 through  17d.




If  NSOURC is set to a negative value  ("-1"), the program will continue to read




source data from Card  Groups 17 through 17d  until a  negative source ID-number




(NUMS)  is read  from Card Group 17.   If NSOURC is zero. Card Groups 17 through




17d are  omitted from  the  input  data  deck.  The parameter NGROUP  is  used to




group selected  sources into a  combined output  by summing the concentration or




deposition arrays of  the  selected  sources.    The  user  may specify  up  to  a




maximum   of   20  different  source combinations.   If  NGROUP  is  left blank or




punched  zero, the  program uses  all  sources in any combined source  output,




prints all sources for any  individual  source output, and Card Groups 4 and 4a




are omitted  from  the  input card deck.  If  NGROUP  is  greater  than  zero,  it




                                       4-54                               12/87
-------
specifies how  many values are  to be  read  from Card  Groups 4  and 4a.   Also




NGROUP cannot  be  set  to a non-zero value unless  one or more of  the  specified




conditions in Section 4.1.2 are met.




    Card Groups  4 and 4a always  occur  together and are included  in  the  input




card  deck  only if NGROUP  is greater  than  zero.    Card  Group 4  is the  array




NOCOMB used  to specify  the  number of  source  ID-numbers  used  to  define  each




source combination.   Each  value  in  NOCOMB  specifies  the  number  of  source




ID-numbers to  be  read  from Card Group  4a  (IDSORC)  in consecutive order  for




each  source  combination.   A  positive  source  ID-number  punched  into the  array




IDSORC indicates  to  include  that  source in the combination.   A negative source




ID-number indicates to  include that  source  as well  as all  source ID-nuirbers




less  in  absolute value,  up  to  and  including the  previous positive  source




ID-number punched if it  is  part  of  the  same set of  ID-numbers defining  a




combination.    If   the  negative value  is the  first  ID-number   of a  group of




ID-numbers,  it as well as all sources less in absolute  values of ID-number are




included  in  the  source  combination.   See the  example  given under NOCOMB and




IDSORC in Section 4.1.2 and the ex-ample'problems in Appendix D.




    Card  Group 5  is  an array  (UNITS)  used to specify  the  labels printed for




concentration  or  deposition output units  and  for the  input source  strength




units.   This card group  is  omitted  from the input card deck if  tape or data



file  input is used.




    Card  Groups 6 through 8c  specify the X,  Y, Z, and  RHT  coordinates of all




receptor points.  Card Groups 6,  7, 8,  and  8b are  omitted from  the input card




deck  if  the parameters  NXPNTS and NYPNTS  equal  zero  or  if an input tape is




being used.  Also, Card Group 8  is omitted  if ISW(4)  equals "0"  (no terrain




elevations are being used.)   Card Groups  6a, 7a,  8a, and 8c are also omitted




from  the  input card deck if the  parameter  NXWYPT is zero or if an input tape




is  being  used  with ISW(12) equal to  "0."   Each of these card groups uses a 10








                                      4-55                               12/87
-------
column  field.   The  number  of data  cards  required  for  each card  group  is




defined by  the  values of  the  parameters NXPNTS,  NYPNTS and  NXVYPT.'.   Values




input  on  Card Groups  6  and 7  are always  in  ascending order  (west  to  east,




south to north,  0  to 360  degrees).   The  terrain elevations  for the grid  systerr.




on  Card Group  8  begin  in the southwest  corner of  the grid system or at  0




degrees for polar coordinates.  The first  data card(s)  contain the elevations




for  each  receptor  on  the X  axis  (1  to  NXPNTS)  for  the first  Y  receptor




coordinate.  A new data card is started  for the elevations for each successive




Y  receptor coordinate.   A total  of NYPNTS  groups  of  data cards containing




NXPNTS values each is required  for Card  Group 8.   See the discussion  given  for




parameter Z  in  Section  4.1.2.b for examples of the order of input for receptor




elevations in Cartesian and polar  systems.   The same  input procedures apply to




RHT as to Z.




    Card  Groups  9  through  16  specify  the  meteorological  data  and  model




constants  and  are included  in the  input  data deck  only  if an  input  tape or




data file is not being used.  Card Group 9 is input only if  ISW(IS) equals  "1"




and  specifies the  format (FMT) which the program uses to read the card data in




Card Group 9a.  If Card Group 9 is omitted from the input  deck (ISW(18)  equals




"0"),  the program assumes  the format  is  (6F10.0) or  there are 6 values  per




card occupying  10 columns  each including  the decimal  point (period).   Card




Group  9a  is the set of  data cards giving  the joint frequency of occurrence of




the  wind speed and  wind  direction (FREQ)  by season  and  Pasquill  stability




category.   The  values for  each wind speed category  (1  to  NSPEED)  are punched




across the card and are  read  using the format  given in Card Group 9  or  the




default format used  when  Card Group  9  is  omitted.   The  first card  is  for




direction category 1 (normally north),  the  second  card for direction category




2   (normally  north-northeast),  down to  the last  direction  category  (normally




north-northwest).   Starting with  season 1  (normally  winter),  the card group




contains  a set of these  (NSCTOR)  cards  for each stability  category, 1  through




                                      4-56                               12/87~
-------
NSTBLE.  The  program requires  NSCTOR«NSTBLE«NSEASN data  cards  in this  card




group.   this  data   deck  is  normally  produced by the  STAR  program of  the




National Climatic Data Center (NCDC).




    Card Group 10 is the  average ambient air  temperature  (TA).   NSTBLE values




are read from  each  data card in  this group,  and  there is  one data  card  for




each  season,   1  through NSEASN.   Card  Group  11  is  the  median mixing  layer




height  (HM)  for  each speed and  stability  category and  season.   The  program




requires NSPEED  values  per data  card  and one data  card for  each  stability




category, 1 to NSTBLE.  A group of these cards is   required for  each  season (1




to  NSEASN)  for a total of NSTBLE*NSEASN  data cards  in  Card Group  11.   Card




Group  12  is the  vertical  gradient of  potential  temperature  (DPDZ)   for  each




wind  speed  and stability  category.   NSPEED values  are  punched  across  the card




and NSTBLE  cards (1  to NSTBLE)  are  punched for  this  group.   Card   Group  13




contains meteorological and model constants;  a detailed  description  of  these




parameters  (ROTATE,  TK, ZR, G  and DECAY)  is  given  in  Section 4.1.2  above.




Card  Group  14  is the median wind speed for each wind speed category (UBAR)  and




there  are  NSPEED values  read  from  this card  group.   Card  Group  15 is  the




median  wind direction  for  each wind direction category  (THETA).   There  are 8




values  read from each  data card in  this group  up  to  a  maximum of  NSCTOR




(normally  16)  values.   Card Group  16,  the last  of  the  meteorological  input




card  groups,  provides  the  wind speed power  law exponents  (P)  for each  wind




speed and  stability category.   There are NSPEED values read  per data card and




NSTBLE  (1 to NSTBLE) cards  read in this group.




    The  last card groups in the  input  data deck.   Card Groups  17  through 17d,




consist of  source related  information.   Card Groups 17 through  17d are always




input  as a  set of cards for each individual  source and each of these sets (17




through 17d are  input in ascending order of the source  ID-number (NUMS).   Card




Group 17 provides  the source  ID-number (NUMS),  the  source type  (TYPE),  the
                                      4-57
-------
source disposition (DISP), etc.   This  data card is  included  in the input card




deck for each card input source,  1 to NSOURC.   As  shown in Table 4-4,  some of




the card columns  (43  through  78)  on this card may or may not  contain parameter




values, depending on  the  source  type.   The last parameter  (NVS)  on  this  card




determines whether Card Groups 17a  through  17c are read or not.   These card




groups are not  included in the input deck  if NVS  equals zero.   The  last  card




group, Card Group  17d,  contains  the source emissions  (Q).  This  card group is




not included  in  the  input data  deck if  the  parameter DISP  on Card Group 17




equals "1."   The  number of cards and values  in this card group depends on the




parameter QFLG  on Card Group  17.   If QFLG equals  blank  or  zero,  the source




emissions are a  function of  season only  and  one  data card is read with MSEASM




values punched  across  it.   If QFLG is equal  to "1,"  the program  assumes  the




source  emissions are  a function  of  stability category  and  season.   In this




case, NSEASN data cards (1 through NSEASN) are  required with  NSTBLE values per




card.  If QFLG  is equal to "2," the program assumes the source  emissions are a




function of  wind speed  and  season.  There  are NSEASN data cards  read  with




NSPEED  values per  card.  If  QFLG is equal  to "3,"  the program  assumes  the




source emissions are a  function  of wind  speed, stability and season.   In this




last  case,  the  program  reads NSTBLE data  cards containing  NSPEED values for




each  season  (1  to NSEASN)  for  a total  of  NSTBLE*NSEASN  data   cards.   The




program  continues to  read sets  of data  Card Groups  17  through  17d  until  a




negative  source ID-number is  encountered  or until  it has  read  these  cards




NSOURC times.




    b.  Disc  or Tape  File  Input Requirements.   The  ISCLT program can  accept  a




source  inventory  file  previously  created by  the  ISCLT  program.   This  is  a




binary  file  written  using the FORTRAN I/O  routines  and created on a  previous




run of the  ISCLT program.  This  file  contains all of the program  options  that




affect  how  the model concentration  or  deposition calculations  were performed
                                      4-58
-------
(except  ISW(9)),  all  of   the   receptor  and  elevation  data,   all  of  the

meteorological data,  all  of  the  source  input  data and  the  result's  of  the

seasonal  (annual)  concentration  or  deposition  calculations  at each receptor

point.   The  program  reads  the  data  from  the  FORTRAN  logical  unit  number

specified by  ISW(14).  The  tape  data are  read only if option  ISW(5)  equals "2"

or "3."  The  input  file  requires the user  to  omit specified  data card  groups

from  the input deck  and  makes the input  of some parameter values  unnecessary.

The omitted Card Groups and unnecessary parameters  are  indicated by  a *  or **

in the  Card Group and Parameter Name  columns of  Table  4-4.  The  format and

exact contents of the input file  are  discussed in Section 4.2.4.b below.



    4.2.4  Program Output Data Description

    The  ISCLT  program generates  several  categories of  printed output  and an

optional output  source/concentration  or  deposition  inventory  tape (or  data

file).  The following  paragraphs  describe the format and content of both forms

of program output.

    a.  Printed  Output.  The  ISCLT program generates 11  categories  of printed

output, 8 of  which  are tables of  average  concentration or total  ground-level

deposition.    All  program printed  output  is optional except  warning and error

messages.  The printed output categories are:


        •  Input Source Data

        •  Input Data other than Source Data

        •  Seasonal Concentration (Deposition) from Individual  Sources

        •  Seasonal Concentration (Deposition) from Combined Sources

        •  Annual Concentration (Deposition) from Individual Sources

        •  Annual Concentration (Deposition) from Combined Sources

        •  Seasonal  Maximum  10  Concentration   (Deposition)  Values  from
          Individual Sources



                                      4-59                               12/87
-------
       •  Seasonal  Maximum  10  Concentration  (Deposition)   Values   from
          Combined Sources

       •  Annual  Maximum  10  Concentration  (Deposition)  Values   from
          Individual Sources

       •  Annual  Maximum  10   Concentration  (Deposition)  Values   from
          Combined Sources

       •  Warning and Error Messages


The first line  of each page  of output contains  the  run title (TITLE) and  the

page number  followed by  the  major heading  of the type or category  of  output

table.

    The example output  shown  in  Appendix D is generated from the example given

in Section 2.6.   The tables  are  defined by  their  respective  headings and  are

all optional, depending on the parameters ISW(7),  ISW<8),  ISW(IO), and ISW(ll)

or ISW(12).  Also,  the ISCLT  program has an option (ISW(16))  of compressing

the  output  tables  by  minimizing  the  number  of new  pages  started  by  new

tables.  This option will save on the paper output, but the user should  become

familiar  with  the  program output  format  before using it.  Also, the program

has the option  (ISW(17))  of  specifying the number of lines  the  printer  prints

per  page.   This value must be correct  in order for the program to  maintain a

correct output  format.  The program defaults  to 57 lines per  printed  page.   If

the  printer  at your installation  is  different,  input the  correct  value into

ISW(17)  on Card  Group  2.   The  warning and error  messages  produced  by  the

program  are generated  by data  errors  within the  ISCLT  program and are  not

associated with errors  detected by the computer.system on  which  the  program is

being  run.  These errors are given in Section 4.2.6 below.

     b.  Master  File Inventory Output.   The  ISCLT  program will, on  option,

generate  an output  master source/concentration or  deposition inventory file.

This file is written only if  the  parameter  ISW(5) equals  "1" or "3" and  cha

data are written in binary to the  FORTRAN logical unit specified by ISW(15).
                                       4-60
-------
,The  format  and contents  of the  ISCLT  input/output  tape  are  shown  in  Table

4-5.   This  table  gives  the  Logical  Record, Word  Number,  Parameter  Name  and

whether  the  data  are   in an  integer  or  floating  point  (real)   format.   The

logical  record gives  the  order  the  respective  data  records are  written to

tape.   Some  of the  logical  records  shown  in Table  4-5  may or  may not be

present  on  the  tape,   depending  on  the  options  ISW(4) and  MSEASN.   Logical

record 4 is not on the  tape  if the  parameter ISW(4) is  zero.   Also,  records 7

through  10 are concentration or deposition records and depend on the number of

seasons, NSEASN.   If the user is  using  annual  data,  only   record  7 out of

records  7 through  10 will be on the tape.  Records 6 through 10 are written to

the tape for each source  input  to the program.   The last record  written  for a

program  run has  an integer 999999  in word 1 (MUMS) of  the record and two end

of file marks  (magnetic tape only) are written after this record.



    4.2.5  Page and Tape  Output Estimates

    This section  gives approximations  to the tape output  and page output for

the  ISCLT  program.   Because  of  the  variability  of  problem  runs  and  input

parameters,  the   equations  in  this  section  are  meant  only  to  give  an

approximation  of the upper  limit of the page or tape usage function.

    a.  Page  Output.   The  total  number  of pages  of  output  from the  ISCLT

program  depends on the problem being run and is given by:


                    Pages   =  A + B + C                                   (4-4)

       where*

          A  =     0   ;   if  the program input data is not printed
               or
                   16   ;   if  input  data  other  than  source  data is  printed
                            (ISW(6) = "1")
 *The  [] symbols indicate to round up to the next largest integer if there
  is any fractional part.
                                      4-61
-------
                                   TABLE 4-5


                           INPUT/OUTPUT TAPE FORMAT
Tape
Logical
Record
1










Relative
Word
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9-32
33 - 52
53 - 72
Parameter
Name
NSOURC
NXPNTS
NYPNTS
NXWYPT
NSEASN
NSPEED
NSTBLE
NSCTOR
ISW
UNITS
TITLE
Integer (I)/
Floating Point (FP)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2


3


4*
            1  - NXPNTS+NXWYPT      X

            1  - NYPNTS+NXWYPT      Y

            1  - NXPNTS*NYPNTS      Z
               +NXWYPT

            i  _ NXPNTS*NYPNTS      RHT
               +NXWYPT •
FP

FP

FP



FP
5 1 - 2304
2305 - 2328
2329 - 2472
2473 - 2508
2509 - 2514
2515 - 2550
2551 - 2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
FREQ
TA
HM
DPDZ
UBAR
P
THETA
ROTATE
G
ZR
DECAY
TK
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
*Tape logical record 4 is on the tape only if the parameter ISW(4) is non-zero.
*** Tape  logical record  4a  is on the  tape only if the parameter  (ISW(25) is
non-zero.
                                      4-62
                                                                       12/87
-------




TABLE 4-5
(Cont. )
INPUT/OUTPUT TAPE
Tape
Logical
Record
6**

















7**

8**

g**

10**

last
Relative
Word
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 - 33
34 - 53
54 - 73
74 - 89
90 - 105
106 - 249
250
251
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1 - NXPNTS*NYPNTS
+NXWYPT
1
Parameter
Name
NUMS
TYPE
DX
DY
H
ZS
TS
VEL
D
HB
BW
BL
NVS
VS
FRQ
GAMMA
DSBH
DSBW
Q
QFLG
WAKE
CON

CON

CON

CON

999999


FORMAT
Integer '(I)/
Floating Point (FP)
I
I
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
I
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
FP
I
I
FP

FP

FP

FP

I
**Records 6 through 10 are repeated for each source input to the program and 8
  through 10 are omitted if the input data is annual.
                                      4-63
12/87
-------
          or
               Ns   ;   if source data only is printed  (ISW(6) = "'2")
          or
             16 + Ns;   if all input data is printed  (ISW(6) =
                       "3") and  (ISW(4) = "0"), no terrain data, and
                       (ISW (25) = "0"), no receptors  above ground.
          or

             16 + N, +  [N,/9] [Ny/(N4 - 19)]  [N,y/(3 (N4 - 11))];

                       if  all input  data  is printed  (ISW(6)  =  "3")
                       and  (ISW(4)  = "1"  or "-1") terrain  data  are
                       used  or  (ISW(6)  =  "3")  and   (ISW(25)  =   "1")
                       receptor  height data are used.

          or
             16 + N, +  2  {[Nx/9]  [Ny/(N4-19)] [N»y/(3(N»-ll) ) ]};

                       if  all input  data  is printed  (ISW<6)  =  "3"),
                       (ISW(4)  = "1" or  "-1")  terrain data are  used,
                       and  (ISW(25)   =  "1")  receptor  height  data  are
                       used.

      Ns =             total  number  of  sources  input  to the program.
                       However,  if  concentration  or  deposition  from
                       individual   sources   is   not   being   printed
                       (ISW(8) = "2") use Ns  =  [N,/4]

      Na =             Number of  print  lines  per  page   (ISW{17)),
                       default is  57.
B  = I (Ni + Nc) (N,/9)  (Ny + 11)/N4  + Nxy/(3 (N4  - 11))  + K            (4-5)

      I  =   number of  seasons  for which concentration  or deposition
             is to  be printed.   If  seasonal output  only,  then I  =
             NSEASN;  if annual  output  only,  then 1  =  1;  if  both
             seasonal and annual  output,  then I  =  NSEASN+1.

      Ni =   total  number  of  individual   source  concentration  or
             deposition tables being printed.  If  ISW(8)  equals "2",
             then Ni  is  set to- zero.   If ISW(8)  equals "1" or "3",
             then  NI   is   the   total  number  of  source  ID-numbers
             defined under  the parameter IDSORC.   This  includes both
             implied  and  explicitly  punched  source  ID-numbers  in
             IDSORC.  Count  each source  ID-number only once.   If the
             parameter  NGROUP is  "0"  and  the  array  IDSORC  is  not
             input, then  Ni is the  total number of  card plus  tape
             input  sources.  Also,   if  maximum  10 calculations  are
             being made via ISW(ll)  or ISW(12),   add  Ni  pages  to the
             total  pages  in Equation  (4-5)  above  for  the individual
             source contributions to the combined maximum 10.

      Nc =   total  number  of   combined   source  concentration  or
             deposition tables being printed (NGROUP).   Do not count
             single sources if they are already counted in Ni .

      N, =   NXPNTS

      Ny =   NYPNTS

                                  4-64                               12/87
-------
      Nxy=   NXWYPT

             0;   if maximum 10 values are not printed (ISW(IQ)  = '0)
      K  =  or
             1;   if maximum 10 values are printed (ISW(IO)  > 0)

C  =         the number of pages  expected from the system  plus  other
             processing within the job
                                  4-64a                               12/87
-------
-------
    The above equations may not  cover  every option in the  ISCLT program  and,

if the  system  the user  is  using aborts  runs  that max-page,*be generous  with

the page approximation.



    b.  Tape Output.   The  total  amount of tape used  by  a problem  run  depends  on

the type  of computer, the  installation standard block length for  unformatted

FORTRAN  records,  the number  of  tape   recording  tracks,  the  tape  recording

density  and the  options  and  data  input  to  the  problem  run.   This  section

provides the user with the  total number of  computer  words output  to  tape  or

data file and an approximation  to the tape length used in  feet.


    The total number of computer  words  output to tape  is given by


       Words  =  (I  + J + 2647  +  Nx  + Ny + 2Nxy
                                                                    (4-6)
                    + Ns  (220 + N«,,(N.«Ny + Nxy + l)))


       where
                       0       ;  if  option ISW(4) = 0
           I =    or
                 Nx«Ny +  Nxy+l;  if  option ISW(4) = 1  or  -1

                       0       ;  if  option ISW(25)  = 0
           J =    or
                 Nx«Ny +  Nxy+l;  if  option ISW(25)  = 1


          Ns =   the total number of card and/or tape  input sources

          N,.=   the number of  seasons, NSEASN

          Nx = •  NXPNTS

          Ny =   NYPNTS

          Nxy=   NXWYPT


    Add  28  to  the  total  number  of   words   written  for  UNIVAC  1100  series

computers.

    The user can approximate the  length of tape required  by


       Length  (feet) = [( Words • B)/(By • D) + .75 Words/Bi + 6.0]/12.0  (4-7)


                                      4-65                               12/87
-------
       where

          B  =   the  number of bits  per  computer-word.   IBM 360,  etc.   is
                 32,  UNIVAC 1100  series  is'36  and  CDC 6000  series  is  60.

          D  =   the   tape  recording  density  chosen   by  the  user  or
                 required by the  I/O device, 200,  556,  800  or 1600 bpi.

          Ba   =  the  number of words per physical  tape  block for
                 unformatted  FORTRAN  records  on   the  user's  computer
                 system.   Use 224 for UNIVAC 1100  series  computers.

          By  =   "6"  for  7 track  tape or "8" for 9 track  tape


    The values 0.75  and  6.0 inches  are  used  assuming the interrecord gap  is

0.75 and the  end-of-file  is 6 inches.
    4.2.6  Program Diagnostic Messages

    The diagnostic messages  produced  by the ISCLT program are  associated only

with data and processing  errors  within the program and  should  not be confused

with those produced by the computer system on which the ISCLT  program  is run.

All messages begin with  either the word ERROR or  the  word WARNING.   All ERROR

messages terminate the execution of the program and WARNING messages  allow the

program to continue.  However,  WARNING messages  could indicate  data errors and

should  be  examined thoroughly when  they  occur.   A list  of  the messages  are

given in Table 4-6 with the probable cause of the respective message.



    4.2.7  Program Modifications  for  Computers  other  than UNIVAC  1100 Series
          Computers

    The ISCLT program is  written in  the FORTRAN language  and uses the FORTRAN

features  compatible  with  standard   ANSI   FORTRAN.    The  program   can  be

implemented on most computers that meet the following requirements:


    •   Must have  the  equivalent  of 75,000 UNIVAC 1110 words of executable
        core storage

    •   Must use 32 or more bits per computer word
                                      4-66
-------
    •  Must use 4 or more characters (bytes) per computer word




    •  Must allow object time dimensioning (FORTRAN)




    •  Must have a 132 column line printer






    The program  also assumes  the  input card  device  is  logical  unit 5,  the




output printer  is logical  unit  6, the  input  tape  unit is logical  unit  2  and




the output  tape  unit  is  logical  unit  3.   However,  all  but  unit  5 can  be




overridden with  an alternate  unit number  by  input option.  If  the user must




change unit  5  to an alternate number for  the  card  input device,  the variable




IUNT  in  the main program must  be changed.  This  variable appears  after  the




input comments section in the FORTRAN listing of the main program.




    The  user may  also  adjust  the computer  core  required by  the  program  by




reducing or  increasing  the dimension  (size)  of  BLANK  COMMON in  the program.




This  is  the  first statement in the main program and, if changed, the user must




also change the value of  the  variable  IEND in the  main program.   The variable




IEND  appears after the input comments section  in the  main program.  Also,  the




user  must  change the value  of  E  in Equations  (4-1),   (4-2)  and  (4-3)  in  the




body  of  this text.  Program  capabilities  can  be limited if  the  size of BLANK




COMMON is reduced.




    It is  not  possible to give  all changes required to implement this program




on all computers.  However, changes necessary to  implement  this  program on  IBM




and CDC medium to  large scale computers are given below:






       Changes required for use on IBM 360 or above computers:




       •  Change  the call ACOS to ARCOS in subroutine DISTR




       Changes required for use on CDC 6000 or above series computers:




       •  Add the  following line on the first line of the main program




            PROGRAM  ISCLT  (INPUT, OUTPUT, TAPEnn, TAPEmm)
                                      4-67
-------
                                   TABLE 4-6

                        ISCLT WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES
1.   ERROR - MAX STORAGE  =  n,  USER REQUESTED m REDUCE NO.  OF CALC.  POINTS.   The
    program execution  is terminated because  the run  required  n  locations  or
    BLANK COMMON  and  only m  are available.   See  Equation (4-1)  in  Section
    4.1.2 for the core usage  equation.   See, also,  Equations  (4-2) and  (4-3)
    that may place additional  restrictions on the user.

2.   ERROR - NUMBER OF  SETTLING VELOCITIES FOR SOURCE n IS ZERO.   Deposition is
    being calculated and  the parameter  NVS on Card Group 17  is zero  for source
    n.   Set NVS to the  number  of settling velocity categories and rerun.

3.   WARNING - FREQ.  OF OCCURRENCE OF SPD VS. DIR IS NOT 1.0 FOR SEASON n,  PROG
    DIVIDES BY xxx.x TO  NORMALIZE.   The sum over all  categories of the  joint
    frequency of  occurrence of wind speed and wind direction for  season  n is
    not exactly 1.0  and  the program normalizes  the frequency distribution by
    the factor xxx.x; execution continues.

4.-  WARNING -  DISTANCE BETWEEN SOURCE  n  and  POINT X, Y =  xx.x,  yy.y  IS  LESS
    THAN  PERMITTED.  This   is  a warning  message  to inform  the  user that  the
    program attempted  to  calculate  concentration  or  deposition at the  point
    xx.x, yy.y for source n, but the distance is less  than  the model allow and
    no  calculations were   made,  but  execution  continues.  The  user should
    ignore calculations  at  xx.x,  yy.y  for source n or any  source combination
    including source n.

5.   ERROR - DISP  CANNOT  EQUAL 2 WHEN QFLG IS  GREATER THAN 0,  OFFENDING SOURCE
    = n, PROG. TERMINATED.   An attempt was made  to  rescale  concentrations  that
    do not vary only by  season.  The program saves only seasonal concentration
    on tape and cannot rescale with source  strengths  that  vary by  wind  speed
    and/or  stability.    Input  all of  the  source  data  via card  setting  DISP
    equal  to  zero  and  NUMS  equal  to  the  respective  tape  input  source
    ID-number.  The tape source will be replaced by the card source.

6.  ERROR  - DISP  GREATER  THAN 0 FOR  SOURCE n, NO MORE  TAPE  SOURCES,  PROG.
    TERMINATED.   The program  has  found a  source input ca;d  (Card Group  17)
    that  indicates  it  is to update or delete a tape source, but it has run out
    of tape sources.  Check your  input  source deck and make sure  you  have the
    correct input tape.

7.  ERROR  -  DISP GREATER  THAN 0  FOR SOURCE n,  CANNOT FIND CORRESPONDING TAPE
    SOURCE,  PROG. TERMINATED.   The program has  found an input  source  card
    (Card  Group  17) that  indicates it  is to update  or delete  source n, but
    that  source is  not on  the  tape.   Check the  sequence  of the  input source
    data  as  they must be   in  ascending order of the  source ID-number.  Also,
    make  sure you have the  correct input  tape.
                                      4-68
-------
                                   TABLE 4-6
                                     (Cont.)

                        ISCLT WARNING AND ERROR MESSAGES
8.  WARNING -  HW/HB > 5  FOR SOURCE  n,  PROG. USES  LATERAL VIRTUAL  DIST.  FOR
    UPPER BOUND OF  CONCENTRATION  (DEPOSITION).   The program is informing  the
    user that  the supersquat  building wake effects option (WAKE)  on Card Group
    17 was set to blank,  "0"  and  the  program defaulted to  those  equations  for
    the  lateral  virtual   distance   that   produce  the  upper  bound  on  the
    concentration or deposition.   The  lower bound may be  calculated  in another
    run by setting WAKE = 1.

9.  ERROR  -  AVAILABLE CORE  = n,  PROBLEM  REQUIRES m  OR  MORE  LOCATIONS.   The
    program has determined  that  m locations of BLANK  COMMON are  required  for
    the  run,  but  only n  locations are available.  See Equations  (4-1),  (4-2)
    and (4-3) in Section 4.1.2.

10. ERROR -  MAX.  NO. OF  SOURCES EXCEEDED  FOR  NGROUP OF  ISW(ll)  =  2 OPTION.
    The number of sources  the program has  input exceeds the number the program
    is  capable  of  processing  under  the  special  condition  c,  under  the
    parameters NGROUP  or  ISW(ll) =  "2".    See  Equations  (4-2)  and  (4-3)  in
    Section 4.1.2.

11. ERROR - STACK DIAMETER < = 0  FOR  SOURCE n.   Stack sources  require a stack
    diameter greater than zero.   Check the  order of the input source deck.

12. WARNING  -  EXIT  VELOCITY  IS  < =  0 FOR SOURCE n, PROG.  SETS TO  l.OE-5  AND
    CONTINUES.  The  program sets a zero exit velocity  for stacks  to l.OE-5,
    because  it is used as a  divisor  in  the plume rise equations.   If you  did
    not  intend to set  the exit velocity to zero  for no plume  rise,  check  the
    offending card and the order of the input source deck.

13. ERROR  -  SIGYO  <  0  FOR SOURCE  n.  Volume sources must have  SIGYO greater
    than zero.  Check the order of the input source deck.

14. ERROR -  SIG20 < 0 FOR SOURCE  n.   Volume sources  must have  SIGZO greater
    than zero.  Check the order of the input source deck.

15. ERROR  - XO  <  0 FOR  SOURCE n.   Area sources must  have XO  greater than
    ZERO.  Check the order of the input source deck.

16. ERROR - SOURCE n LESS IN VALUE THAN LAST SOURCE n  READ.   Source  input deck
    is out of order or miss punched.

17. ERROR  -  DISP CODE FOR  SOURCE n IS OUT OF RANGE.  The  parameter DISP must
    equal 0, 1 or 2.  Check card and order of input source deck.

18. ERROR -  TYPE  CODE FOR SOURCE n IS OUT OF RANGE.  The  parameter TYPE must
    equal 0, 1 or 2.  Check card and order of source input deck.

19. ERROR  -  QFLG CODE FOR  SOURCE n IS OUT OF RANGE.  The  parameter QFLG must
    equal 0, 1, 2 or 3.  Check card and order of source input deck.
                                      4-69            •                    12/87
-------
   Where  TAPEnn and TAPEmm are  the names  used  on  the  tape  REQUEST  card and




   nn and mm are  the- logical unit numbers  used to reference the input  and




   output  tapes,  respectively.    See  the  CDC  FORTRAN  Extended Reference




   Manual for your machine for  variations  in this card arid alterations  of




   this card by the  LGO runstream card.








•  The program uses  the END= clause in  the read statement for  card  source




   input data








      READ (IUNT, 9023, END = 1120) NUMS1, DISP.  etc.








   If  your FORTRAN  does  not  recognize  this statement, remove  the  ",END =




   1120" from  this  statement  in sub-routine MODEL.   Also, if  this  clause




   is  removed  from  this  statement, the user must insure  the  program will




   error off.  Also,  the  END=  clause  is  used in some  of  the tape  read




   statements  at program  listing sequence numbers —  ISC09320,  ISC17500,




   ISC18000, ISC18070,  ISC19620,  and  ISC19890.   If  your  FORTRAN  does not




   recognize  the END=  clause,  it must be removed from  these statements.




   The removal of the END=clause from  these statements  will  eliminate the




   capability  of the  ISCLT program in  somt: cases to position a tape to the




   correct file  via  the  input  parameter  NOFILE  when multiple  passes are




   required  through  the  tape   data.   This  problem  can  be  overcome  by




   writing the ISCLT  output data to  a  mass-storage  file  and  then copying




   the mass-storage  file  to  an output   tape  file   when  the  program has




   terminated.
                                  4-70 •                               12/87
-------
Two successive file marks are  written at the end of  execution.   The




program uses  the FORTRAN BACKSPACE  command to back  the  output  tape




back  over  the  last end  of  file mark written.   If  your  FORTRAN




BACKSPACE  command does  not back over  end of  file  marks, the  tape




will be left positioned after the second end of file mark  at  the  end




of  execution.   However,  if the  program must  make  multiple  passes




through  the  tape  for   the  output reports,  the  tape will  be  left




positioned  after the first  file mark  at  the  end  of the  data  set.




The  program  will  make  multiple  passes through  the  data file,  if




Condition  c  under ISW(ll)  or  NGROUP does  not  apply to  the  run  and




Condition a was selected.
                            4-71
-------
-------
                                   SECTION  5

                                   REFERENCES
Barry,  P.  J. ,   1964:    Estimation  of  Downwind  Concentration  of  Airborne
        Effluents Discharged  in the Neighborhood  of  Buildings.   AECL  Report
        No.  2043, Atomic Energy of Canada, Ltd., Chalk River, Ontario.

Bowers, J.F.  and A.J. Anderson,  1981:   An Evaluation Study  for  the  Industrial
        Source  Complex   (ISC)   Dispersion   Model.    EPA-450/4-81-OQ2,   U.S.
        Environmental   Protection   Agency,   Research  Triangle   Park,   North
        Carolina  27711.

Bowers, J.F.,  A.J. Anderson and W.R. Hargraves, 1982:  Tests  of  the  Industrial
        Source Complex  (ISC)  Dispersion  Model  at the Armco,  Middletown,  Ohio
        Steel   Mill.   EPA-450/4-82-006,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,
        Research Triangle Park,  North Carolina  27711.

Bowers, J.F.,  J.R. Bjorkland  and C.S.  Cheney, 1979:   Industrial  Source Complex
        (ISC)  Dispersion Model User's Guide.  Volume  I,  EPA-450/4-79-030,  U.S.
        Envri-onmental   Protection   Agency,   Research  Triangle   Park,   North
        Carolina  27711.

Bowers, J.F.,  J.R. Bjorkland and C.S. Cheney,  1979:   Industrial  Source Complex
        (ISC)   Dispersion  Model  User's  Guide.   Volume  II,  EPA-450/4-79-031,
        U.S.   Envrionmental  Protection  Agency,  Research  Triangle Park,  North
        Carolina  27711.

Briggs, G.A.,   1969,   Plume  Rise,  USAEC  Critical  Review  Series,  TID-25075,
        National Technical Information Service, Springfield, Virginia  22161.

Briggs, G. A., 1971:   Some  Recent  Analyses  of  Plume  Rise  Observations,  In
        Proceedings  of  the Second  International  Clean Air  Congress, Academic
        Press, New York.

Briggs, G.A.,   1972:   Discussion on Chimney  Plumes  in  Neutral  and  Stable
        Surroundings.  Atmos.  Environ.  6:507-510.

Briggs, G.A.,   1974:   Diffusion  Estimation for Small  Emissions.   In  ERL,  ARL
        USAEC  Report ATDL-106.   U.S.   Atomic  Energy Commission,  Oak  Ridge,
        Tennessee.

Briggs, G. A.,  1975:   Plume  Rise  Predictions.  In  Lectures  on  Air Pollution
        and Environmental  Impact  Analysis,  American Meteorological  Society,
        Boston, Massachusetts.

Budney, L.  J.,  1977:    Guidelines  for  Air Quality  Maintenance  Planning  and
        Analysis, Volume  10' (revised):   Procedures for Evaluating Air Quality
        Impact    of    New    Stationary    Sources.     EPA-450/4-77-001,    U.S.
        Environmental   Protection   Agency,  Research   Triangle   -Park,   North
        Carolina  27711.
Catalano,  J.A.,   1986:   Single-Source (CRSTER) Model,  Addendum to  the User's
        Manual.  U.S. Environmentdl Protection Agency,  Research Triangle Park,
        North Carolina  27711.
                                       5-1
-------
Chico, T.  and J.A. Catalano, 1986:   Addendum  to the User's Guide  for  MPTER.
        Contract No.  EPA  68-02-4106,  U.S.  Environmental  Protection  Agency,
        Research Triangle Park,  North Carolina   27711.

Cramer, H.E., et al. ,  1972:   Development  of Dosage Models and  Concepts.   Final
        Report Under Contract DAAD09-67-C-0020(R)  with  the'u.S. Army,  Deseret
        Test Center Report DTC-TR-609, Fort Douglas, Utah.

Dumbauld, R. K.  and J.  R. Bjorklund,  1975:  NASA/MSFC Multilayer Diffusion
        Models and Computer Programs  — Version 5.  NASA  Contractor  Report No.
        NASA CR-2631, National  Aeronautics  and Space Administration, George C.
        Marshall Space Center, Alabama.

Dumbauld, R. K., J. E.  Rafferty and H. E,  Cramer, 1976:   Dispersion-Deposition
        from  Aerial  Spray Releases.    Preprint Volume for  the  Third Symposium
        on  Atmospheric  Diffusion  and  Air  Quality,  American  Meteorological
        Society, Boston, Massachusetts.

Environmental Protection Agency, 1977:  User's  Manual for Single Source
        (CRSTER)   model.    EPA-450/2-77-013,  U.S.   Environmental   Protection
        Agency,  Research Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711.

Environmental Protection Agency, 1986:  Guideline for Determination of Good
        Engineering Practice  Stack Height (Technical Support Document  for the
        Stack   Height   Regulations)   -   Revised   EPA-450/4-8Q-023R,   U.S.
        Environmental   Protection   Agency,  Research   Triangle  Park,   North
        Carolina  27711.

Gifford,  F.A.,  Jr. 1976:   Turbulent Diffusion  - Typing Schemes:   A Review.
        Nucl. Saf., 17, 68-86.

Halitsky, J., 1963:  Gas Diffusion Near Buildings.  ASHRAE Transcript 69,
        Paper No.  1855, 464-485.

Halitsky, J., 1978:  Comment on a Stack Downwash Prediction Formula.  Atmos.
        Environ.,  12, 1575-1576.

Holzworth, G. C.,  1972:  Mixing Heights, Wind  Speeds and  Potential for
        Urban  Air  Pollution   Throughout  the  Contiguous   United  States.
        Publication No. AP-101, U.S.  Environmental Protection  Agency, Research
        Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711.

Huber, A. H.  and W. H. Snyder,  1976:  Building Wake Effects on Short Stack
        Effluents.   Preprint Volume for  the  Third  Symposium  on  Atmospheric
        Diffusion  and  Air Quality,  American  Meteorological  Society,  Boston,
        Massachusetts..

Huber, A.H.  and W.H. Snyder,  1982.   Wind  tunnel  investigation of the effects
        of  a rectangular-shaped building on dispersion of effluents from  short
        adjacent stacks.   Atmos. Environ.  176, 2837-2848.

Huber, A.  H., 1977:  Incorporating Building/Terrain Wake  Effects on  Stack
        Effluents.   Preprint Volume  for  the  Joint Conference on Applications
        of  Air  Pollution Meteorology  American Meteorological  Society, Boston,
        Massachusetts.
                                       5-2                 -               12/87
-------
McDonald,  J.  E.,  1960:   An Aid to Computation of Terminal Fall  Velocities of
        Spheres.   J.  Met., 17, 463.

McElroy,  J.L.  and F.  Pooler,-1968:   The  St.  Louis Dispersion Study.   U.S.
        Public Health  Service,  National Air Pollution  Control  Administration,
        Report AP-53.
National Climatic Center,  1970:
        Observations  Reference
Card Deck
                                       WBAN Hourly Surface
Manual   1970,
                                         Available  from
Climatic Data Center, Asheville, North Carolina  28801.
the  National
Pasguill, F. ,  1976:   Atmospheric Dispersion Parameters in Gaussian Plume
        Modeling.   Part  II.  Possible  Requirements for  Change  in the  Turner
        Workbook  Values.    EPA-600/4-76-030b,   U.S.  Environmental  Protection
        Agency, Research Triangle Park,  North Carolina  27711.

Pierce, T.E.  and D.B. Turner, 1980:   User's Guide for MPTER - A Multiple Point
        Gaussian  Dispersion  Algorithm   With   Optional  Terrain   Adjustment.
        EPA-600/8-80-016,   U.S.    Environmental   Protection  Agency,   Research
        Triangle Park,  North Carolina  27711.

Pierce, T.E.   and  D.B.   Turner,  1982:    PTPLU  -  A  Single  Source   Gaussian
        Dispersion   Algorithm    User's    Guide.     EPA-6QQ/8-82-Q14,    U.S.
        Environmental  Protection  Agency,   Research   Triangle    Park,   North
        Carolina  27711.
Randerson,  D. ,   Ed. ,   1984:    Atmospheric  Science   and   Power  Production.
        DOE/TIC-27601,  Office  of Scientific  and  Technical Information,  U.S.
        Department of Energy,  Oak Ridge,  Tennessee.

Schulman, L.L., S.R. Hanna and D.W.  Heinold 1985:  Evaluation of Proposed
        Downwash  Modifications  to   the   Industrial   Source   Complex   Model.
        Environmental Research and Technology,  Inc., P-B810-012, January 1985.

Schulman, L.L. and S.R. Hanna  1986:   Evaluation of Downwash Modifications to
        the Industrial Source  Complex Model.   J. Air  Poll.  Control  Assoc.
        36(3), 258-264.

Schulman, L.L. and J.S. Scire  1980:   Buoyant Line and Point Source (BLP)
        Dispersion  Model  User's   Guide.    Document  P-7304B,   Environmental
        Research and Technology, Inc., Concord, MA.

Scire, J.S. and L.L. Schulman 1980:   Modeling Plume Rise from Low-Level
        Buoyant Line and Point  Sources.   Proceedings Second  Joint  Conference
        on  Applications  of   Air   Pollution  Meteorology,  24-28  March,  New
        Orleans, LA.  133-139.

Sherlock, R. H. And F.  A. Stalker,  1941:   A Study of Flow Phenomena in the
        Wake   of   Smokestacks.   Eng.  Res.   Bull.   No.   29,   Department  of
        Engineering, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
Turner, D.B., 1964:
        83-91.
              A Diffusion Model for an  Urban Area.   J. Appl.  Met., 3,
                                       5-3
                                                                         12/87
-------
Turner, D.   B.,   1970:    Workbook  of  Atmospheric  Dispersion  Estimates.   PHS
        Publication No.  999-AP-26.  U.  S.  Department of Health, Education  and
        Welfare,  National  Air  Pollution  Control  Administration,  Cincinnati,
        Ohio.

Turner, D.  B.  and A.  Busse,  1973:  User's Guide to the  Interactive  Versions of
        Three  Point  Source  Dispersion  Programs:   PTMAX,  PTDIS  and  PTMPT.
        Draft  EPA  .Report,   Meteorology   Laboratory,   U.S.    Environmental
        Protection Agency,  Research Triangle Park,  North Carolina -27711.

Turner, D.B.  and J.H.  Novak,  1978:   Users'   Guide  for  RAM,  Volume  II,  Data
        Preparation and Listings.   EPA-600/8-78-016b,  ESRL/ORD/USEPA,  Research
        Triangle  Park, North Carolina  27711.

Vincent, J. A.,  1977:  Model Experiments on the Nature  of Air Pollution
        Transport Near Buildings.  Atmos. Environ., 1_1(8), 765-774.
                                       5-4
12/87
-------
                                   TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
                            (Please read Instructions on the reverse be/ore completing/
1 REPORT NO.
          4-88-002a
   JLE AND SUBTITLE
   idustrial  Source  Complex (ISC) Dispersion Model
 User's Guide  -  Second Edition (Revised) — Volume  I
             6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
                                                            RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO
             5 REPORT DATE
              December  1987
7. AUTHOR(S)
 Curtis P. Wagner
             8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPG=T NO

              TRC Project
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
 TRC Environmental Consultants, Inc.
 800 Connecticut  Boulevard
 East Hartford, Connecticut  06108
                                                           10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO
             11. CONTRACT,GRANT NO


              Contract  No.  68-02-3886
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
 Source Receptor Analysis Branch
 Office of Air  Quality Planning and Standards
 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
 Research Triangle  Park,  NC  27711
             13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERE:
                 Final
             14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
16 ABSTRACT
      The Second Edition (Revised) of the  Industrial Source Complex Dispersion  (ISC)
 Model User's  Guide provides a detailed technical  discussion of the updated  ISC  Model.
 The  ISC  Model was designed in response to the  need for a comprehensive set  of
  Aspersion model computer programs that could  be  used to evaluate the air quality
    act of emissions from large industrial source  complexes.  Air quality impact
    lyses for  industrial source complexes  often require consideration of factors such
 "as fugitive emissions, aerodynamic building wake  effects, time-dependent exponential
 decay of pollutants, gravitational settling, and  dry deposition.  The ISC Model
 consists of two computer programs that are designed to consider these and other factor;
 so as to meet the dispersion modeling needs of air pollution control agencies  and
 others  responsible for performing dispersion modeling analyses.  Major features in
 the  revised model code include:   (1) a regulatory default option which incorporates
 regulatory guidance contained in  the Guideline on Air Quality Models as revised in
 1986;  (2) a calms processing procedure;  (3) a  new Urban Mode 3 which utilizes  urban
 dispersion parameters published by Briggs based on observations of McLlroy  and  Pooler
 in St.  Louis, and (A) revised sets of wind speed  profile exponents for rural and urban
 scenarios. The model code now contains additional features for handling elevated
 "flagpole" receptors and a refined treatment of building wake effects including the
 use  of  building dimensions as a function  of wind  direction.
17.
                               KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
                  DESCRIPTORS
b.IDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS  c. COSATI Held/Group
 Air  pollution
 Turbulent  diffusion
 Meteorology
 Mathematical models
 Computer model
 Industrial Sources
 Deposition
 Downwash
 Dispersion
   ISTRISUTION STATEMENT

     ase Unlimited
19. SECURITY CLASS iTIus Report!
   Unclassified
21 NO. OF PAGES
   274
                                              20 SECURITY CLASS (This page I
                                                 Unclassified
                                                                         22 PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (Rev. 4-77)   PREVIOUS EDITION is OBSOLETE
-------
-------
-------
O0
-------
-------






















^^
•S1 'O-_
J
•
s3i
« c
< o
H B
















































1
u
H
M
O
w
s
s
2§
i— i
on cu
& M
u o:
H U
Rw
s
Q
Q
"• §
<4
H
a H

hH S
Q O
OS b
5~
8
O!
CW

H
O
CO
I-H








,




^
fc
1
W






























Q>
Z TJ
2 O
a u
H
OS -u
h -3
U



•O
U
(0
O



U
0)
4J
0)
(0
u
£


%
Cu
3
O
U
U
•O
u
<0
u















Description

w
u
OJ
£1

C

c
o
• H
-W

0)
0)
A
>1
(0
tn
0)
•H
<0
o
in
i— i
u-i
O

3
E
•H
X
nj
E






































O Cu
4J 3
0
•n u
5 CP
en
-H
3 (U
„ u
en u
<- 3
  U
O>.H 0)
5 W 4J
•0 £ C
g » "
o c
« .H u
Li 0)
Cu .Q
m E
AI H
A minus sign
on number implii
evious source m
• -H £
C 4J Cu
O (0
•"* O m
4J •* 2
10 >« 5
C -H **
— < 4J
ACE
£ 0) O
O T3 i-i
O -H vw






































O
o
fN)

l[ J
0




•H
^
fO

<

the minus sign,
e entered.
j= -Q
- Sr
•> (TJ
s e
a) en
U Q)
t- 3
3 -H
o m
w >






































TJ • >,lw
C W 4J O
(T! 4J •**
C ^ r-
(N » £ 0
, §« s
u a. jj  m
01 "cl . S
•H" £^
ti ^ -y «
s . ° s &
"S rg w
e *
2 " -g S "§
S,- S'C *
" oo O
(VJ C7< vO
01 >— • (1)
•H S tJ -U Q)
.c c/: o m £























H HH h U 4-1




o
O
i— i
t,
vO



O
vO
1
rH


.





h
U
g




VO
iH

«
m







o

n
f—i
m
cr
Q)
Cu
1

u
(!)
4J
0)
(0
U
s,
^M
•H
•O
10
4)
b
JJ
g
a
•H

•O
U
* (0
o

m
• H
£
(H
«
3-41
12/87